Canon IR 2016-2020 Service Manual

Service Manual
iR2020/2016 Series
Sep 14 2005
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer-
ence to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, how-
ever, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be com-
municated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 System Construction ...................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.1.1 Pickup/ Delivery /Original Handling Accessories System Configuration (iR2020/iR2020J) ........ 1- 1
1.1.2 Pickup/ Delivery /Original Handling Accessories System Configuration (iR2016/iR2016J) ........ 1- 2
1.1.3 Reader Heater/ Cassette Heater System Configuration ................................................................... 1- 3
1.1.4 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (iR2020J/iR2016J) ............................... 1- 3
1.1.5 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (iR2020/iR2016) ................................... 1- 4
1.1.6 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions (iR2020/iR2016) ............................................... 1- 4
1.2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.2.1 Names of Parts ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.2.1.1 External View ÅiiR2020/iR2020J) .................................................................................................. 1- 5
1.2.1.2 External View ÅiiR2016/iR2016J) .................................................................................................. 1- 6
1.2.1.3 Cross-Section .................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.2 Using the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch ......................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch.................................................................................... 1- 9
1.2.2.3 Control Panel................................................................................................................................... 1- 10
1.2.3 User Mode Items .................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.3.1 Common Settings ........................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.3.2 Copy Settings .................................................................................................................................. 1- 11
1.2.3.3 FAX Settings.................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.2.3.4 Address Book Set. .......................................................................................................................... 1- 12
1.2.3.5 Printer Settings................................................................................................................................ 1- 12
1.2.3.6 Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................. 1- 13
1.2.3.7 Report Settings ............................................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.2.3.8 Adjust./Cleaning .............................................................................................................................. 1- 13
1.2.3.9 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 1- 13
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User ...................................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.2.4.1 User Maintenance Items................................................................................................................ 1- 15
1.2.4.2 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.2.5 Safety ....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light................................................................................................................ 1- 16
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations ......................................................................................................................... 1- 16
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................. 1- 17
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner................................................................................................................................ 1- 17
1.2.5.5 Point to Note about Fire................................................................................................................. 1- 18
1.2.5.6 Cautions as to the replacement and disposal of lithium battery.............................................. 1- 18
1.2.6 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 1- 19
1.2.6.1 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................... 1- 19
1.2.7 Function List ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 20
1.2.7.1 Printing Speed (iR2020/iR2020J)................................................................................................. 1- 20
1.2.7.2 Printing Speed (iR2016/iR2016J)................................................................................................. 1- 21
1.2.7.3 Types of Paper ................................................................................................................................ 1- 21
Contents
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................................ 2- 1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation............................................................................................................. 2- 1
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (230V EUR) .................................................................................................. 2- 1
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ............................................................................................................................ 2- 3
2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials........................................................................... 2- 3
2.2.2 Installing the Drum Unit........................................................................................................................... 2- 3
2.2.3 Installing the Toner Bottle ....................................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.2.4 Setting the Cassettes .............................................................................................................................. 2- 5
2.2.5 Attaching the Ferrite Core....................................................................................................................... 2- 6
2.2.6 Checking the Image Quality ................................................................................................................... 2- 6
2.2.7 Setting the Country/Region .................................................................................................................... 2- 7
2.2.8 Setting the Date and Time ...................................................................................................................... 2- 7
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network.................................................................................................... 2- 8
2.3.1 Checking the Network Connection........................................................................................................ 2- 8
2.4 Installing the Card Reader............................................................................................................................. 2- 9
2.4.1 Points to Note ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.4.2 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................ 2- 9
2.4.3 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................................ 2- 10
2.4.4 Registering the Card IDs....................................................................................................................... 2- 16
2.5 Installing the Heater PCB ............................................................................................................................ 2- 17
2.5.1 Unpacking and Checking the Contents .............................................................................................. 2- 17
2.5.2 Preparing the Host Machine................................................................................................................. 2- 17
2.5.3 Installing the Heater PCB ..................................................................................................................... 2- 19
2.6 Installing the Reader Heater........................................................................................................................ 2- 22
2.6.2 Installing the Reader Heater Harness................................................................................................. 2- 22
2.6.3 Removing Reader Components .......................................................................................................... 2- 26
2.6.4 Removing Parts at the Left of the Reader.......................................................................................... 2- 27
2.6.5 Installing the Reader Heater................................................................................................................. 2- 29
2.7 Installing the Cassette Heater..................................................................................................................... 2- 32
2.7.2 Preparing the Host Machine................................................................................................................. 2- 32
2.7.3 Installing the Cassette Heater.............................................................................................................. 2- 32
Chapter 3 Main Controller

3.1 Construction ..................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms............................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry......................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.2.1 Image Processor PCB............................................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.3 Image Processing ........................................................................................................................................... 3- 2
3.3.1 Overview of the Image Flow................................................................................................................... 3- 2
3.3.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ................................................................................... 3- 3
3.3.3 Reader Unit Input Image Processing.................................................................................................... 3- 3
3.3.4 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block ................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.3.5 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block ................................................................................................... 3- 4
3.3.6 Printer unit Output Image Processing................................................................................................... 3- 5
Contents
3.4 Flow of Image Data ........................................................................................................................................ 3- 5

3.4.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions ............................................................................. 3- 5
3.4.2 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function ........................................................................................ 3- 6
3.4.3 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission .................................................................................... 3- 6
3.4.4 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function.......................................................................... 3- 7
3.4.5 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function............................................................................................ 3- 7
3.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 3- 9
3.5.1 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................ 3- 9
3.5.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover............................................................................................................... 3- 9
3.5.1.2 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) .................................................................................................... 3- 9
3.5.1.3 Removing the RAM Cover............................................................................................................... 3- 9
3.5.1.4 Removing the SDRAM..................................................................................................................... 3- 9
3.5.1.5 Removing the LAN Cover................................................................................................................ 3- 9
3.5.1.6 Removing the IP Cover.................................................................................................................... 3- 9
3.5.1.7 Removing the IP Cover.................................................................................................................. 3- 10
3.5.1.8 Removing the image processor PCB .......................................................................................... 3- 11
3.5.1.9 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor PCB ............................................................ 3- 11
3.5.2 SDRAM .................................................................................................................................................... 3- 11
3.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover............................................................................................................. 3- 11
3.5.2.2 Removing the RAM Cover............................................................................................................. 3- 11
Chapter 4 Original Exposure System

4.1 Construction..................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.1 Specifications, Control Methods, and Functions ................................................................................ 4- 1
4.1.2 Major Components .................................................................................................................................. 4- 1
4.1.3 Control System Configuration................................................................................................................ 4- 2
4.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ........................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 3
4.2.1 Basic Sequence at Power-on ................................................................................................................ 4- 3
4.2.2 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (Book mode, One Sheet of original)................... 4- 4
4.2.3 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (ADF Mode, One Sheet of Original) ................... 4- 4
4.3 Various Control ............................................................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System .................................................................................................. 4- 5
4.3.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 5
4.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control....................................................................................................................... 4- 6
4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) .................................................................................................................. 4- 6
4.3.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 6
4.3.2.2 Analog Control Performed by the CIS ........................................................................................... 4- 7
4.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction........................................................................................................................... 4- 8
4.3.3.1 Magnification Change in Vertical Scan Direction......................................................................... 4- 8
4.3.3.2 Magnification Change in Horizontal Scan Direction .................................................................... 4- 8
4.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals............................................................................................................... 4- 8
4.3.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 8
4.3.4.2 Outline of Original Size Detection .................................................................................................. 4- 9
4.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control................................................................................................................................. 4- 10
4.3.5.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 10
4.3.6 Image Processing................................................................................................................................... 4- 11
4.3.6.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 11
Contents
4.3.6.2 CMOS Sensor Drive ....................................................................................................................... 4- 12

4.3.6.3 CMOS Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction ................................................ 4- 13
4.3.6.4 CMOS Sensor Output A/D Conversion ....................................................................................... 4- 13
4.3.6.5 Shading Correction (Outline) ........................................................................................................ 4- 13
4.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment........................................................................................................................ 4- 13
4.3.6.7 Shading Correction ......................................................................................................................... 4- 13
4.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................................... 4- 14
4.4.1 Copyboard glass ..................................................................................................................................... 4- 14
4.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard glass.................................................................................................... 4- 14
4.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass .............................................................................................. 4- 14
4.4.2 Reader Controller PCB .......................................................................................................................... 4- 14
4.4.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover ............................................................................................................. 4- 14
4.4.2.2 Removing the Right Cover (Lower).............................................................................................. 4- 14
4.4.2.3 Removing the Right Cover (Upper).............................................................................................. 4- 15
4.4.2.4 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.4.2.5 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ............................................................................................... 4- 15
4.4.2.7 Removing the Reader Controller PCB......................................................................................... 4- 16
4.4.3 Scanner Motor......................................................................................................................................... 4- 17
4.4.3.6 Removing the Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................... 4- 18
4.4.4 Contact sensor ........................................................................................................................................ 4- 18
4.4.4.7 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ............................................................................... 4- 20
4.4.4.8 Procedure after Replacing the CIS .............................................................................................. 4- 20
4.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor................................................................................................ 4- 20
4.4.5.6 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor (Front/Rear) ....................................... 4- 22
4.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ................................................................................................................... 4- 22
4.4.6.3 Removing the Contact Sensor HP Sensor.................................................................................. 4- 23
4.4.7 Original Size Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 4- 23
4.4.7.2 Removing the Original Sensor (Vertical Scan Direction).......................................................... 4- 23
4.4.7.3 Removing the Original Sensor (Horizontal Scan Direction) ..................................................... 4- 24
Contents
4.4.8 Reader Heater (option).......................................................................................................................... 4- 24

4.4.8.1 Removing the Copyboard glass ................................................................................................... 4- 24
4.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (Right) .......................................................................................... 4- 25
4.4.8.3 Removing the Reader Front Cover .............................................................................................. 4- 25
4.4.8.5 Removing the Reader Heater (Left)............................................................................................. 4- 26
Chapter 5 Laser Exposure

5.1 Construction..................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.2 Specifications and Control Mechanism ................................................................................................ 5- 1
5.1.3 Specifications and Control Mechanism ................................................................................................ 5- 1
5.1.4 Main Components.................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.5 Control System Configuration................................................................................................................ 5- 2
5.2 Various Controls ............................................................................................................................................. 5- 3
5.2.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ................................................................................................ 5- 3
5.2.1.1 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control ................................................................................................... 5- 3
5.2.1.2 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control ................................................................................................... 5- 3
5.2.1.3 Horizontal Synchronization Control ............................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.1.4 Horizontal Synchronization Control ............................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ................................................................................................. 5- 4
5.2.2.1 Automatic Photocurrent Control (APC) ......................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor .................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.3.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control.......................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter.................................................................................................................. 5- 5
5.2.4.1 Laser Shutter Control ....................................................................................................................... 5- 5
5.3.1 Laser Scanner Unit .................................................................................................................................. 5- 7
5.3.1.2 Removing the Right Cover (Lower) ............................................................................................... 5- 7
5.3.1.3 Removing the Delivery Tray............................................................................................................ 5- 7
5.3.1.4 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ................................................................................................. 5- 7
Chapter 6 Image Formation

6.1 Construction..................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1 Specifications of Image Formation System ......................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.2 Major Components of Image Formation System ................................................................................ 6- 1
6.2 Image Formation Process ............................................................................................................................. 6- 1
6.2.1 Image Formation Process ...................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.3 Basic Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 6- 2
6.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operation ................................................................................................................ 6- 2
6.4 Driving and Controlling the High-Voltage System ..................................................................................... 6- 3
6.4.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.5 Drum Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit.......................................................................................................................... 6- 4
6.5.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 6- 4
6.5.2 Charging Mechanism............................................................................................................................... 6- 4
Contents
6.5.2.1 Primary Charging Bias Control ....................................................................................................... 6- 4

6.6 Developing Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.6.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................ 6- 5
6.6.2 Developing Bias Control ......................................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.7 Toner Container .............................................................................................................................................. 6- 6
6.7.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................ 6- 6
6.8 Transfer Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.8.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ..................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.8.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................. 6- 6
6.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias .................................................................................................................. 6- 7
6.8.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control ............................................................................................................ 6- 7
6.8.3 Separation Mechanism ............................................................................................................................ 6- 7
6.8.3.1 Static Eliminator Bias Control.......................................................................................................... 6- 7
6.9 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning...................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.9.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................ 6- 8
6.9.2 Waste Toner Full Detection .................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.10 Parts Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................................... 6- 9
6.10.1 Drum Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 6- 9
6.10.1.1 Removing the Drum Unit................................................................................................................ 6- 9
6.10.2 Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 6- 9
6.10.2.4 Removing the Delivery Tray .......................................................................................................... 6- 9
6.10.2.5 Removing the Developing Assembly ........................................................................................... 6- 9
6.10.2.6 Precautions about Installation of Developing Assembly ........................................................ 6- 10
6.10.2.7 Procedure after Replacing the Developing Assembly............................................................. 6- 10
6.10.3 Transfer Charging Roller ..................................................................................................................... 6- 10
6.10.3.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller.................................................................................... 6- 10
Chapter 7 Pickup/Feeding System

7.1 Construction ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.1 Specifications/Configuration/Operation Methods................................................................................ 7- 1
7.1.2 Locations of Main Units........................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.3 Roller Layout Drawing ............................................................................................................................. 7- 1
7.1.4 Paper Path Drawing(Printer on its own) ............................................................................................... 7- 2
7.1.5 Paper Path Drawing(Finisher-U1) ......................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.1.6 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex Unit-A1/Finisher-U1) ............................................................................. 7- 3
7.1.7 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex-A1) ........................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.1.8 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex-A1/Inner 2Way Tray-E1) ...................................................................... 7- 4
7.1.9 Paper Path Drawing(Inner 2Way Tray-E1) .......................................................................................... 7- 4
7.1.10 Sensor Layout Drawing......................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.2 Detecting Jams................................................................................................................................................ 7- 6
7.2.1 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 7- 6
7.2.1.1 Delay Jam in Pickup Assembly....................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.2.1.2 Delay Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Leading Edge Jam at Delivery Sensor/Wound Paper
Jam at Fixing Assembly).......................................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.2.2 Stationary Jams ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 6
Contents
7.2.2.1 Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly............................................................................................... 7- 6

7.2.2.2 Stationary Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Trailing Edge Stationary Jam at Delivery Sensor/
Stationary Jam at Delivery Sensor) ....................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.2.3 Other Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 7- 6
7.2.3.1 Door Open Jam................................................................................................................................. 7- 6
7.3 Cassette Pick-Up Unit .................................................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3.2 Cassette Pickup Operation .................................................................................................................... 7- 7
7.3.3 Cassette Paper Size Detection.............................................................................................................. 7- 8
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit .............................................................................................................................. 7- 9
7.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 9
7.4.2 Post-pickup Control after Multi Manual Feed Pickup ......................................................................... 7- 9
7.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.5.1 Pickup Roller ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.5.1.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Pickup Roller ............................................................................. 7- 10
7.5.2 Cassette Pickup Assembly ................................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.5.2.1 Removing the Lower-left Cover .................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.5.2.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup AssemblyÇµ............................................................................. 7- 10
7.5.3 Cassette Size Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 7- 10
7.5.3.1 Removing the Paper Size Detection Switches........................................................................... 7- 10
7.5.4 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor............................................................................................................... 7- 10
7.5.4.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly .................................................................................. 7- 10
7.5.4.2 Removing the Retry Sensor .......................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.5.5 Cassette Paper Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.5.5.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly ............................................................................. 7- 11
7.5.5.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Presence/Absence Sensor ..................................................... 7- 11
7.5.6 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ..................................................................................................................... 7- 11
7.5.6.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly .................................................................................. 7- 11
7.5.6.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid.................................................................................... 7- 12
7.5.7 Manual Feed Tray sensor ..................................................................................................................... 7- 12
7.5.7.1 Removing the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................... 7- 12
7.5.7.2 Removing the Transfer Registration Unit.................................................................................... 7- 12
7.5.7.3 Removing the Feed Guide ............................................................................................................ 7- 12
7.5.7.4 Removing the Multifeeder Paper Presence/Absence Sensor ................................................. 7- 12
7.5.8 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................................................. 7- 13
7.5.8.2 Removing the Transfer Registration Unit.................................................................................... 7- 13
7.5.8.3 Removing the Feed Guide ............................................................................................................ 7- 13
7.5.8.4 Removing the Multifeeder Connector Cover .............................................................................. 7- 13
7.5.8.5 Removing the Multifeeder Unit ..................................................................................................... 7- 13
7.5.8.6 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Solenoid................................................................................ 7- 13
7.5.9 Registration Roller.................................................................................................................................. 7- 14
7.5.9.2 Removing the Registration Roller ................................................................................................ 7- 14
7.5.10 Registration Clutch............................................................................................................................... 7- 14
7.5.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover........................................................................................................... 7- 14
7.5.10.2 Removing the Registration Clutch ............................................................................................. 7- 14
7.5.11 Separation Roller.................................................................................................................................. 7- 15
7.5.11.1 Removing the Feed and Separation Rollers ............................................................................ 7- 15
Contents
7.5.12 Separation Pad ..................................................................................................................................... 7- 15

7.5.12.1 Removing the Drum Unit.............................................................................................................. 7- 15
7.5.12.2 Removing the Transfer Registration Unit .................................................................................. 7- 15
7.5.12.3 Removing the Feed Guide........................................................................................................... 7- 15
7.5.12.4 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Roller ................................................................................... 7- 15
7.5.12.5 Removing the Separation Pad .................................................................................................... 7- 16
Chapter 8 Fixing System

8.1 Construction ..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions.......................................................................... 8- 1
8.1.2 Major Components................................................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................ 8- 3
8.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film ............................................................................................... 8- 3
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed .................................................................................................. 8- 3
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature............................................................................................... 8- 3
8.2.2.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................. 8- 3
8.2.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature ....................................................................................... 8- 3
8.2.2.3 Target Temperatures by Mode ....................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.2.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper ............................................................................................................ 8- 4
8.2.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper ..................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.3 Protective Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.3.1 Protective Functions ................................................................................................................................ 8- 5
8.4 Parts Replacement Procedure...................................................................................................................... 8- 7
8.4.1 Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 8- 7
8.4.1.1 Removing the Drum Unit.................................................................................................................. 8- 7
8.4.1.2 Removing the rear cover.................................................................................................................. 8- 7
8.4.1.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)..................................................................................................... 8- 7
8.4.1.4 Removing the Left Door ................................................................................................................... 8- 7
8.4.1.5 Removing the Fixing Unit................................................................................................................. 8- 8
8.4.2 Pressure Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 9
8.4.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit.................................................................................................................. 8- 9
8.4.2.2 Removing the rear cover.................................................................................................................. 8- 9
8.4.2.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)..................................................................................................... 8- 9
8.4.2.4 Removing the Left Door ................................................................................................................... 8- 9
8.4.2.5 Removing the Fixing Unit............................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.4.2.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ...................................................................................................... 8- 10
8.4.2.7 Removing the Pressure Roller ...................................................................................................... 8- 12
8.4.3 Fixing Film................................................................................................................................................ 8- 13
8.4.3.2 Removing the rear cover................................................................................................................ 8- 13
8.4.3.4 Removing the Left Door ................................................................................................................. 8- 13
8.4.3.5 Removing the Fixing Unit............................................................................................................... 8- 14
8.4.3.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ...................................................................................................... 8- 15
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 8- 17
Contents
8.4.4.4 Removing the Left Door................................................................................................................. 8- 17

8.4.4.5 Removing the Fixing Unit .............................................................................................................. 8- 18
8.4.4.6 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ......................................................................................... 8- 18
8.4.5 Fixing Film Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 8- 19
8.4.5.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) .................................................................................................. 8- 20
8.4.5.4 Removing the Left Door................................................................................................................. 8- 20
8.4.5.5 Removing the Fixing Unit .............................................................................................................. 8- 20
8.4.5.6 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor ................................................................................................ 8- 21
Chapter 9 External and Controls

9.1 Control Panel................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.2 Fans .................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 1
9.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.2.2 Fan Control ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 1
9.3 Power Supply System.................................................................................................................................... 9- 2
9.3.1 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................ 9- 2
9.3.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 2
9.3.1.2 Rated Output of the Power Supply PCB ....................................................................................... 9- 2
9.4.1 Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.4.1.1 Removing the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................. 9- 3
9.4.1.4 Removing the Main Motor ............................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.4.1.5 Removing the Registration Clutch ................................................................................................. 9- 3
9.4.1.6 Removing the Main Drive Unit ........................................................................................................ 9- 4
9.4.2 Fixing Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 9- 5
9.4.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................. 9- 5
9.4.2.4 Removing the Left Door................................................................................................................... 9- 5
9.4.2.5 Removing the Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................ 9- 6
9.4.2.8 Removing the LAN Cover................................................................................................................ 9- 7
9.4.2.9 Removing the IP Cover.................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.4.2.10 Removing the IP Cover.................................................................................................................. 9- 8
9.4.2.11 Removing the Image Processor PCB Mount ............................................................................. 9- 8
9.4.2.12 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit .................................................................................................... 9- 9
9.4.3 Power Supply Unit.................................................................................................................................. 9- 10
9.4.3.2 Removing the Right Cover (Lower) ............................................................................................. 9- 10
9.4.3.3 Removing the Delivery Tray.......................................................................................................... 9- 10
9.4.3.4 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB ..................................................................................... 9- 10
9.4.4 Control Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 10
Contents
9.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover .............................................................................................. 9- 10

9.4.4.2 Removing the Operation Panel Unit ............................................................................................ 9- 11
9.4.5 DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................. 9- 11
9.4.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................ 9- 11
9.4.6 Option Power Supply PCB .................................................................................................................... 9- 11
9.4.6.4 Removing the Option Power Supply PCB................................................................................... 9- 12
9.4.7 HVT PCB.................................................................................................................................................. 9- 12
9.4.7.4 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB...................................................................................... 9- 12
9.4.7.5 Removing the HVT PCB ................................................................................................................ 9- 13
9.4.8 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan.................................................................................................................... 9- 13
9.4.8.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................. 9- 13
9.4.9 Fan Filter .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 14
9.4.9.1 Removing the Fan Filter................................................................................................................. 9- 14
9.4.10 Motor of Main Drive Assembly............................................................................................................ 9- 14
9.4.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover ........................................................................................................... 9- 14
9.4.10.2 Removing the Main Motor............................................................................................................ 9- 14
9.4.11 Fixing Driver Motor ............................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.4.11.2 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)................................................................................................. 9- 15
9.4.11.3 Removing the RAM Cover ........................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.4.11.4 Removing the SDRAM ................................................................................................................. 9- 15
9.4.11.5 Removing the LAN Cover ............................................................................................................ 9- 15
9.4.11.6 Removing the IP Cover ................................................................................................................ 9- 15
9.4.11.7 Removing the IP Cover ................................................................................................................ 9- 16
9.4.11.8 Removing the Image Processor PCB Mount............................................................................ 9- 17
9.4.11.9 Removing the Fixing Unit Drive Motor ....................................................................................... 9- 18
9.4.12 Left Door ................................................................................................................................................ 9- 18
9.4.12.1 Removing the Drum Unit.............................................................................................................. 9- 18
9.4.12.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)................................................................................................. 9- 18
9.4.12.4 Removing the Left Door ............................................................................................................... 9- 18
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ...................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.1.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................ 10- 1
10.1.2 Reader Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.1.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 10- 1
10.2 Durables and Consumables ...................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.2.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................ 10- 1
10.2.2 Reader Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.2.3 Printer Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 10- 1
Contents
10.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure .................................................................................................... 10- 2

10.3.1 Scheduled Servicing............................................................................................................................ 10- 2
Chapter 11 Standards and Adjustments

11.1 Scanning System........................................................................................................................................ 11- 1
11.1.1 Procedure after Replacing the CIS ................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.2 Image Formation System .......................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.2.1 Procedure after Replacing the Developing Assembly ................................................................... 11- 1
11.3 Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.3.1 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor PCB ................................................................. 11- 1
Chapter 12 Correcting Faulty Images

12.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.1 Site Environment.................................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.2 Checking the Paper ............................................................................................................................. 12- 1
12.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper .................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.1.4 Checking the Durables........................................................................................................................ 12- 1
12.1.5 Checking the Units and Functional Systems................................................................................... 12- 1
12.1.6 Others .................................................................................................................................................... 12- 2
12.2 Outline of Electrical Components............................................................................................................. 12- 2
12.2.1 Clutch/Solenoid..................................................................................................................................... 12- 2
12.2.1.1 List of Clutches/Solenoids .......................................................................................................... 12- 2
12.2.2 Motor ...................................................................................................................................................... 12- 2
12.2.2.1 List of Motors ................................................................................................................................. 12- 2
12.2.3 Fan.......................................................................................................................................................... 12- 3
12.2.3.1 List of Fans .................................................................................................................................... 12- 3
12.2.4 Sensor .................................................................................................................................................... 12- 4
12.2.4.1 List of Sensors............................................................................................................................... 12- 4
12.2.5 Switch..................................................................................................................................................... 12- 6
12.2.5.1 List of Switches ............................................................................................................................. 12- 6
12.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others .............................................................................................................. 12- 6
12.2.6.1 List of Lamps, Heaters, and Others ........................................................................................... 12- 6
Chapter 13 Self Diagnosis

13.1 Error Code Table ........................................................................................................................................ 13- 1
13.1.1 List of Error Codes............................................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.2 Error Code Details ...................................................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.2.1 Error Code Details ............................................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.3 Jam Code..................................................................................................................................................... 13- 3
13.3.1 Jam Codes (Related to Printer Unit)................................................................................................. 13- 3
13.3.2 Jam Codes (Related to Finisher) ...................................................................................................... 13- 3
13.3.3 Jam Codes (Related to ADF)............................................................................................................. 13- 4
13.3.4 Jam Codes (Related to Duplex Unit) ................................................................................................ 13- 4
13.3.5 Jam Codes (Related to Inner 2-way Tray)....................................................................................... 13- 4
13.4 Finisher Error Codes .................................................................................................................................. 13- 4
13.4.1 Error Code Details ............................................................................................................................... 13- 4
Contents
13.5 FAX Error Codes......................................................................................................................................... 13- 8

13.5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 13- 8
13.5.1.1 Error Code Outline ........................................................................................................................ 13- 8
13.5.2 User Error Code.................................................................................................................................... 13- 8
13.5.2.1 User Error Code ............................................................................................................................ 13- 8
13.5.3 Service Error Code ............................................................................................................................... 13- 8
13.5.3.1 Service Error Code ....................................................................................................................... 13- 8
Chapter 14 Service Mode

14.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.1 Outline of Service Mode...................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.2 Using the Mode .................................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.2 Default settings............................................................................................................................................ 14- 2
14.2.1 Service Mode Menus........................................................................................................................... 14- 2
14.3 Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW) .................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.3.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.3.1.1 Bit Switch Composition ................................................................................................................ 14- 7
14.3.2 SSSW-SW01 ......................................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.3.2.1 List of Functions ............................................................................................................................ 14- 7
14.3.2.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 0....................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.3.3 SSSW-SW03 ......................................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.3.4 SSSW-SW04 ......................................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.3.5 SSSW-SW05 ......................................................................................................................................... 14- 8
14.3.6 SSSW-SW12 ......................................................................................................................................... 14- 9
14.3.7 SSSW-SW13 ......................................................................................................................................... 14- 9
14.3.8 SSSW-SW14 ....................................................................................................................................... 14- 10
14.3.8.1 List of Functions .......................................................................................................................... 14- 10
14.3.8.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 2..................................................................................................... 14- 10
14.3.9 SSSW-SW28 ....................................................................................................................................... 14- 10
Contents
14.3.9.5 Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 .................................................................................................... 14- 10

14.3.10 SSSW-SW30..................................................................................................................................... 14- 11
14.3.10.1 List of Functions ........................................................................................................................ 14- 11
14.3.10.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 5 .................................................................................................. 14- 11
14.3.11 SSSW-SW33..................................................................................................................................... 14- 11
14.3.12 SSSW-SW34..................................................................................................................................... 14- 11
14.4 Setting of Menu Switch (Menu) .............................................................................................................. 14- 12
14.4.1 Menu Switch Composition................................................................................................................ 14- 12
14.4.2 <No.005 NL equalizer>..................................................................................................................... 14- 12
14.4.3 <No.006 telephone line monitor> .................................................................................................... 14- 12
14.4.4 <No.007 ATT transmission level>................................................................................................... 14- 12
14.4.5 <No.008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit>............................................................................... 14- 13
14.4.6 <No.009 V.34 data speed upper limit>........................................................................................... 14- 13
14.4.7 <No.010 Frequency of the pseudo CI signal> .............................................................................. 14- 13
14.5 Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.)............................................................................ 14- 13
14.5.1 Numerical Parameter Composition ................................................................................................. 14- 13
14.5.2 <002: RTN transmission condition (1)><003: RTN transmission condition (2)><004: RTN
transmission condition (3)> ..................................................................................................................... 14- 13
14.5.3 <005: NCC pause length (pre-ID code)> ....................................................................................... 14- 14
14.5.4 <006: NCC pause length (post-ID code)> ..................................................................................... 14- 14
14.5.5 <010: line connection identification length> .................................................................................. 14- 14
14.5.6 <011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception)>............................................................................................... 14- 14
14.5.7 <013: T.30 EOL timer> ..................................................................................................................... 14- 14
14.5.8 <016: time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover> .............................................. 14- 14
14.5.9 <017: pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length><018: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time
length (short)><019: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (long)> ..................................... 14- 14
14.5.10 <020: pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length><021: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length
(short)><022: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long)> ..................................................... 14- 14
14.5.11 <023: CNG detention level for fax/tel switchover> ..................................................................... 14- 14
14.5.12 <024: pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover> ...................................... 14- 14
14.5.13 <025: Answering machine connection function signal detection time> .................................. 14- 14
14.5.14 <027: V.21 low-speed flag preamble identification length> ...................................................... 14- 14
14.5.15 <056 - 061: Count type select > .................................................................................................... 14- 14
14.6 Setting of Scanner Functions (SCANNER) .......................................................................................... 14- 17
14.6.1 Setting of Bit Switch .......................................................................................................................... 14- 17
14.6.2 Numeric Parameter Functional configuration................................................................................ 14- 18
14.6.3 <024:CIS scan position during ADF scanning> ............................................................................ 14- 18
14.6.4 <026:Distance from the standby position of CIS to the shading start point> ........................... 14- 19
14.6.5 <031Vertical scan start position adjustment> ............................................................................... 14- 19
Contents
14.6.6 <032Horizontal scan start position adjustment> ........................................................................... 14- 19

14.6.7 <033Vertical scan magnification correction>................................................................................. 14- 19
14.6.8 <035: - 036:Reader motor speed change>.................................................................................... 14- 19
14.6.9 <041: Vertical scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)> 14-
19
14.6.10 <042: Horizontal scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
14- 19
14.6.11 <043: Horizontal scan end position correction (copy)>.............................................................. 14- 19
14.6.12 <044: Horizontal scan end position correction (superfine)>...................................................... 14- 19
14.6.13 <045: Horizontal scan end position correction (fine)>................................................................ 14- 19
14.6.14 <046: Horizontal scan end position correction (standard)>....................................................... 14- 19
14.6.15 <047: Vertical scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)> ...
14- 19
14.6.16 <048: Horizontal scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
14- 19
14.6.17 <054: Pickup motor speed correction (when the ADF is used) >............................................. 14- 20
14.6.18 <193: ADF special standard-sized paper: LGL misidentification-ready>................................ 14- 20
14.6.19 <194: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR misidentification-ready> ................................ 14- 20
14.6.20 <195: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR_R misidentification-ready>........................... 14- 20
14.6.21 <196: Shading Target Value (Red)> ............................................................................................. 14- 20
14.6.22 <197: Shading Target Value (Green)> ......................................................................................... 14- 20
14.6.23 <198: Shading Target Value (Blue)> ............................................................................................ 14- 20
14.7 Setting of Printer Functions (PRINTER)................................................................................................ 14- 20
14.7.1 Service Soft Switch Settings (PRINTER)........................................................................................ 14- 20
14.7.1.1 SSSW-SW05 ............................................................................................................................... 14- 20
14.7.1.2 SSSW-SW14 ............................................................................................................................... 14- 21
14.7.1.3 SSSW-SW15 ............................................................................................................................... 14- 22
14.7.2 Numerin Parameter Settings (Numeric Prama.)............................................................................ 14- 22
14.7.2.2 <031: Top registration adjustment (manual feed tray)>........................................................ 14- 23
14.7.2.3 <032: Top registration adjustment (cassette)>....................................................................... 14- 23
14.7.2.4 <033: Top registration adjustment (duplex unit)> .................................................................. 14- 23
14.7.2.5 <034: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray)> ................................................ 14- 23
14.7.2.6 <035: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)>............................................................ 14- 23
14.7.2.10 <039: Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit)> ........................................................ 14- 23
14.7.2.11 <040: Target fixing temperature adjustment (manual feed tray)> ..................................... 14- 23
14.7.2.12 <041: Target fixing temperature adjustment (cassette 1)> ................................................ 14- 23
14.7.2.16 <045: Fixing film speed change (manual feed tray)> .......................................................... 14- 24
14.7.2.17 <046: Fixing film speed change (cassette)>......................................................................... 14- 24
14.7.3 Setting of Cassette (CST) ................................................................................................................. 14- 24
14.7.3.1 Special Standard-sized Paper Compatibility .......................................................................... 14- 24
14.8 Setting of System Functions (SYSTEM) ............................................................................................... 14- 24
14.8.1 Bit Switch Settings ............................................................................................................................. 14- 24
Contents
14.9 Registration of Accessories (ACC) ........................................................................................................ 14- 24

14.9.1 Accessory Registration ..................................................................................................................... 14- 24
14.10 Display of Counter Information (COUNTER) ..................................................................................... 14- 25
14.10.1 Counters............................................................................................................................................ 14- 25
14.10.2 Clearing Counters............................................................................................................................ 14- 25
14.11 Service Report (REPORT) .................................................................................................................... 14- 26
14.11.1 Report Output................................................................................................................................... 14- 26
14.11.2 System Data List.............................................................................................................................. 14- 26
14.11.3 System Dump List............................................................................................................................ 14- 26
14.11.4 Counter List ...................................................................................................................................... 14- 28
14.11.5 Error Log List .................................................................................................................................... 14- 28
14.11.6 Spec List............................................................................................................................................ 14- 30
14.11.7 Service Label.................................................................................................................................... 14- 31
14.12 Download (DOWNLOAD)...................................................................................................................... 14- 32
14.12.1 Download .......................................................................................................................................... 14- 32
14.13 Initialization of Set Value (CLEAR) ...................................................................................................... 14- 32
14.13.1 Clear .................................................................................................................................................. 14- 32
14.14 Display of ROM Information (ROM)..................................................................................................... 14- 32
14.14.1 ROM display ..................................................................................................................................... 14- 32
14.15 Test Mode (TEST) .................................................................................................................................. 14- 33
14.15.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................... 14- 33
14.15.2 Test Mode Menu List....................................................................................................................... 14- 33
14.15.3 D-RAM test<(1) D-RAM TEST> .................................................................................................... 14- 35
14.15.4 Scan Test ((2) SCAN TEST).......................................................................................................... 14- 35
14.15.5 Print Test ((3) PRINT TEST).......................................................................................................... 14- 36
14.15.6 MODEM Test((4) MODEM TEST) ................................................................................................ 14- 36
14.15.7 Function test ((6) FUNCTION TEST) ........................................................................................... 14- 38
14.15.8 Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN) .............................................................................. 14- 42
Chapter 15 Upgrading
15.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.1.1 Overview of Upgrade .......................................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.1.2 Overview of Service Support Tool .................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.2 Making Preparations .................................................................................................................................. 15- 1
15.2.1 Registering the System Software...................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.2.2 Connection............................................................................................................................................ 15- 3
15.3 Downloading System Software................................................................................................................. 15- 4
15.3.1 Downloading System ........................................................................................................................... 15- 4
15.3.1.1 Downloading Procedure .............................................................................................................. 15- 4
15.3.2 Downloading BOOT ............................................................................................................................. 15- 9
15.3.2.1 Downloading Procedure .............................................................................................................. 15- 9
15.3.3 Other Upgrade Methods...................................................................................................................... 15- 9
15.3.3.1 Downloading the PCL Software ................................................................................................. 15- 9
Chapter 1 Introduction
Contents
Contents
1.1 System Construction........................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Pickup/ Delivery /Original Handling Accessories System Configuration (iR2020/iR2020J) .................... 1-1
1.1.2 Pickup/ Delivery /Original Handling Accessories System Configuration (iR2016/iR2016J) .................... 1-2
1.1.3 Reader Heater/ Cassette Heater System Configuration............................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (iR2020J/iR2016J)........................................... 1-3
1.1.5 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (iR2020/iR2016).............................................. 1-4
1.1.6 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions (iR2020/iR2016) ......................................................... 1-4
1.2 Product Specifications........................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.1 Names of Parts............................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.1.1 External View （iR2020/iR2020J) ...................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1.2 External View （iR2016/iR2016J) ...................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.1.3 Cross-Section........................................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.2.2 Using the Machine....................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch .............................................................................................................. 1-8
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch ......................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.2.3 Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.3 User Mode Items ....................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3.1 Common Settings ............................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3.2 Copy Settings...................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3.3 FAX Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.3.4 Address Book Set. .............................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.2.3.5 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.3.6 Timer Settings .................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.3.7 Report Settings ................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.3.8 Adjust./Cleaning................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.3.9 System Settings .................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User ........................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.4.1 User Maintenance Items ..................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.2.4.2 Cleaning.............................................................................................................................................. 1-15
1.2.5 Safety......................................................................................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light .................................................................................................................... 1-16
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations............................................................................................................................. 1-16
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit ..................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner ................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.5.5 Point to Note about Fire ..................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.5.6 Cautions as to the replacement and disposal of lithium battery ......................................................... 1-18
1.2.6 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.6.1 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-19
1.2.7 Function List.............................................................................................................................................. 1-20
1.2.7.1 Printing Speed (iR2020/iR2020J)....................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.7.2 Printing Speed (iR2016/iR2016J)....................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.7.3 Types of Paper.................................................................................................................................... 1-21
Chapter 1
1.1 System Construction
1.1.1 Pickup/ Delivery /Original Handling Accessories System Configuration (iR2020/iR2020J)

0011-0899
iR2020 /
The configuration is as shown in the following figure:
[2] [4]
[1]
[3]
[9]
[10]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[6]
F-1-1
[1] DADF-P1
[2] Platen Cover Type J *1
[3] Finisher-U1
[4] Additional Finisher Tray-C1
[5] Inner 2-way Tray-E1
[6] Cassette Feeding Module-K1
[7] Duplex Unit-A1
[8] Power Supply Kit-Q1 *2
[9] Document Tray-J1
[10] Card Reader-E1
*1: This accessory comes standard with the models for Asia excluding Taiwan and the models for some Latin American countries.
*2: This accessory is required when the Finisher-U1, Inner 2-way tray-E1, Cassette feeding module-K1, or Duplex unit-A1 is installed. This accessary comes
standard with the iR2020 for North America, Latin America, and Asia.
1-1
Chapter 1
1.1.2 Pickup/ Delivery /Original Handling Accessories System Configuration (iR2016/iR2016J)

0011-0892
iR2016J / iR2016
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[7]
[6]
F-1-2
[1] DADF-P1
[2] Platen Cover Type J *1
[3] Finisher-U1
[4] Additional Finisher Tray-C1
[5] Inner 2-way Tray-E1
[6] Cassette Feeding Module-J1 *2
[7] Cassette Feeding Module-K1 *2
[8] Duplex Unit-A1
[9] Power Supply Kit-Q1 *3
[10] Document Tray-J1
[11] Card Reader-E1
*1: This accessory comes standard with the models for Asia excluding Taiwan and the models for some Latin American countries.
*2: A Cassette feeding module-J1 can be placed on the Cassette feeding module-K1 to use these cassette units as a 3-stage cassette unit.
*3: This accessory is required when the Finisher-U1, Inner 2-way tray-E1, Cassette feeding module-K1 or Duplex unit-A1 is installed. This accessory comes
standard with the iR2016 for North America, Latin America and Asia.
1-2
Chapter 1
1.1.3 Reader Heater/ Cassette Heater System Configuration

0011-0901
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 /
F-1-3
[1] Reader Heater *1

[2] Cassette Heater *1
[3] Heater PCB
*1: To operate the heaters, a heater PCB is required.
1.1.4 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (iR2020J/iR2016J)

0011-0912
iR2016J /
The iR202J/iR2016J does not allow the print function and the transmission function to be added.
1-3
Chapter 1
1.1.5 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (iR2020/iR2016)

0011-0914
iR2016 / iR2020
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
F-1-4
[1] FAX Panel-A1 *1

[2] UFRII LT Printer Kit-J2
[3] Serial Interface Board-A1
[4] PCL Printer Kit-J1 *2
[5] Super G3 FAX Board-T1 *1
[6] iR 256MB Expansion RAM-D1
*1: To make the FAX feature effective, a FAX panel and a super G3 FAX board are required.
*2: The PCL printer kit contains a 256MB expansion RAM.
1.1.6 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions (iR2020/iR2016)

0011-1092
iR2016 / iR2020
The following is a brief explanation of the functions expected of the accessories; for details, see the chapters that follow:
UFR II print function (Resolution: 600dpi) ==> UFRII LT Printer Kit-J2

UFR II print function (Resolution: 1200dpi) ==> UFRII LT Printer Kit-J2
iR 256MB Expansion RAM-D1
PCL print function ==> PCL Printer Kit-J1
FAX function ==> Super G3 FAX Board-T1
FAX Panel-A1
Coin vender function ==> Serial Interface Board-A1
1-4
Chapter 1
1.2 Product Specifications
1.2.1 Names of Parts
1.2.1.1 External View ÅiiR2020/iR2020J)

0011-1098
iR2020 /
[1] [14]
[13]
[12] [2]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[15]
[10]
[5]
[6]
[9] [16]
[7]
[18]
[8] [17]
F-1-5
[1] Copyboard cover (*1) [10] Left door

[2] Reader front cover [11] Left cover (rear)
[3] Control panel [12] Reader left cover
[4] Delivery tray [13] Reader right cover
[5] Front cover [14] Reader erar cover
[6] Cassette 1 [15] Rear cover
[7] Cassette 2 [16] Cassette rear cover
[8] Left cover (front) [17] Right cover (upper)
[9] Manual feed tray [18] Right cover (lower)
*1: This accessory comes standard with the models for Asia excluding Taiwan and the models for some Latin American countries. Other models are available
optionally.
1-5
Chapter 1
1.2.1.2 External View ÅiiR2016/iR2016J)

0011-1099
iR2016J / iR2016
[1] [13]
[12]
[11] [2]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[14]
[9]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7] [16] [15]
F-1-6
[1] Copyboard cover (*1) [9] Left door

*1: This accessory comes standard with the models for Asia excluding Taiwan and the models for some Latin American countries. Other models are available
optionally.
1-6
Chapter 1
1.2.1.3 Cross-Section
0010-8574
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[2]
[1]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15] [3]
[4]
[14]
[13]
[5]
[6]
[12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7]

F-1-7
[1] CIS unit [10] Separation roller

[2] Reader unit [11] Vertical path roller
[3] Laser scanner unit [12] Manual feed pickup roller
[4] DC power supply PCB [13] Registration roller
[5] HVT PCB [14] Transfer roller
[6] Cassette [15] Drum unit
[7] Toner bottle [16] Pressure roller
[8] Pickup roller [17] Fixing film unit
[9] Feed roller [18] Delivery roller
1-7
Chapter 1
1.2.2 Using the Machine
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch

0011-1100
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine possesses 2 power switches: main power switch and control power switch. Normally (i.e., unless the machine is in a sleep state), the machine will be
supplied with power when you turn on its main power switch.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-1-8
[1]Control panel power switch
[2]Main power lamp
[3]Main power switch
1-8
Chapter 1
1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch

0011-1101
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<During printing or fax data transmission/reception>
Be sure to operate the main power switch while the Processing/Data lamp on the control panel is not lit.
(Turning off the main switch during printing or fax data transmission/reception can erase the data being processed.)
F-1-9
<During downloading>
Do not turn off the power switch or ON/OFF switch on the control panel.
(Turning off the main power switch during downloading can make this machine inoperative.)
F-1-10
1-9
Chapter 1
1.2.2.3 Control Panel

0011-1103
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 /
[2] [4] [6] [8]

[1] [3] [5] [7] [9] [10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[31] [29] [27] [25] [23] [21] [19] [17] [15]

[30] [28] [26] [24] [22] [20] [18] [16]
F-1-11
[1] Paper select key [17] ID key

[2] Paper select indicator [18] Error indicator
[3] Jam location indicator [19] Tone key
[4] Density key [20] View setting key
[5] Collate/Staple key [21] Processing/Date indicator
[6] LCD [22] Different size original key
[7] Image quality key [23] Additional functions key
[8] Reset key [24] 2 on 1 key
[9] System monitor key [25] Plus (+) key
[10] Control panel power switch [26] Frame erase key
[11] Counter check key [27] OK key
[12] Numeric keys [28] Two-page separation key
[13] Stop key [29] Minus (-) key
[14] Start key [30] Two-sided key
[15] Clear key [31] Copy ratio key
[16] Main power indicator
1-10
Chapter 1
1.2.3 User Mode Items
1.2.3.1 Common Settings

0011-1222
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Additional Functions Available Settings

1. DEFAULT SETTINGS COPY(*), FAX
2. AUTO CLEAR SET. INITIAL FUNCTION(*), SELECTED FUNCTION
3. AUDIBLE TONES ENTRY TONE: ON (volume 1(*) to 3), OFF
ERROR TONE: ON (volume 1(*) to 3), OFF
TX JOB DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY (volume 1(*) to 3), OFF, ON (volume 1(*) to 3)
RX JOB DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY (volume 1(*) to 3), OFF, ON (volume 1(*) to 3)
SCAN DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY (volume 1(*) to 3), OFF, ON (volume 1(*) to 3)
PRINT DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY (volume 1(*) to 3), OFF, ON (volume 1(*) to 3)
4. TONER SAVER MODE OFF(*), HIGH, LOW
5. PRINTER DENSITY 1 to 9 (5(*))
6. AUTO DRAWER SELCT COPY: DRAWER 1 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 2 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 3 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 4 (ON(*),
OFF), STACK BYPASS (OFF(*), ON)
PRINTER: DRAWER 1 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 2 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 3 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 4
(ON(*), OFF)
FAX: DRAWER 1 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 2 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 3 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 4 (ON(*),
OTHER: DRAWER 1 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 2 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 3 (ON(*), OFF), DRAWER 4 (ON(*),
7. REG. PAPER TYPE DRAWER 1: PLAIN PAPER(*), COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, BOND
DRAWER 2: PLAIN PAPER(*), COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, BOND
8. ENERGY IN SLEEP LOW(*), HIGH
9. TRAY DESIGNATION TRAY A: COPY (ON(*), OFF), PRINTER (ON(*), OFF), FAX (ON(*), OFF), OTHER (ON(*), OFF)
TRAY B: COPY (ON(*), OFF), PRINTER (ON(*), OFF), FAX (ON(*), OFF), OTHER (ON(*), OFF)
10. BYPASS STD SET OFF(*), ON: PAPER SIZE (A4, A4R, A3, B4, B5R, B5, A5R, A5, 11 x 17, LGL, LTRR, LTR, STMTR, STMT,
EXECUTIV, COM10, MONARCH, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5, FREESIZE), REG. PAPER TYPE (PLAIN PAPER,
COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY PAPER 3, BOND, TRANSPARENCY,
LABELS, ENVELOPE)
11. PAPER FEED SWITCH STACK BYPASS (SPEED PRIORITY(*), PRINT SIDE), DRAWER 1 (SPEED PRIORITY(*), PRINT SIDE),
DRAWER 2 (SPEED PRIORITY(*), PRINT SIDE), DRAWER 3 (SPEED PRIORITY(*), PRINT SIDE),
DRAWER 4 (SPEED PRIORITY(*), PRINT SIDE)
12. DISPLAY LANGUAGE ENGLISH(*), FRENCH, SPANISH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, DUTCH, FINNISH, PORTUGUESE, NORWEGIAN,
SWEDISH, DANISH, SLOVENE, CZECH, HUNGARIAN, RUSSIAN, TURKISH, GREEK, ESTONIAN,
ROMANIAN, SLOVAK, CROATIAN, BULGARIAN, CATALAN, POLISH
13. ADF DIRTY ERROR ON(*), OFF
14. INIT. COMMON SET. OFF(*), ON
*: Factory default
1.2.3.2 Copy Settings

0011-1223
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1. IMAGE DIR PRIORTY OFF(*), ON
2. AUTO ORIENTATION ON(*), OFF
3. STANDARD SETTINGS IMAGE QUALITY: TEXT/PHOTO(*), TEXT, PHOTO
DENSITY: AUTO(*), MANUAL (-LT - DK+: 9 steps, 5)
ZOOM RATIO: PRESET RATIO (DIRECT 100%(*), 141% A4->A3, 200% MAX., 50% MIN., 70% A3->A4),
MANUAL
COPIES: 1(*) to 99
AUTO COLLATE: OFF(*), COLLATE, STAPLE
TWO-SIDED: OFF(*), 1 > 2-SIDED, 2 > 2-SIDED, 2 > 1-SIDED, BOOK > 2-SIDED
FRAME ERASE: OFF(*), ORG. FRAME ERASE, BOOK FRAME ERASE, BINDING HOLE
2-PAGE SEPARATION: OFF(*), ON
PAPER SELECT: AUTO(*), DRAWER 1, DRAWER 2, DRAWER 3, DRAWER 4
4. SHARPNESS 1 to 9 (5(*))
5. PAPER SIZE GROUP A(*), AB, INCHES
6. MM/INCH ENTRY mm(*), INCHES
7. INIT. COPY SET. OFF(*), ON
*: Factory default
1.2.3.3 FAX Settings

0011-1224
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1-11
Chapter 1

1. USER SETTINGS UNIT TELEPHONE #
UNIT NAME
TX TERMINAL ID: ON (PRINTING POSITION: OUTSIDE IMAGE(*), INSIDE IMAGE, TELEPHONE #
MARK: FAX(*), TEL), OFF
SCANNING DENSITY: -LT - DK+ 9 steps (5(*))
TEL LINE TYPE: TOUCH TONE(*), ROTARY PULSE
VOLUME CONTROL: MONITOR VOL. CTRL (0 - 3 (1(*)))
STANDARD SETTINGS: SCAN DENSITY (STANDARD(*), DK, LT), IMAGE QUALITY (STANDARD(*),
FINE, PHOTO, SUPER FINE, ULTRA FINE), DIRECT TX (OFF(*), ON), STAMP DOCUMENT (OFF(*), ON)
INIT. FAX STD SET: OFF(*), ON
2. TX SETTINGS ECM TX: ON(*), OFF
PAUSE TIME: 1 to 15 (4(*)) SEC.
AUTO REDIAL: ON (REDIAL TIMES, REDIAL INTERVAL, TX ERROR REDIAL)(*), OFF
TIME OUT: ON(*), OFF
STAMP DOCUMENT: DIRECT&MEMORY TX(*), DIRECT TX
DIALING LINE CHCK: ON(*), OFF
ROTATE TX: ON(*), OFF
3. RX SETTINGS ECM RX: ON(*), OFF
4. PRINTER SETTINGS SELECT DRAWER: SWITCH A (ON(*), OFF), SWITCH B (ON(*), OFF), SWITCH C (ON(*), OFF), SWITCH
D (ON(*), OFF)
RECEIVE REDUCTION: ON (RECEIVE REDUCTION, REDUCE DIRECTION)(*), OFF
TWO-SIDED PRINT: OFF(*), ON
CONT. PRINTING: RX TO MEMORY(*), KEEP PRINTING
*: Factory default
1.2.3.4 Address Book Set.

0011-1225
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1. 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL Up to 60 destinations can be registered: TEL NUMBER ENTRY, NAME, OPTIONAL SETTING
2. CODED SPD DIAL Up to 140 destinations can be registered: TEL NUMBER ENTRY, NAME, OPTIONAL SETTING
3. GROUP DIAL Up to 199 destinations can be registered: TEL NUMBER ENTRY, NAME
*: Factory default
1.2.3.5 Printer Settings

0011-1226
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1. DEFAULT PAPERSIZE A4, A3, B4, B5, 11X17, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXECUTIV, COM10, MONARCH, DL, ISO-C5,
ISO-B5
2. DEFAULT PAPERTYPE PLAIN PAPER(*), COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY
PAPER 3, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, ENVELOPE
3. COPIES 1(*) to 999
4. 2-SIDED PRINTING OFF(*), ON
5. PRINT QUALITY IMAGE REFINEMENT: ON(*), OFF
DENSITY: 1 to 9 (5(*))
TONER SAVER: OFF(*), ON
6. PAGE LAYOUT BINDING: LONG EDGE(*), SHORT EDGE
MARGIN: mm (-50.0 mm to +50.0 mm; 0.0 mm(*)), INCHES (-01.90 INCHES to 01.90
INCHES; 00.00 INCHES(*))
7. ERROR TIME OUT ON (5(*) to 300 SEC), OFF
8. COLLATE OFF(*), COLLATE, OFFSET+COLLATE, OFFSET+GROUP, STAPLE
9. INIT. PRINTER SET OFF(*), ON
10. PCL SETTINGS** ORIENTATION: PORTRAIT(*), LANDSCAPE
FONT NUMBER: 0(*) to 120
POINT SIZE: 4.00 to 999.75 point (12.00 point(*))
PITCH: 0.44 to 99.99 cpi (10.00 cpi(*))
FORM LINES: 5 to 128 lines (64 lines(*))
SYMBOL SET: PC8(*), PC850, PC852, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH,
PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1, WINL2,
WINL5, DESKTOP, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOL1,
ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775
CUSTOM PAPER: OFF(*), ON (UNIT OF MEASURE, X DIMENSION, Y DIMENSION)
APPEND CR TO LF: NO(*), YES
ENLARGE A4: OFF(*), ON
11. RESET PRINTER OFF(*), ON
1-12
Chapter 1
*: Factory default
1.2.3.6 Timer Settings

0011-1227
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1. DATE&TIME SETTING Default setting
2. DATE TYPE SELECT DD/MM YYYY(*), YYYY MM/DD, MM/DD/ YYYY
3. AUTO SLEEP TIME ON (3 - 30 (5(*)) MIN. in one-minute increments), OFF
4. AUTO CLEAR TIME ON (1 - 9 (2(*)) MIN. in one-minute increments), OFF
5. DAYLIGHT SV. TIME ON(*): BEGIN DATE/TIME (MONTH, WEEK, DAY), END DATE/TIME (MONTH, WEEK, DAY), OFF
*: Factory default
1.2.3.7 Report Settings

0011-1228
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1. SETTINGS TX REPORT: PRINT ERROR ONLY(*), OUTPUT YES, OUTPUT NO
RX REPORT: OUTPUT NO(*), PRINT ERROR ONLY, OUTPUT YES
ACTIVITY REPORT: AUTO PRINT (ON(*), OFF), TX/RX SEPARATE (OFF(*), ON)
2. LIST PRINT ACTIVITY REPORT
SPEED DIAL LIST: 1-TOUCH LIST, CODED DIAL LIST, GROUP DIAL LIST
ADD BOOK DETAILS: 1-TOUCH LIST, CODED DIAL LIST
USER DATA LIST
*: Factory default
1.2.3.8 Adjust./Cleaning
0011-1229
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1. TRANS. ROLR CLEAN Press [OK] to start cleaning.
2. DRUM CLEANING Press [OK] to start cleaning.
3. FIX. UNIT CLEANING START CLEANING, CLEAN PAPER PRT
4. FEEDER CLEANING Set 5 sheets in the optional feeder and press [OK].
5. SPECIAL MODE M MID(*), LOW, HIGH
6. SPECIAL MODE N OFF(*), ON
7. SPECIAL MODE O DRAWER (OFF(*), ON), STACK BYPASS (OFF(*), ON)
8. SPECIAL MODE P OFF(*), ON
9. BOND SP. FIX. MODE OFF(*), ON
10. FIX. UNIT OFFSET OFF(*), SPEED PRIORITY 1, SPEED PRIORITY 2
11. AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ OFF(*), ON
12. MAINTENANCE CODE OFF(*), ON
*: Factory default
1.2.3.9 System Settings

0011-1230
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1. SYS. MANAGER INFO SYS. MANAGER ID, SYSTEM PASSWORD, SYSTEM MANAGER
2. DEVICE INFO DEVICE NAME, LOCATION
3. MANAGE DEPT. ID OFF(*), ON; REGISTER DEPT. ID (PASSWORD, PAGE LIMIT SET., ERASE), PAGE TOTALS (VIEW PAGE
TOTALS, CLEAR ALL TOTAL, PRINT LIST), PDL JOBS W/OUT ID (ON(*), OFF)
4. MANAGE USER ID OFF(*), ON
5. NETWORK SETTINGS TCP/IP SETTINGS: IP ADDRESS AUTO. (OFF(*), ON; DHCP, BOOTP, RARP), IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK,
GATEWAY ADDRESS, USE LPD (ON(*); PORT NO., OFF), RAW SETTINGS (ON(*); PORT NO., USE
BIDIRECTIONAL, OFF), USB HTTP (ON(*); PORT NO., OFF), SET IP ADD RANGE (OFF(*), ON), RX MAC
ADD SET. (OFF(*), ON)
SNMP SETTINGS: USE SNMP (ON(*): PORT NO., OFF), COMMUNITY NAME 1, COMMUNITY NAME 2,
SNMP WRITABLE 1 (ON(*), OFF), SNMP WRITABLE 2 (ON, OFF(*))
DEDICATED PORT: ON(*), OFF
ETHERNET DRIVER: DETECT (AUTO(*), MANUAL), DUPLEX (HALF DUPLEX(*), FULL DUPLEX),
ETHERNET TYPE (10 BASE-T(*), 100 BASE-TX), MAC ADDRESS
VIEW IP ADDRESS: IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, GATEWAY ADDRESS
STARTUP TIME SET.: 0(*) to 300 SEC.
1-13
Chapter 1

6. COMMUNICATIONS TX START SPEED: 2400 to 33600(*) bps
RX START SPEED: 2400 to 33600(*) bps
MEMORY LOCK SETTI: OFF(*), ON (PASSWORD, REPORT PRINT, MEMORY RX TIME)
R-KEY SETTING: PSTN(*), PBX (HOOKING, PREFIX)
7. REMOTE UI ON(*), OFF
8. ACCESS TO DEST. RESTRICT NEW ADD. : OFF(*), ON
FAX DRIVER TX: OFF(*), ON
9. CHECKING THE LOG ON(*), OFF
10. USE DEVICE USB OFF(*), ON
*: Factory default
1-14
Chapter 1
1.2.4 Maintenance by the User
1.2.4.1 User Maintenance Items

0011-2393
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-1-1
No. Item Maintenance cycle Remarks

[1] Pressure plate cleaning As required
[2] opyboard glass(large/small) cleaning As required
[3] Copyboard holder (jump board) As required
[4] Fixing pressure roller cleaning As required Clean every 10000 sheets
[5] Exterior cleaning As required
[6] Transfer roller cleaning As required
[7] Drum cleaning As required
[8] Toner replenishment (toner bottle When the relevant error code
replacement) appears
1.2.4.2 Cleaning
0011-0420
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The parts that should be cleaned by the customer to maintain the design performance and the cleaning method are described below.
The service engineer should instruct the customer to clean the machine at regular intervals (once a month).
1. Pressure Plate
Clean the pressure plates [1] with a cloth dampened with water or neutral detergent and squeezed hard, and then wipe it with a dry soft cloth.
[1]
F-1-12
2. Document Glass/Vertical Size Plate
Clean the document glass [1] and vertical size plate [2] with a cloth dampened with water or neutral detergent and squeezed hard, and then wipe them with a dry
soft cloth.
When an ADF is installed, clean is document glass (small) [3] and glass holder [4] in the same manner.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-1-13
3. Cleaning the Fixing Pressure Roller
If white streaks are seen on the printed paper, the fixing pressure roller can be dirty. If white streaks are seen on the printed paper, clean the fixing pressure roller
in the user mode. Be sure to clean the fixing pressure roller after replacing the toner bottle.
When cleaning the fixing pressure roller, manually feed A4 paper.
MEMO:
The time required for cleaning is about 100 seconds.
1) Press the user mode key " " to enter the user mode.
2) Using the left an right arrow keys, display the "ADJUST./CLEANING" menu.
3) Press the OK key.
4) Using the left and right arrow keys, select "FIX. UNIT CLEANING". Next press the OK key.
5) Using the left and right arrow keys, select "CLEAN PAPER PRT". Next press the OK key. A cleaning pattern will be printed.
6) Open the manual feed tray.
1-15
Chapter 1
F-1-14
7) Place the cleaning pattern printed in step 5 in the manual feed tray with "V" up.
F-1-15
8) Using the left and right arrow keys, select "START CLEANING".
9) Press the OK key. Cleaning will start.
4. Cleaning the Transfer Roller
If the reverse side of the printed paper is stained, the transfer roller can be dirty. If the reverse side of the printed paper is stained, clean the transfer roller in the user
mode.
2) Using the left and right arrow keys, display the "ADJUST./CLEANING".
4) Using the left and right arrow keys, select "TRANS. ROLR CLEAN". Next, press the OK key. Cleaning will start.
5. Cleaning the Drum
If the quality of the printer image is poor, the drum can be dirty. If this symptom occurs, clean the drum in the user mode.
Using this function can shorten the drum life.
2) Using the left and right arrow keys, display the "ADJUST./CLEANING" menu.
4) Using the left and right arrow keys, select "DRUM CLEANING". Next, press the OK key. Cleaning will start.
1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light

0010-8951
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully enclosed in a protective housing and external covers so that its light will
not escape outside as long as the machine is used normally.
1.2.5.2 CDRH Regulations

0010-8952
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976.
These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products not certified under the regulations is banned
within the Untied States. The label shown here indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser products that are sold
in the United States.
1-16
Chapter 1
CANON
30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3-CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO,
146, JAPAN.
MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1
SUBCHAPTER J.
F-1-16
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit

0010-8955
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The laser scanner unit emits invisible laser light inside it. If exposed to laser light, the human eye can irreparably be damaged. Never attempt to disassemble the
laser scanner unit. (It is not designed for servicing in the field.)
Warning labels are affixed to the top cover of the laser scanner unit and the inner cover inside the front cover of this machine.
F-1-17
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner

0010-8954
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Toner on Clothing or Skin

1. If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
2. Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth.
1-17
Chapter 1
3. Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material. It tends to react easily.
1.2.5.5 Point to Note about Fire

0010-7304
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
It is dangerous to throw lithium batteries and parts and components containing flammable substances, such as cartridges, etc., into fire. Such parts and components
must be disposed of in accordance with local laws and regulations.
1.2.5.6 Cautions as to the replacement and disposal of lithium battery

0010-7305
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Risk of explosion if Battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

Dispose of used Batteries according to the instructions.
1-18
Chapter 1
1.2.6 Product Specifications
1.2.6.1 Product Specifications

0010-9516
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Copyboard stream reading, fixed reading

Body desktop
Light source type LED array (CIS)
Photosensitive medium OPC drum (30-mm dia.)
Image reading method CCD (CIS)
Reproduction method indirect electrostatic
Exposure method by laser light
Charging method by AC charging roller
Development method 1-component toner projection
Transfer method by transfer roller
Separation method by curvature + static eliminator
Cassette pickup method retard
Multifeeder pickup method dual processing
Drum cleaning method by cleaning blade
Fixing method on-demand
Delivery method face-down
Reproduction ratio 50Åì to 200Åì
Warm-up time approx. 13sec
Image margin (leading edge) 3.0 -/+1.5 mm
Image margin (trailing edge) 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
Image margin (left/right) left edge: 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
right edge: 0.5 mm or more
Non-image width (leading edge) 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
Non-image width (trailing edge) 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
Non-image width (left/right) 3.0 -/+2.0 mm
Number of gradations 256 gradations
Reading resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Printing resolution iR2020/iR2016: 1200 dpi x 1200 dpi
iR2020J/iR2016J: 600dpi x 600 dpi
First print time Book mode: 7.9 sec or less
ADF mode: 13.5 sec or less
Cassette capacity 250sheets (80 g/m2)
Multifeeder tray capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) (B4/LGL or less, 64 g/m2)
80 sheets (80 g/m2) (B4/LGL or less, 80 g/m2)
50 sheets (B4/LGL or more, 64 g/m2, 80 g/m2)
50 sheets (heavy paper (105 to 128 g/m2), OHP)
10 sheets (envelope)
1 sheet (label)
40 sheets (post card)
Continuous reproduction 1 to 99 sheets
Toner type magnetic negative toner
Original type sheet, book
Maximum original size A3/LDR
Original size detection function by reflection type sensor (iR2020 series only)
Sleep mode yes
Option See the system configuration chart.
Operating environment 15 to 27.5 deg C
(temperature range)
Operating environment 25% to 75%
(humidity range)
Operating environment 0.6 to 1.0 atm
(atmospheric pressure)
Noise iR2020 series: 66.0 dB or less
iR2016 series: 64.6 dB or less
Power supply rating 120/230 V
Power consumption (maximum) 120V model: 1550 W or less
230V model: 1600 W or less
Power consumption 120V model:
standby: 21 Wh (reference only) / continuous printing: 470 Wh
(reference only)
230V model:
standby: 22 Wh (reference only) / continuous printing: 500 Wh
(reference only)
Ozone max.: 0.02 ppm or less
Dimensions iR2020 series: 622 mm x 633.4 mm x 665.4 mm (WxDxH)
iR2016 series: 622 mm x 633.4 mm x 580.4 mm (WxDxH)
1-19
Chapter 1
Weight iR2020 series: approx. 46 kg

iR2016 series: approx. 39.6 kg
1.2.7 Function List
1.2.7.1 Printing Speed (iR2020/iR2020J)

0011-1093
iR2020 /
T-1-2
Paper size Single-sided

Casette feed Manual feed
Plain paper A4 20 20
A5 23 23
A5R - 13
B5 20 20
B5R 12 12
A4R 11 11
B4 9 9
A3 10 10
STMT 15 15
STMTR - 13
EXE - 20
LTR 20 20
LTRR 11 11
LGL 10 10
LDR 10 10
Heavy paper 1/2 A4 12(10) 12(10)
(Heavy paper 3) A5 13(11) 13(11)
A5R - 11(7)
B5 12(10) 12(10)
B5R 9(6) 9(6)
A4R 10(8) 10(8)
B4 8(6) 8(6)
A3 8(7) 8(7)
STMT 11(7) 11(7)
STMTR - 9(6)
EXE - 12(10)
LTR 11(10) 11(10)
LTRR 9(8) 9(8)
LGL 8(5) 8(5)
LDR 8(7) 8(7)
Bond paper A4 7 7
A5 5 5
A5R - 4
B5 6 6
B5R 4 4
A4R 4 4
B4 5 5
A3 5 5
STMT 4 4
STMTR - 4
EXE - 6
LTR 7 7
LTRR 4 4
LGL 3 3
LDR 5 5
OHP A4 - 20
LTR - 20
Envelope Monarch - 4
COM10 - 4
ISO-B5 - 4
ISO-C5 - 4
DL - 4
Supplement:
- The above copy speed does not change if magnification is changed.
- The above copy speed does not change irrespective of whether paper is supplied from the upper/lower cassette, the manual feed tray, or from the cassette feeding
module.
- The copy speed may become down when the copies make continuously one minutes or more with the narrow width paper. The slowdown is reduced with the
following user mode. User Mode: Additional Functions > Adjust/Cleaning > Spesial Mode P > ON
1-20
Chapter 1
1.2.7.2 Printing Speed (iR2016/iR2016J)

0011-3247
iR2016J / iR2016
T-1-3
Paper size Single-sided

Cassette feed Manual feed
Plain paper A4 16 16
A5 23 23
A5R - 13
B5 20 20
B5R 12 12
A4R 11 11
B4 9 9
A3 10 10
STMT 15 15
STMTR - 13
EXE - 20
LTR 16 16
LTRR 11 11
LGL 10 10
LDR 10 10
Heavy paper 1/2 A4 12(10) 12(10)
(Heavy paper 3) A5 13(11) 13(11)
A5R - 11(7)
B5 12(10) 12(10)
B5R 9(6) 9(6)
A4R 10(8) 10(8)
B4 8(6) 8(6)
A3 8(7) 8(7)
STMT 11(7) 11(7)
STMTR - 9(6)
EXE - 12(10)
LTR 11(10) 11(10)
LTRR 9(8) 9(8)
LGL 8(5) 8(5)
LDR 8(7) 8(7)
Bond paper A4 7 7
A5 5 5
A5R - 4
B5 6 6
B5R 4 4
A4R 4 4
B4 5 5
A3 5 5
STMT 4 4
STMTR - 4
EXE - 6
LTR 7 7
LTRR 4 4
LGL 3 3
LDR 5 5
OHP A4 - 16
LTR - 16
Envelope Monarch - 4
COM10 - 4
ISO-B5 - 4
ISO-C5 - 4
DL - 4
Supplement:
- The above copy speed does not change if magnification is changed.
- The above copy speed does not change irrespective of whether paper is supplied from the cassette, the manual feed tray, or from the cassette feeding module.
- The copy speed may become down when the copies make continuously one minutes or more with the narrow width paper. The slowdown is reduced with the
following user mode. User Mode: Additional Functions > Adjust/Cleaning > Spesial Mode P > ON
1.2.7.3 Types of Paper

0011-1097
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1-21
Chapter 1
T-1-4
Source
Type Paper size
Manual Feed Tray Cassette
Plain paper, eco paper, recycled paper A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, LDR,
Yes Yes
(64-90g/m2) LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, 8K, 16K
Special paper Heavy paper Width: 95mm-297mm
Yes No
(90-128g/m2) Length: 148mm-432mm
OHP A4, LTR Yes No
Postcard Postcard A6R modified Yes No
4-plane postcard A4 modified Yes No
Label paper A4, B4, LTR Yes No
3-hole paper same as plain Yes Yes
Envelope Com10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5 Yes No
1-22
Chapter 1
1-23
Chapter 2 Installation
Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks ............................................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation.................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (230V EUR) ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Unpacking and Installation................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials ................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Installing the Drum Unit.............................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.3 Installing the Toner Bottle........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.4 Setting the Cassettes .................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.5 Attaching the Ferrite Core ........................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.6 Checking the Image Quality........................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.2.7 Setting the Country/Region ......................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.8 Setting the Date and Time ........................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network .......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.1 Checking the Network Connection ............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.4 Installing the Card Reader .................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4.1 Points to Note .............................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4.2 Checking the Contents................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4.3 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.4.4 Registering the Card IDs ........................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.5 Installing the Heater PCB................................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.5.1 Unpacking and Checking the Contents ..................................................................................................... 2-17
2.5.2 Preparing the Host Machine ...................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.5.3 Installing the Heater PCB.......................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.6 Installing the Reader Heater ............................................................................................................................. 2-22
2.6.2 Installing the Reader Heater Harness ........................................................................................................ 2-22
2.6.3 Removing Reader Components................................................................................................................. 2-26
2.6.4 Removing Parts at the Left of the Reader ................................................................................................. 2-27
2.6.5 Installing the Reader Heater ...................................................................................................................... 2-29
2.7 Installing the Cassette Heater ........................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.7.2 Preparing the Host Machine ...................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.7.3 Installing the Cassette Heater .................................................................................................................... 2-32
Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation

0011-1068
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the machine:
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (-/+10%) for exclusive use by the machine.
2) The environment of the room must be as indicated in the following diagram, and the machine must not be installed near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier,
or refrigerator:
(%RH)
100
[C]
90
85
[B]
75
70 [A]
50
25
20
15
10
5
0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 (degC)
7.5 23 27.5 32.5
F-2-1
<Environmental zone assured>
[A]: Zone A: Satisfies all the conditions of the standard image quality and paper feed performance.
[B]: Zone B: Inferior to Zone A in terms of the standard image quality and paper feed performance, or may not apply.
[C]: Zone C: Problems associated with safety, malfunctions, or incorrect message display do not occur, but image quality and paper feed performance are not
guaranteed.
3) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
4) The level of ozone generated by the machine will not affect the health of individuals around it. Some, however, may find its odor unpleasant as while remaining
in contact with it for long hours. Be sure that the room is well ventilated.
5) The floor of the machine must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and the machine will remain level.
6) The machine must be at least 10 cm away from any wall, permitting unobstructed use.
100 mm min.
100 mm min.
1249 mm
1247 mm
F-2-2
7) The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure, however, that the machine is not near the air vent (for suction) of the room.
2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (230V EUR)

0011-3206
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020
1-1 Points to Make Before Installation

Be sure to go through the following before starting the work:
1) If you are installing the machine after moving it from a cold to warm location, be sure to leave the machine unpacked for at least 2 hours so that the machine is
fully used to the site temperature, thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation. (The term "condensation" refers to the formation of droplets of water on
the surface of a metal object brought in from a cold to warm place, i.e., as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture (vapor) around the object.)
2-1
Chapter 2
2) The machine weighs a maximum of about 46 kg. Be sure to work in a group of 2 persons when lifting it.
1-2 Checking the Contents
Check to be sure that none of the following contents is missing:
[1] [2] [3]
A3 A4 A4 A5 B4
B5 B5 LGL 11 17 LTR Set the size detector lever to the
Set the size detector lever to the
LTR STMT 8K 16K new paper size.

Placer I’indicateur de format sur
new paper size.
Placer I’indicateur de format sur
le nouveau format. le nouveau format.
Bitte stellen Sie den Hebel zum Bitte stellen Sie den Hebel zum
Erkennen des Papierformats auf Erkennen des Papierformats auf
das neue Format ein.
[4]
das neue Format ein.
FU5-xxxx FU5-xxxx
A3 A4 A4 A5 B4
B5 B5 LGL 11 17 LTR
LTR STMT 8K 16K
[5]
F-2-3
[1] Drum unit ---1 [4] Cassette size label ---2(1) (*1)
[2] Black toner ---1 [5] Caution sheet ---2(1) (*1)
[3] Power cable ---1
*1: iR2020: 2 pc., iR2016/iR2016J: 1 pc.

Check the documentation and CD against the following table:
T-2-1
Documentation and CD iR2020/iR2016 iR2016J

Operators manual: User's Guide Yes Yes
Operators manual: Easy Operation Guide No Yes
Operators manual CD-ROM Yes Yes
1-3 Names of Parts
[1] [14]
[13]
[12] [2]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[15]
[10]
[5]
[6]
[9] [16]
[7]
[18]
[8] [17]
F-2-4
T-2-2
[1] Copyboard cover [10] Left door

[7] Cassette 2 (*2) [16] Cassette rear cover (*2)
*2. iR2020 only
2-2
Chapter 2
2.2 Unpacking and Installation
2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials

0011-1070
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Unpack the machine and remove vinyl, cushioning materials, and tape.
2) Hold the handles [1] of the machine together with one or more persons and
take it out.
The maximum weight of this machine is approximately 46kg. Two or more

persons are required to lift the machine. [2]
[1]
F-2-7
3) Open the packaging bag of the new drum unit, take the new drum out of
it, and then remove packing tape.
The drum unit for Asia/Oceania is provided with pressure release hooks [1].
Remove them. Drum units for other regions are not provided with the pres-
sure release hooks.
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-2-5
F-2-8
2.2.2 Installing the Drum Unit
0011-1071 4) Holding the protective cover [1] of the new drum unit, place the drum unit
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i against the iR body.
1) Open the front cover [1] of the iR body.
[1] [1]
F-2-6 F-2-9
2) Turn the developer pressure release lever [1] clockwise, and then open the 5) While holding the protective cover, insert the new drum unit [1] into the
left door [2] until it stops. iR body.
MEMO:
The protective cover will not be reused.
The left door must be opened fully to prevent the drum from being damaged
while it is inserted into the drum unit.
2-3
Chapter 2
2.2.3 Installing the Toner Bottle

0011-1072
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
If the machine is installed in a low-temperature, low-humidity place, the im-

age density may be slightly lower than usual on the first approx. 100 sheets
printed after installation of the machine.
When installing the machine in a low-temperature, low-humidity environ-
ment, perform the steps mentioned in <Going through the Developer
Idling Mode> (provided after step 6 in this section) before installing the ton-
er bottle.
1) Shake the toner bottle 5-6 times.

[1]
F-2-10
6) Turn the developer pressure release lever [1] counterclockwise, and then
close the left door [2].
[2]
F-2-15
2) Open the front cover [1].
[1]
F-2-11
7) Enter the date in the drum counter label [1]. [1]
[1]
F-2-12
8) Affix the drum counter label [1] on the drum unit.
F-2-16
3) Insert the toner bottle.
F-2-17
[1] 4) While holding the toner bottle, pull the seal [1] to remove it.
F-2-13
9) Close the front cover [1].
[1]
F-2-14 [1]
F-2-18
2-4
Chapter 2
5) Turn the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
[2]
F-2-19
6) Close the front cover.
[1]
F-2-21
2) Remove the wire [1] securing the inner plate of the cassette.
[1]
F-2-20
<Going through the Developer Idling Mode>
When installing the machine in a low-temperature, low-humidity environ-

ment, go through the developer idling mode before installing the toner bottle
in order to prevent the density from becoming low on the first approx. 100
sheets. F-2-22
3) Press the "PUSH DOWN" mark [1] on the inner plate to lock it into the
1) Plug the power cord into the outlet. cassette.
2) Open the front cover.
3) With the front cover open, turn on the main power switch.
4) When a message appears on the control panel display, press the following
keys to enter the service mode:
Additional functions key > 2 key > 8 key > Additional functions key
5) Select "#PRINT" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
6) Select "#PRINT SW" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key. PUSH DO
WN
Confirm that the following message is displayed:

Message: #PRINT SW 001 00000000
7) Press the following keys and confirm the message:
# key > 1 key >1 key
8) Position the cursor to Bit-1 (second from right) using the + or - key, and
press the 1 key, and then confirm the following message:
9) Press the OK key. Confirm that "SW 011" changes to "SW 012". [1]
Message: #PRINT SW 012 00000000 F-2-23
10) Press the Reset key to exit the service mode. 4) Turn the lever [1] of the paper front guide counterclockwise to release it.
11) Close the front cover. The machine will run in the developer idling mode Slide the paper front guide [2] to fit to the size of the paper to be used, and
for about 1 minute. then turn the lever clockwise to lock it.
12) When the machine stops, the idling mode ends.
Install, the toner cartridge following the above-mentioned procedure.
2.2.4 Setting the Cassettes

0011-1073
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Holding the knob [1] at the center of the cassette, draw out the cassette [2]
until it stops.
U2
STM
T U3
LTR U1
LGL LTR
B5 11 17
A5 B5
A4 B4
A4
A3
[2] [1]
F-2-24
2-5
Chapter 2
5) Turn the paper trailing edge registration plate [1] to the left to remove it.
Re-attach it to fit to the size of the paper to be loaded.
[1]
[1]
F-2-28
9) Align the left, right, and leading edges of sheets and load the stack of paper
in the cassette. Make sure that the paper is below the claws of the cassette.
MEMO:
Inserting the cassette into the iR body with the inner plate locked into the cas-
sette will unlock the inner plate automatically. If the inner plate is not locked,
F-2-25
press the "PUSH DOWN" mark [1] on the inner plate to lock it into the cas-
6) Slide the paper size detection lever [1] to fit to the paper size. sette and then load paper.
[1]
[1]
F-2-26 [2]
7) Affix the cassette size label [1] to the paper size indication plate [2].
F-2-29
10) Holding the knob at the center of the cassette, insert the cassette in the iR
body until it stops.
A4
2.2.5 Attaching the Ferrite Core
0011-1523
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i

(iR2020/iR2016 only for North America, Latin America, and Asia)
1) Attach the ferrite core [1] to the USB cable [2].
[2]
[1]
To suppress noise, attach the ferrite core as close as possible to the USB port
of the iR body.
[1]
[2]
F-2-27
8) Affix the caution sheet printed in an appropriate language.
F-2-30
2.2.6 Checking the Image Quality

0011-1075
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on the main power
2-6
Chapter 2
switch [2].
Supply of toner will start after the initial rotation. After a few minutes,
supply of toner finishes and the machine stops automatically.
Use the specified power supply (rated voltage -/+10% and rated current).
[1]
[2]
F-2-31
2) Place a document on the document glass, take a copy of it by supplying
paper from the cassette or manual feed tray, and check the printed image.
Also perform the following checks:
- Check whether abnormal sound is heard.
- Check the printed images at all preset magnifications.
- Check whether the document is copied normally on the specified number
of sheets.
2.2.7 Setting the Country/Region

0011-1077
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Press the following keys to display the service mode screen:
Additional Functions Key > 2 Key > 8 Key > Additional Functions Key
2) Select "# CLEAR" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
3) Select "TYPE" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
4) Using the + or - key, select the country/region type that conforms to the
communication standard used in the country/region where the machine is
used.
5) Press the OK key. When "Please Wait" disappears, the selected country/
region type takes effect.
2.2.8 Setting the Date and Time

0011-1078
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Press the additional functions keys to display the user mode screen.
2) Select "4. TIMER SETTINGS" using the + or - key, and then press the OK
key.
3) Select "1. DATE&TIME SETTING" using the + or - key, and then press
the OK key. The set date and time appears.
4) Enter the current date and time by moving the cursor to the characters you
want to enter with the + and - keys.
5) Press the OK key to allow the entered date and time to take effect.
2-7
Chapter 2
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network
2.3.1 Checking the Network Connection

0011-1079
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
If the machine supports a network feature, check the network connection following the procedure below.
2) Select "# REPORT" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
3) Select "REPORT OUTPUT" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
4) Select "SPEC LIST" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
5) When "SPEC REPORT" is displayed, check that "BDL-IMAGE" is set to ON.
MEMO:
"SPEC REPORT"
- TOTAL MEMORY: 128MB
BDL-IMAGE (600) must be set to ON.
- TOTAL MEMORY: 256MB
BDL-IMAGE (1200) must be set to ON.
6) Contact the system administrator of the customer to make network settings.
2-8
Chapter 2
2.4 Installing the Card Reader
2.4.1 Points to Note

0011-1080
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
When installing the card reader, the card reader attachment-D1 is required.
2.4.2 Checking the Contents

0011-1081
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<Card reader-E1>
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
F-2-32
[1] Card reader-E1 1 pc.

[2] TP screw (M3x12) 1 pc.
[3] Toothed washer 1 pc.
[4] Repeating harness A 1 pc.
The repeating harness, TP screw (M3x12), and toothed washer are not used.
<Card reader attachment-D1>
[1] [2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
F-2-33
2-9
Chapter 2
[1] Card reader mount 1 pc.

[2] Card reader cover 1 pc.
[3] Harness cover (base + lid) 3 pcs.
[4] Repeating harness B 1 pc.
[5] Edge saddle 1 pc.
[6] TP screw 2 pcs.
[7] Binding screw (M4x6) 4 pcs.
2.4.3 Installation Procedure

0011-1082
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Turn off the main power switch [1] of the host machine and disconnect the power plug [2] from the outlet.
[2]
[1]
F-2-34
2) Remove the four screws, and then detach the rear cover [1].
[1]
F-2-35
3) Remove the screw [1] from the card reader.
MEMO:
The removed screw will be used later.
[1]
F-2-36
4) Remove the screw [1] securing the ground cable, and then separate the card reader [3] from the card reader mount [2].
2-10
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-37
When removing the harness [1] through the opening in the card reader mount, take care not to cut or damage it.
[1]
F-2-38
MEMO:
The removed card reader mount is no longer necessary.
5) Insert the card reader [2] harness and ground cable into the hole in the supplied card reader mount [1]. Using the screw [3] removed in step 1, secure the card
reader to the card reader mount.
When inserting the card reader [2] harness and ground cable, take care not to cut or damage them.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-2-39
6) Using the supplied binding screw (M4x6) [1], connect the ground cable to the reader mount. Attach the supplied edge saddle [3] to the card reader mount.
2-11
Chapter 2
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-2-40
7) Connect the connector [1] of the supplied repeating harness B to the connector [2] on the card reader. Using the supplied binding screw (M4x6), secure the
repeating harness B clamp [4]. Disconnect the shorting connector [5].
If the shorting connector [5] is not disconnected, a malfunction or error can result. Therefore, the shorting connector must be disconnected.
MEMO:
The removed shorting connector is no longer necessary.
[1] [4]
[3]
[2]
[5]
F-2-41
8) Secure the repeating harness B [1] with the wire saddle [2].
[1] [2]
F-2-42
9) Remove the two blind seals [1] from the reader left cover.
2-12
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-43
10) Using the two supplied TP screws (M4x16), attach the card reader to the reader.
When tightening the screws, take care not to damage the repeating harness B.
[1]
F-2-44
11) Slide the card reader cover [1] to attach it to the card reader mount.
[1]
F-2-45
Route the repeating wire B [1] as shown below.
[1]
F-2-46
12) Using the supplied binding screw (M4x6), secure the card reader cover [2].
2-13
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
F-2-47
13) Affix the two supplied harness covers (bases) at the right rear of the machine with it aligned with the bottom line of the reader.
[1]
F-2-48
14) Affix the supplied harness cover (base) [1] at the back of the machine with it aligned with the bottom line of the reader.
[1]
F-2-49
15) Connect the connector of the repeating harness B [1] to the connector J317 [2] on the image processor PCB.
[2] [1]
F-2-50
16) Using the supplied binding screw (M4x6) [1], secure the repeating harness B clamp [2].
2-14
Chapter 2
[2] [1]
F-2-51
17) Using the three harness covers (lids) [2], secure the repeating harness B [1] to the harness covers (bases).
[2]
[1]
F-2-52
18) Using a nipper, remove the precut portion [1] of the rear cover as shown below.
[1]
F-2-53
19) Attach the rear cover with the repeating harness B routed through the cut portion of the rear cover.
2-15
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-54
2.4.4 Registering the Card IDs

0011-1083
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
After installing the card reader-E1, register the card numbers to be used in the service mode of the iR body. If they are not registered, cards will not be recognized
when inserted.
1) Plug the power cord [1] into the outlet, and then turn on the main power switch [2].
[1]
[2]
F-2-55
3) Select "# ACC" using the + and - key, and then press the OK key.
4) Select "CARD" using the + and - key, and then press the OK key.
5) Specify the first ID number of the card ID numbers to be registered, and then press the OK key.
Sequential Card ID numbers of 100 cards(*) are automatically registered in the department ID, starting with the specified card ID number.
* When an optional ROM is added, card ID numbers of 1000 cards are registered.
6) Press the Additional Functions key to enter the user mode.
7) Select "SYSTEM SETTINGS" using the + and - key, and then press the OK key.
8) Select "MANAGE DEPT. ID" using the + and - key, and then press the OK key.
9) Select "ON" using the + and - key, and then press the OK key.
10) Turn main power switch off and on again. Check that "INSERT CARD" appears.
2-16
Chapter 2
2.5 Installing the Heater PCB
2.5.1 Unpacking and Checking the Contents

0011-3362
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Prepare the following parts.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
F-2-56
[1] Heater PCB unit 1 pc.

[2] Heater switch harness 1 pc.
[3] Cassette heater harness 1 pc.
[4] Heater PCB harness 1 pc.
[5] Clamp 4 pcs.
[6] Edge saddle (small) 2 pcs.
[7] Edge saddle (large) 1 pc.
[8] P screw (M3x8) 2 pcs.
2.5.2 Preparing the Host Machine

0011-3363
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Before installing, make sure the host machine is turned off. If it is turned on, go through the following:
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the power cable (from the power outlet).
3. Disconnect the power cable.
F-2-57
2-17
Chapter 2
F-2-58
2) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2].
3) Remove the five screws [3]. Remove the two hooks [4], and then detach the lower-right cover [5].
4) Remove the screw [6], and then detach the upper-right cover [7].
F-2-59
5) Remove the two screws [1], and then the delivery tray [2].
When removing or reinstalling the delivery tray, be careful not to damage the paper holder [3].
F-2-60
6) Using a nipper or the like, cut out the face plate [2] (used to install a heater switch) on the lower-right cover [1].
2-18
Chapter 2
F-2-61
2.5.3 Installing the Heater PCB

0011-3365
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Install the heater PCB unit [2] using the two supplied TP screws (M3x8) [1].
2) Install the heater switch [3] on the right side panel.
Install the heater switch with the OFF position on the left and the ON position on the right just like the main power switch.
F-2-62
3) Install the edge saddle (large) [1] and connect one heater switch harness [2] to the connector (J1901) on the heater PCB. Route the other harness [3] to the front
of the host machine through the saddle.
2-19
Chapter 2
F-2-63
4) Install the edge saddle (small) [1] on the power supply unit at the front of the host machine, and then connect the header switch harness [2] (routed to the front
of the host machine) to the connector (J15) on the power supply PCB through the edge saddle.
F-2-64
5) Install the four clamps [1] on the back of the host machine.
6) Connect the cassette heater harness [2] to the connector (J1905) on the heater PCB unit, install the reuse band [3], and then pass the harness through the clamps
installed in step 5).
F-2-65
7) Install the edge saddle (small) [1].
8) Connect the heater harness [2] to the connector (J1902) on the heater PCB unit, pass the harness through the installed edge saddle, and then route the harness to
the front of the host machine through the hole [3].
2-20
Chapter 2
F-2-66
9) Pass the heater harness [1] through the wire saddle [2], and then connect it to the connector (J17) [3] on the power supply PCB.
F-2-67
10) Install the delivery tray. (2 screws)
When reinstalling the delivery tray, be careful not to damage the paper holder.
11) Attach the upper-right cover of the host machine. (1 screw)

12) Attach the lower-right cover of the host machine. (5 screws)
13) Attach the rear cover of the host machine. (4 screws)
14) Close the front cover of the host machine.
2-21
Chapter 2
2.6 Installing the Reader Heater

0011-3368
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Before installing, make sure the heater PCB has been installed.
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6] [7]
F-2-68
[1] Reader heater 2 pcs.

[2] Heater harness 1 pc.
[3] Harness guide 1 pc.
[4] Right heater base 1 pc.
[5] Heater cover 2 pcs.
[6] Clamp 6 pcs.
[7] TP screw (M3x6) 5 pcs.
2.6.2 Installing the Reader Heater Harness

0011-3371
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Before installing, make sure the host machine is turned off. If it is turned on, go through the following:
F-2-69
2-22
Chapter 2
F-2-70
3) Remove the five screws [3]. Remove the two hooks [4], and then detach the lower-right cover [5].
4) Remove the screw [6], and then detach the upper-right cover [7].
F-2-71
5) Remove the three screws [1], and then detach the rear-left cover [2].
F-2-72
6) Remove the core [1] and the flexible cable holder [2] at the back of the host machine. Disconnect the two reader flexible cables [3].
7) Disconnect the harness [4] from the four wire saddles [5].
8) Remove the two screws [6], and then detach the flexible cable cover [7].
2-23
Chapter 2
F-2-73
The reader flexible cables are stuck to the flexible cable cover, so do not pull the cover forcibly.
9) Turn over the reader flexible cable cover [1], and then secure to the back of the reader temporarily using a screw [2].
2-24
Chapter 2
F-2-74
10) Pass the heater harness [1] though the harness guide [2] with the clamp [3] of the heater harness aligned with the notch [4] in the harness guide.
F-2-75
11) Remove the four screws [1], and then the metal plate [2].
2-25
Chapter 2
F-2-76
12) Secure the harness guide [1] to the rear bottom of the reader together with the heater harness [2].
13) Connect the heater connector (right) [3].
14) Install the wire saddle [4], and then pass the heater harness [2] through it.
15) Connect the heater connector (left) [5].
16) Install the four wire saddles [6], and then pass the heater cable through them.
MEMOÅF
Rout the heater cable so as its terminal [7] to be connected at the position shown in the Figure.
17) Connect the heater harness [2] to the connector (J1904) [8] on the heater PCB.
F-2-77
18) Install the metal plate removed in step 11). (4 screws)
19) Return the reader flexible cable cover in place, and then connect the reader flexible cables to the image processor PCB.
2.6.3 Removing Reader Components

0011-3373
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Installation precautions are as follows:

- Do not touch the top surface of the contact sensor.
- Be careful not to allow foreign objects to enter the reader unit.
- Do not stain the stream reading glass.
- Be careful not to touch grease on the shaft, when moving the contact sensor, etc.
1) Open the ADF/copyboard cover.

2) Remove the two screws [1], and then the right glass holder [2] of the reader.
3) Remove the document deck glass [3].
4) Remove the two screws [4], and then detach the front cover [5] of the reader.
2-26
Chapter 2
F-2-78
2.6.4 Removing Parts at the Left of the Reader

0011-3376
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The work procedure for removing the parts at the left of the reader differs between the machine with a copyboard cover and the machine with a DADF. Follow the
appropriate procedure.
a. Machine with a Copyboard Cover
1) Remove the five screws [1], and then detach the upper-left cover [2] of the reader
F-2-79
2) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the blind plate [2].
2-27
Chapter 2
F-2-80
b. Machine with a DADF
1) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the stream reading glass holder [2].
2) Remove the stream reading glass [3].
F-2-81
Mount the stream reading glass with the notch [1] of the sheet material affixed to the glass is at the front left.
F-2-82
3) Remove the screw [1], and then remove the jump board [2].
2-28
Chapter 2
F-2-83
4) Remove the screw [1], and then the stay [2].
F-2-84
2.6.5 Installing the Reader Heater

0011-3385
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Pull the front side [1] of the drive belt in the direction of the arrow to move the contact sensor [2] to the center
Do not touch the top surface of the contact sensor.
F-2-85
2) Install the heater base [2] using a screw [1].
3) Install the reader heater [3] on the header base [2] using a screw [4]. Connect the connector [5] of the heater. Install the wire saddle [6] and route the cable [7].
2-29
Chapter 2
F-2-86
4) Attach the heater cover [1] using a screw [2].
F-2-87
5) Install the reader heater [1] using a screw [2]. Connect the connector [3] of the heater.
F-2-88
6) Attach the heater cover [1] using a screw [2].
2-30
Chapter 2
F-2-89
7) Reinstall the parts at the left of the reader.
8) Attach the front cover of the reader. (2 screws)
9) Install the copyboard glass.
10) Install the right glass holder of the reader. (2 screws)
11) Attach the rear left cover of the host machine. (3 screws)
12) Attach the upper-right cover of the host machine. (1 screw)
13) Attach the lower-right cover of the host machine. (5 screws)
14) Attach the rear cover of the host machine. (4 screws)
2-31
Chapter 2
2.7 Installing the Cassette Heater

0011-3181
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Before installing the cassette heater, make sure the heater PCB has been installed.
[1] [2]
F-2-90
[1] Cassette heater 1 pc.

[2] P tightening screw (M4x8) 1 pc.
2.7.2 Preparing the Host Machine

0011-3182
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Before installing the cassette heater unit 30, make sure the host machine is turned off. If it is turned on, go through the following:
F-2-91
F-2-92
2.7.3 Installing the Cassette Heater

0011-3620
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Insert the cassette heater [1] from behind the host machine.
2-32
Chapter 2
F-2-93
When installing the cassette heater unit, make sure that harness is not pinched.
2) Secure the cassette heater [2] using a screw [1].

3) Connect one harness [3] to the cassette heater harness [4].
4) Place the other harness [5] at the position shown below. Connect this connector to the heater of the cassette when connecting the cassette heater to the cassette
at the second or lower stage.
F-2-94
5) Attach the rear cover. (4 screws)
6) Turn on the main power switch of the host machine.
7) Turn on the heater switch [1] and make sure that the cassette heater is powered.
2-33
Chapter 2
F-2-95
When installing the heater for the cassette at the second or lower stage, detach the rear cover of the cassette and follow the procedure mentioned in this procedural
manual.
2-34
Chapter 2
2-35
Chapter 3 Main Controller
Contents
Contents
3.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms .................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2.1 Image Processor PCB .................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Image Processing................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.3.1 Overview of the Image Flow....................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ........................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.3 Reader Unit Input Image Processing........................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.4 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block ........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.5 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block ........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.6 Printer unit Output Image Processing ......................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Flow of Image Data ............................................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.4.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions .................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.2 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function............................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.3 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission............................................................................................ 3-6
3.4.4 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function .................................................................................. 3-7
3.4.5 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function.................................................................................................. 3-7
3.5 Parts Replacement Procedure............................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.5.1 Main Controller PCB................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.5.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover .................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.5.1.2 Removing the Left Cover (Rear).......................................................................................................... 3-9
3.5.1.3 Removing the RAM Cover................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.5.1.4 Removing the SDRAM ........................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.5.1.5 Removing the LAN Cover.................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.5.1.6 Removing the IP Cover ........................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.5.1.7 Removing the IP Cover ...................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.1.8 Removing the image processor PCB.................................................................................................. 3-11
3.5.1.9 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor PCB ....................................................................... 3-11
3.5.2 SDRAM..................................................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover .................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.5.2.2 Removing the RAM Cover................................................................................................................. 3-11
Chapter 3
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms

0010-7009
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine's main controller block consists of the following and has the following functions:
T-3-1
Item Description
Image Processor PCB Controls system operation, memory, printer unit output, image
processing, printer unit image input processing, card printer
unit interface, fax image
processing, etc.
Image memory (SDRAM) Temporarily retains image data (128 MB; 256 MB max.)
Flash ROM Stores system software and retains user data/service data
USB port USB2.0 interface
Reader Unit
Image Processor PCB

USB port
DC controller PCB
Flash ROM
Image memory
(SDRAM)
F-3-1
3.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry
3.2.1 Image Processor PCB

0010-6854
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The following is a diagram showing the major control mechanisms of the Image Processor PCB according to connectors:
3-1
Chapter 3
J317 J320 J300
J318
J308
J301
J303 J309
J304
BAT951 J312
IC1
J313
JEM1
J316
J315
IC10S IC11
J319
IC140
J311 J314
J310
F-3-2
T-3-2
Connector Description
J300 Not used
J301 USB memory connection slot
J303 USB port
J304 LAN PCB connection slot
J308 Reader ADF connection slot
J309 Reader Book connection slot
J310 Power supply connection slot
J312 SERIAL PCB connection slot
J314 DC controller PCB connection slot
J315 SOFT ID PCB connection slot
J316 SOFT counter PCB connection slot
J317 New Card Reader connection slot
J318 Control panel connection slot
J319 Extend ROM PCB connection slot
J320 Not used
JMEM1 DDR DIMM PCB connection slot
3.3 Image Processing
3.3.1 Overview of the Image Flow

0010-8575
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The following shows the flow of images in relation to the machine's functions:
3-2
Chapter 3
Other iR machine
Original
A
Copy Scan
-SEND
A A -FAX
-PullScan
-E-Mail
Print output Image data -PDL Print
PC
F-3-3
3.3.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module

0010-8668
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

The machine's major image processing is executed by the Image processor PCB.
The following shows the construction of the modules associated with image processing:
Reader Unit
Reader controller PCB
Reader unit input image processing block Image Processor PCB

Processes the image data
read by the reader unit. Printer unit output image
processing block
Processes image data for

DC controller PCB
output to the printer unit.
SDRAM
- image memory
- program (temporary storage)
F-3-4
3.3.3 Reader Unit Input Image Processing

0010-8684
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The image data colleted by the contact image sensor is processed by the Image processor PCB.
3-3
Chapter 3
Reader unit
Image processor PCB
Enlargement/reduction
Edge emphasis
-intensify-to-density conversion
-density adjustment (F adjustment)
-gamma correction
Binary processing (error diffusion)
To compression/expansion/editing block
F-3-5
3.3.4 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block

0010-8685
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
Here, image data is processed for compression, extension, and editing.
Image processor PCB

Reader image PDL image
processing block processing block
SDRAM
Enlargement/
reduction Compression
Rotation Expansion
Integration
to printer unit output image processing block
F-3-6
3.3.5 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block

0010-8691
iR2016J /
Here, image data is processed for compression, extension, and editing.
3-4
Chapter 3
Image processor PCB
Reader image processing block
SDRAM
Enlargement/
reduction Compression
Rotation Expansion
Integration
to printer unit output image processing block
F-3-7
3.3.6 Printer unit Output Image Processing

0010-8686
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The image processor PCB processes the image data coming from the reader unit for output to the printer unit.
Image processor PCB
Compression/expansion/editing block
Binary density conversion
Enlargement/reduction
Smoothing
To DC controller PCB
F-3-8
3.4 Flow of Image Data
3.4.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions

0010-8689
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The following is the flow of image data when the Copy Function is in use:
3-5
Chapter 3
Reader unit
Image processor PCB
Image processing block for reader unit
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
Data expansion
Image processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
F-3-9
3.4.2 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function

0010-8694
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use.
Reader unit
mage processor PCB
SDRAM
Data expansion
USB1.1
Data rotation
Resolution conversion
Ethernet port
(compression data)
To network
F-3-10
3.4.3 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission

0010-8696
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
The following is the flow of image data when the fax transmission function is in use:
3-6
Chapter 3
Reader unit
Image processor PCB
SDRAM
Data compression
Data rotation
Data expansion
Image processing block for FAX
Super G3 Fax Board
F-3-11
3.4.4 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function

0010-8697
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
The following is the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use:
Super G3 Fax Board
Image processor PCB
Image processing block for fax
SDRAM
Data rotation
Data compression
Data expansion
Image processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
F-3-12
3.4.5 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function

0010-8699
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
3-7
Chapter 3
The following is the flow of image data when the PDL function is in use:
Ethernet
Image processor PCB
PDL Rendering processing block
SDRAM
Compression/expansion
/editing block
Processing block for printer unit
DC controller PCB
F-3-13
3-8
Chapter 3
[1]
3.5 Parts Replacement Procedure
3.5.1 Main Controller PCB
3.5.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover

0010-8701
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
[2] [1] [2]

F-3-17
3.5.1.6 Removing the IP Cover

0010-8718
[1] iR2016J /
F-3-14 1) Release SOFT ID cable [1] from the cable clamp [2].
3.5.1.2 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)
0010-8702
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the three screws [1], and then detach the left cover (rear).
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-3-18
2) Release a claw [1] of cable guide and detach the cable guide [2] upward.
[2] [1]
F-3-15
3.5.1.3 Removing the RAM Cover

0010-8714
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the RAM cover [2].
[1]
F-3-19
3) Open a core [1].
[2]
F-3-16
3.5.1.4 Removing the SDRAM

0010-8715
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
3.5.1.5 Removing the LAN Cover
0010-8716
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the LAN cover [2]. F-3-20
3-9
Chapter 3
4) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the flexible cable guide [2].
[2]
[1]
F-3-21 [2] [1]

5) Remove the 10 screws [1], and then detach the IP cover [2]. F-3-24
[1]
[2] [1]
[1]
[2] F-3-25
[1]
F-3-22 4) Open a core [1].

0010-8717
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove a connector [1] of IP-LAN cable and a cable clamp [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
F-3-26
[2]
[1]
F-3-23
2) Release SOFT ID cable [1] from the cable clamp [2].
F-3-27
6) Remove the 10 screws [1], and then detach the IP cover [2].
3-10
Chapter 3
2) Using the arrow keys on the operation panel, display "TEST MODE".
[1] 3) Press the OK key.
4) Press the 2 key. "SCAN TEST" appears.
5) Press the 1 key.
After completion of the above steps, contact sensor output correction will be
performed and parameters will be set automatically.
- Read position adjustment (Stream reading: Only when the ADF is installed)
1) Enter the service mode.
Press the User Mode key " ", 2 key, 8 key, User Mode key " " on the
operation panel of the host machine.
[1] 3) Press the OK key.
5) Press the 3 key. "SHEET POS ADJ" appears.
The optical system starts scanning. Several seconds later, automatic adjust-
ment of the reading position finishes and "OK" appears.
If automatic adjustment fails, "NG" appears. Perform the following pro-

cedure:
Clean the white roller of the DADF and the document glass of the host ma-
[2] chine, and then retry auto adjustment.
[1]
F-3-28
3.5.2 SDRAM
3.5.1.8 Removing the image processor PCB
0010-8719
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i 3.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover
0010-8704
1) Remove six connectors [1]. iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1] [1] F-3-31
F-3-29 3.5.2.2 Removing the RAM Cover

2) Remove the five screws [1], and detach the image processor PCB [2]. 0010-8705
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1] 1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the RAM cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-3-32
[1]
F-3-30
3.5.1.9 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor

PCB
0011-3396
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

After replacing the image processor PCB with a new one, input the all value
printed on the service label affixed to the rear cover.
Make the following adjustments:
- Correction of output between CIS channels
Sequentially press the User Mode key " ", 2 key, 8 key, and User Mode
key " " on the operation panel.
3-11
Chapter 4 Original Exposure System
Contents
Contents
4.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Specifications, Control Methods, and Functions......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Major Components ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Control System Configuration..................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4 Reader Controller PCB................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Basic Sequence at Power-on ....................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (Book mode, One Sheet of original) ................................. 4-4
4.2.3 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (ADF Mode, One Sheet of Original)................................. 4-4
4.3 Various Control .................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ........................................................................................................ 4-5
4.3.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control........................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)........................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.3.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.3.2.2 Analog Control Performed by the CIS ................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction ............................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.3.1 Magnification Change in Vertical Scan Direction ............................................................................... 4-8
4.3.3.2 Magnification Change in Horizontal Scan Direction ........................................................................... 4-8
4.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.4.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.4.2 Outline of Original Size Detection ....................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control ................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.5.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.3.6 Image Processing....................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.6.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.3.6.2 CMOS Sensor Drive........................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.6.3 CMOS Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction .......................................................... 4-13
4.3.6.4 CMOS Sensor Output A/D Conversion ............................................................................................. 4-13
4.3.6.5 Shading Correction (Outline) ............................................................................................................ 4-13
4.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment ........................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.3.6.7 Shading Correction............................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.4 Parts Replacement Procedure........................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.1 Copyboard glass ........................................................................................................................................ 4-14
4.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard glass.......................................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass .................................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.2 Reader Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................. 4-14
4.4.2.2 Removing the Right Cover (Lower)................................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.2.3 Removing the Right Cover (Upper) ................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.2.4 Removing the Left Cover (Rear)........................................................................................................ 4-15
4.4.2.5 Removing the Reader Rear Cover...................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.2.6 Removing the Copyboard glass.......................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.2.7 Removing the Reader Controller PCB ............................................................................................... 4-16
Contents
4.4.3 Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 4-17

4.4.3.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.3.2 Removing the Right Cover (Lower) ................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.3.3 Removing the Right Cover (Upper).................................................................................................... 4-17
4.4.3.4 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ........................................................................................................ 4-17
4.4.3.5 Removing the Reader Rear Cover ...................................................................................................... 4-18
4.4.3.6 Removing the Scanner Motor ............................................................................................................. 4-18
4.4.4 Contact sensor............................................................................................................................................ 4-18
4.4.4.6 Removing the Copyboard glass .......................................................................................................... 4-19
4.4.4.7 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)........................................................................................ 4-20
4.4.4.8 Procedure after Replacing the CIS...................................................................................................... 4-20
4.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor ....................................................................................................... 4-20
4.4.5.6 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor (Front/Rear).................................................... 4-22
4.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 4-22
4.4.6.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass..................................................................................................... 4-22
4.4.6.3 Removing the Contact Sensor HP Sensor........................................................................................... 4-23
4.4.7 Original Size Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 4-23
4.4.7.2 Removing the Original Sensor (Vertical Scan Direction) .................................................................. 4-23
4.4.7.3 Removing the Original Sensor (Horizontal Scan Direction) .............................................................. 4-24
4.4.8 Reader Heater (option) .............................................................................................................................. 4-24
4.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (Right) ................................................................................................. 4-25
4.4.8.3 Removing the Reader Front Cover ..................................................................................................... 4-25
4.4.8.4 Removing the ADF Reading Glass..................................................................................................... 4-25
4.4.8.5 Removing the Reader Heater (Left).................................................................................................... 4-26
Chapter 4
4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Specifications, Control Methods, and Functions

0010-4242
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Major specifications, control methods, and functions of the original exposure system are summarized below.
T-4-1
Item Function/Method
Exposure light source LED
Original scan In BOOK mode: Original scan is performed by moving the contact image sensor (CIS).
When ADF is used: Original stream reading is performed with the contact image sensor
(CIS) fixed.
Scan resolution 600 dpi (vertical scan) x 600 dpi (horizontal scan) (Color send: 300 dpi horizontal scan)
Gradation 256
Carriage position Contact image sensor (CIS) HP sensor (SR401)
detection
Magnification range 50% to 200%
Vertical scan direction: Image processing is by image processor PCB
Horizontal scan direction:
Carriage movement speed change and image
BOOK mode:
processing by image processor PCB *1
Original feed speed change and image processing by
ADF mode:
image processor PCB *1
Lens Rod lens array
CMOS sensor Number of lines: 1
Number of pixels: Total 7488 (incl. 7176 effective pixels)
Maximum original scan width: 304 mm
CIS drive control Drive control by reader motor (M401)
Original size detection [1] BOOK mode:
Vertical scan direction: Detection by reflection type sensor (AB/INCH)
Horizontal scan direction: Detection by reflection type sensor (AB/INCH)
[2] When ADF is used
Width: Detection by original width sensor PCB in ADF
Length: Detection by photo sensor in ADF
*1 The control method depends on the magnification. For more details, refer to "Magnification Change".
4.1.2 Major Components
0010-4243
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Major components of the original exposure system are as follows:
[5]
[4] [6]
[3]
[2] [7]
[8]
[1]
[12]
[7] [9]
[11]
[10]
F-4-1
T-4-2
Component No. Function/Specification

[1] Copyboard cover open/close SR402 Photo interrupter: Detects the copyboard cover open/
sensor (Rear: SR402) close status. Starts detecting the original size when the
copyboard cover angle is 30 deg.
[2] Reader controller PCB - Controls drive of the reader unit and image processing.
[3] Original sensor 3 SR406 Detects the original size (for all destinations).
[4] Original sensor 4 SR407 Detects the original size (AB, INCH/AB).
[5] Original sensor 5 SR408 Detects the original size (INCH/A)
4-1
Chapter 4
Component No. Function/Specification

[6] Reader motor M401 Pulse motor: Controls drive of the carriage.
[7] Reader heater*1 - Prevents condensation inside the original glass.
[8] Original sensor 1 SR404 Detects the original size (AB, INCH/A, INCH/AB).
[9] Original sensor 2 SR405 Detects the original size (AB, A, INCH/AB)
[10] Contact image sensor (CIS) - Uses LEDs for indirect exposure (LED +
Photoconductor)
[11] CISHP sensor SR401 Photo interrupter: Detects the CIS position.
[12] Copyboard cover open/close SR403 Finishes detecting the original size when the
sensor copyboard cover angle is 5 deg.
*1 Option setting
4.1.3 Control System Configuration

0010-4244
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The control system configuration of the original exposure system is shown below.
[4] [5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[7]
[1] 01
J4
02 J4 [8]
J4 J4 09
10
3 J4
08
J 40 12
04 J4
J4J 11 07
40 J4 J4
5
J4
13
J4
06
[13]
[12]
[11] [9]
[10]
F-4-2
[1] Printer main body (Connected to the image processor PCB)
[2] Connected to ADF
[3] Connected to the power supply PCB
[4] Reader motor drive control
[5] Reader motor (M401)
[6] Reader controller PCB
[7] Original sensor (horizontal scan direction)
[8] Original sensor (vertical scan direction)
[9] Contact image sensor
[10] Image signal
[11] CISHP sensor (PS503)
[12] Copyboard cover open/close sensor (Front: SR403)
[13] Copyboard cover open/close sensor (Front: SR402)
4.1.4 Reader Controller PCB

0010-4245
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The functional configuration of the reader controller PCB is shown below.
4-2
Chapter 4
DC5V
DC3.3V DC24V
J401
J405 J404 J403 J402
J410 J409
J411 J412
IC9
IC4
IC2
IC1
J408
J413 IC5
J406 J407
F-4-3
T-4-3
Jack No. Function

J401 Supplies power (24 VDC) from the main body (printer).
J402 Supplies power (5 VC, 3.3 VDC) from the main body (printer).
J403 Communicates with the main body (printer) (to control the ADF).
J404 Communicates with the main body (printer).
J405 Connected to the copyboard open/close sensor.
J406 Connected to the contact image sensor (CIS) HP sensor.
J407 Connected to the original sensor 1 and original sensor 2.
J408 Connected to the contact image sensor (CIS).
J409 Connected to the reader motor.
J410 Supplies power to the ADF.
J411 Communicates with the ADF (to drive the sensor).
J412 Communicates with the ADF (to drive the motor).
J413 Connected to the original sensor 3, original sensor 4, and original sensor 5.
4.2 Basic Sequence
4.2.1 Basic Sequence at Power-on

0010-4246
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Main power switch

ON
SREADY STBY
Reader motor
(M401)
LED
CISHP sensor
(SR401)
Shading Shading
position position
: Forward movement
: Backward movement
F-4-4
4-3
Chapter 4
CISHP
sensor
Shading Leading edge

HP position of original
1. CIS position check
F-4-5
4.2.2 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (Book mode, One Sheet of original)
0010-4247
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Black shading/White shading

Start key
ON
STBY SCFW SCRW STBY

Reader motor
(M401)
LED
CISHP sensor
(SR401)
Shading Leading edge Trailing edge Shading

position of original of original position
: Forward movement
: Backward movement
F-4-6
CISHP
sensor
Original glass reading Shading Leading edge Trailing edge

start position HP position of original of original
1. Moves to the start position

after black shading/white shading.
2. Original scan
3. Moves to the standby position
F-4-7
4.2.3 Basic Sequence after Depression of Start Key (ADF Mode, One Sheet of Original)
0010-4248
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
4-4
Chapter 4
Black shading/White shading

Start key
ON
STBY SCRW SCFW STBY

Reader motor
(M401)
LED
CISHP sensor
(SR401)
Shading Stream reading Trailing edge Shading
position position of original position
: Forward movement
: Backward movement
F-4-8
CS HP
sensor
Original glass
Stream reading reading start Shading
start position position HP position
1. Black shading/
White shading/
Original scan
F-4-9
4.3 Various Control
4.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System
4.3.1.1 Outline
0010-4249
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine's scanner system consists of the following components:
Reader motor
Reader controller
PCB [1] Carriage drive belt
Original glass
cover open/close
sensor (SR402)
Sensor
shading
plate
Forward
movement
[3]
[2] Backward
Original glass
movement
cover open/close Carriage
sensor (SR403)
Contact image
CISHP sensor (SR401) sensor (CIS)
Guide shaft
F-4-10
[1] Reader motor (M401) drive signal
Controls rotation/stop and rotational direction/speed of the reader motor.
[2] Contact image sensor (CIS) HP sensor (SR401) signal
Detects that the contact image sensor (CIS) is at the home position.
[3] Copyboard cover sensor (SR403 (front)/SR402 (rear)) signal
Detects the open/close status of the copyboard cover.
4-5
Chapter 4
4.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control

0010-4250
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The reader motor driver controls rotation/stop and rotational direction/speed of the reader motor based on the signals from IC2.

3.3V +5V +24V
RTP3APWN
J409
RTP3BPWN B*
1
RTP3A
Motor B
IC2 2
RTP3B driver A M401
3
MO_STANDBY A*
4
MO_TORQUE
F-4-11
MEMO:
The scan speed of this machine is as follows:
Copy (100%): 118 mm/sec
Color send (300 dpi x 300 dpi): 28 mm/sec
a. Forward Movement during Image Scan

During image scan, operation of the contact image sensor (CIS) is controlled by controlling the motor as shown below.
Start Leading edge Trailing edge

position of original of original Stop
Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration
Movement
speed
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Movement distance
[1] Acceleration area: The motor accelerates to the speed specified for each mode.
[2] Runup area: A margin to stabilize the speed.
[3] Image read area: The image is read at a constant speed.
[4] Deceleration area: Upon detection of the trailing edge, the motor decelerates rapidly and stops.
F-4-12
b. Backward Movement after Image Scan
After image scan, the carriage moves back to the contact image sensor (CIS) shading position at the constant speed (118 mm/sec).
4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
4.3.2.1 Outline
0010-4251
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The original is exposed to light and read using the contact image sensor (CIS) to read the image on a line-by-line basis.
T-4-4
Component Function
LED Illuminates the original.
Light guide Illuminates the entire image line with the LED light.
Rod lens array Collects the light reflected by the original.
CMOS sensor array Receives the light that passed through the rod lens array.
4-6
Chapter 4
Image read line
Light guide LED (R/G/B)
Original glass
Rod lens array

Scan direction
CMOS
sensor array
LED (R/G/B)
Light guide Rod lens array Light guide
LED
CCD LED
F-4-13
4.3.2.2 Analog Control Performed by the CIS

0010-4252
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

The flow of analog image processing performed by the contact image sensor (CIS) is as follows:
The light reflected by the original is collected by the rod lens array.
- The light is received by the CMOS sensor array.
- The CMOS sensor array converts the received light to an electric signal and outputs it.
The CMOS sensor array consists of four channels (units).
Each channel is provided with an output correction table to output an image signal after performing gain correction for the input brightness signal.
1
ls
xe
pi
88
74
it
ircu
rc
rive CCD channel x 4
D
s
l
3
xe
pi
72
18
F-4-14
- After replacing the contact image sensor (CIS), go through the following steps to perform inter-channel output correction:
Sequentially press the User Mode key, 2 key, 8 key, and User Mode key on the operation panel.
5) Press the 1 key.
After completion of the above steps, contact sensor output correction will be performed and parameters will be set automatically.
4-7
Chapter 4
4.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction
4.3.3.1 Magnification Change in Vertical Scan Direction

0010-4253
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
In the Book mode or when the ADF is used

In the vertical scan direction, the image is read at 100%. Magnification is changed by processing data on the image processor PCB.
4.3.3.2 Magnification Change in Horizontal Scan Direction

0010-4254
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
In the horizontal scan direction, magnification is changed as follows depending on the selected magnification rate:
1) When magnification is reduced to 50-99%
a. In the Book mode
Data is processed on the image processor PCB with the original scan speed held at 118 mm/sec.
b. When the ADF is used

The original feed speed is changed within the range of 118 mm/sec to 236 mm/sec depending on the selected magnification rate. Data is not processed on the image
processor PCB.
2) When magnification is increased to 100-200%

The original scan speed (in the Book mode)/original feed speed (when the ADF is used) is changed within the range of 118 mm/sec to 59 mm/sec depending on the
selected magnification rate. Data is not processed on the image processor PCB.
4.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals
4.3.4.1 Outline
0010-4255
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The original size is identified by the combination of presence and absence of output levels of the reflection type sensors as summarized in the tables below.
- Absence of paper: The light reflected from the reflection type sensor changes when the copyboard cover is open/close.
- Presence of paper: The light reflected from the reflection type sensor does not change when the copyboard cover is open/close.
This machine is provided with the following sensors. Locations of the sensors are shown below.
- Vertical scan direction: Reflection type photo sensors (2 locations for AB; 1 location for Inch)
- Horizontal scan direction: Reflection type photo sensors (2 locations for AB; 2 locations for Inch)
AB-Configration
Horizontal scan direction
Upper left corner
of original Index plate
Original sensor 3
Vertical scan direction
Original sensor 4
B5R
A4R
Original sensor 1
B5 B4
Original sensor 2 A4 A3
Inch-Configration
Horizontal scan direction
Upper left corner
of original
Original sensor 3
Vertical scan direction
Original sensor 5
STMT-R
LTR-R LGL
Original sensor 1
LTR 11" 17"
F-4-15
4-8
Chapter 4
4.3.4.2 Outline of Original Size Detection

0010-4256
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
- In the BOOK mode

Å@One sheet of original (A4R) is set and the copyboard cover (or ADF ) is closed.
1) Standby state
Å@Original sensor: Turns off.
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Copyboard cover
Copyboard glass
Reader unit Original sensor 1

Original sensor 2
F-4-16
2) The copyboard cover opens (at an angle of more than 30o).
Å@Original sensor: Turns off.
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
F-4-17
3) The copyboard cover is closed (at an angle of 30 deg).
Å@Original sensor: Turns on and original size identification process 1 is performed.
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
30
Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Original sensor 3/4 Original sensor 1/2

F-4-18
4) The copyboard cover is closed (at an angle of more than 5 deg but less than 30 deg)
Å@Original sensor: Turns on and original size identification process 2 is performed.
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
5 Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Original sensor 3/4 Original sensor 1/2

F-4-19
5) The original cover is closed (at an angle of 5 deg or less)Å@
Å@Å@The original size is identified.
Å@Å@Original sensor: Turns off.
In identifying the original size, the data obtained in the original size identification process 1 is compared with the data obtained in the original size identification
process 2 to check whether these two pieces of data are identical.
Note that a wrong original size may be identified because the sensor output level does not change in the following cases:
- When the original is A3-sized black
- When the original is a book (its thickness does not allow the copyboard cover to close fully, making it difficult to detect the sensor level change).
- When the copyboard cover is not closed fully (the sensor level change is not detected after lapse of the above time-out time)
Original sensor 3
Original sensor 4
Original (A4R)
Original sensor 1
Original sensor 2
Change absent
Change present
F-4-20
Before original size identification processes 1 and 2 are performed, the original size is detected with original sensors as follows:
4-9
Chapter 4
AB-Configration Inch-Configration
Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original

size sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor 3 sensor 4 size sensor 1 sensor 3 sensor 5
A3 11"X17"
A4 LTR
B4(8K)*1 LGL
B5(16K)*1 LTR-R
A4R No original
B5R(16K)*1
No original
:No original
:Change absent
F-4-21
* For Chinese paper, the following sizes are detected:
8KÅFEquivalent to B4 size
16KÅFEquivalent to B5 size
4.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control
4.3.5.1 Outline
0010-4257
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine changes the original read position or corrects the read image depending on the presence/absence of dust on the stream reading glass or ADF platen
roller, thus preventing dust from showing up in the image. This control is performed only when the ADF is used and it is closed.
[Control Timing]
- At job end
- Immediately before scanning (one sheet at a time)
Main power
switch Start key
ON ON
WMUPR STBY
1st 2nd
SCAN SCAN
Dust detection control

F-4-22
[Description of Control]
- At job end (Dust detection)
The contact image sensor (CIF) checks the light reflected by the ADF platen roller surface at the read position for presence/absence of dust. After completion of a
job, dust detection is performed three times. First, dust detection is performed once at position A. If no dust is detected at position A, dust detection is performed
twice there. If no dust is detected, the original is scanned at position A. If dust is detected at position A, move to position B and dust detection is performed twice
at position B. If no dust is detected at position B, the original is scanned at position B. If dust is also detected at position B, move to position C and dust detection
is performed once at position C. If dust is also detected at position C, a relevant message is displayed on the operation panel. In this case, move back to position A
and the original is scanned at position A.
- At job start (Dust bypass)

Presence/absence of dust is detected at all points A, B, and C in this order at job end. The original is read at the point where least dust is detected.
4-10
Chapter 4
A B C
F-4-23
- Immediately before scanning (one sheet at a time)
The contact image sensor (CIS) does not move to detect dust.
The original is read at the position determined at job end or start. If presence of dust is detected there, the read image is corrected.
T-4-5
Point Description
A Read reference position
B out 0.5 mm from the reference position to the inside of the
roller
C About 1.0 mm from the reference position to the inside of
the roller
Platen roller
0.5mm 0.5mm
A B C
Stream
reading
glass Lens
Contact image sensor

LED (CIS)
F-4-24
4.3.6 Image Processing
4.3.6.1 Outline
0010-4258
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Major specifications and functions of the image processing system are as follows:
4-11
Chapter 4
T-4-6
- CMOS sensor Number of lines: 1

Number of pixels: Total 7488 (incl. 7176 effective pixels)
Pixel size: 32 x 46.9 um
- Shading correction Shading correction: Made for each job.
Shading adjustment: Made in the Service mode.
Contact image
sensor (CIS) Reader controller PCB
Analog image processor Digital image processor
CMOS
sensor
Analog
A/D Shading Controller
image
conversion processing
processing
F-4-25
Functions of the image processing system are summarized below.
T-4-7
- Reader controller PCB CMOS sensor drive, analog image processing, A/D
conversion, and shading correction
The reader controller PCB is used to process images on a line-by-line basis. Its major functions are as follows:
1)Analog image processing
- CMOS sensor drive
- CMOS sensor output gain correction and offset correction
- CMOS sensor output A/D conversion
2)Digital image processing
- Shading correction
Contact image sensor (CIS)
CMOS sensor (1 line)
Analog image signal IC2

CMOS sensor
Gain CMOS sensor control signal
IC1 correction drive control
data
Serial
Analog image Target communication
processing value I/F
A/D RAM
- Gain correction Digital
- Offset correction conversion image J309
Digital image
signal signal
Shading correction
10 8
F-4-26
4.3.6.2 CMOS Sensor Drive

0010-4259
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The CMOS sensor used in this machine is a 1-line linear image sensor consisting of 7488 photocells. After completion of photoelectric conversion in the light-
receiving block, the signals are output to the AP circuit in the reader controller PCB in parallel for each channel (total eight channels) of the CMOS sensor array.
CMOS sensor 4 CMOS sensor 3 CMOS sensor 1
Light receiving block
output
L L H H L H L H H H L
F-4-27
4-12
Chapter 4
4.3.6.3 CMOS Sensor Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction

0010-4260
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The analog video signals output from the CMOS sensor are corrected so that they will have a specific gain level (gain correction), and the output voltages generated
in the absence of incident light are also corrected so that they it will have a specific offset level (offset correction).
4.3.6.4 CMOS Sensor Output A/D Conversion

0010-4261
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
After completion of the above corrections, the analog video signals are converted to digital signals corresponding to individual pixel voltage levels by the A/D
converter.
4.3.6.5 Shading Correction (Outline)

0010-4262
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The CMOS sensor outputs are necessary even for the following reasons even when the density of the original is uniform:
(1) Variation in sensitivity among CMOS sensor pixels

(2) Variation in light intensity of rod lens array
The machine performs shading correction to even out the CMOS sensor output.
There are two types of shading correction: shading adjustment performed in the Service mode and shading correction performed for each job.
4.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment

0010-4263
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine measures the density of the standard white plate, and stores the measured density data. It then processes the stored data to use it as the target value for
shading correction.
4.3.6.7 Shading Correction

0010-4264
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine performs shading correction for each scan. It measures the density of the standard white plate, and compares the measured value with the target value
stored in the shading correction circuit to use the difference between the two as the shading correction value. The machine uses this shading correction value to
correct the variation among CMOS sensor pixels when scanning the original, thus evening out the image density level.
CMOS
sensor Characteristics
output after correction
Target Characteristics
value before correction
Measurement
value
White
Original density
Standard white plate
F-4-28
4-13
Chapter 4
4.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass

0010-4296
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).

4.4.1 Copyboard glass 2) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the glass retainer [2].
3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].
4.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard glass
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
0010-4295
[1]

2) Remove the two screws [1], remove the glass retainer [2], and then
remove the copyboard glass [3].
[3] [1]
[2] [3]
F-4-32
[2]
- When removing the ADF reading glass, take care not to touch the glass
F-4-29 surface. Dirt on these parts can show up as white/black lines in the image.
If dirt is found, remove it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
- When installing the ADF reading glass, position the cut portion [1] of the
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the ADF reading glass sheet at the front-left corner.
following:
- Glass surface
- Standard white plate
Dirt on these parts can show up as white/black lines in the image. If dirt is
found, remove it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1]
F-4-33
4.4.2 Reader Controller PCB

0010-6089
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
F-4-30
[2]
[1]
F-4-34
4.4.2.2 Removing the Right Cover (Lower)

0010-6090
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Remove the five screws [1]. Remove the two hooks [2], and then detach
the right cover (lower) [3].
F-4-31
4-14
Chapter 4
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-35
4.4.2.3 Removing the Right Cover (Upper)

0010-6091
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-4-38
1) Remove the screw [1], and then detach the right cover (upper).
3) Remove the screw [1], and then disconnect the ground cable [2] of the
ADF harness.
[1] 4) Disconnect the four connectors [3], and then remove the ADF harness [4].
[3] [2] [1]
[2]
F-4-36

0010-6092
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[5] [4]
F-4-39
[2] When installing the ADF harness [4], fit the harness band [5] in the
groove in the reader rear cover.
5) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the reader rear cover [2].
[1]
[1]
F-4-37
4.4.2.5 Removing the Reader Rear Cover

0010-6093
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Remove the screw, and then detach the small cover [2]. [2]
F-4-40

0010-6094
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

4-15
Chapter 4
[3] [1] [2] [1]
[2] F-4-44
F-4-41 2) Disconnect the connector [1] and flexible cable [2] from the leader
controller PCB, and then remove the harness from the edge saddle [3].
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the
following: [2] [3]
- Glass surface
[1]
F-4-45
3) Remove the screw [1], and then detach the cover [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-46
4) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and then remove the harness from the
edge saddle [2] and clamp [3].
F-4-42 5) Remove the five screws [4].
[3] [2] [4]
F-4-43
[4] [1] [4]
4.4.2.7 Removing the Reader Controller PCB F-4-47
0010-4300
6) Go to the back of the machine, and then disconnect the four connectors [1]
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i from the reader controller PCB.
7) Remove the harness from the edge saddle/clamp [2].
8) Remove the flexible cable holder [3], and then disconnect the two flexible
MEMO: cables [4].
This machine stores adjustment values in the image processor PCB, not the 9) Remove the two screws [5].
reader controller PCB.
Accordingly, you need not input adjustment values after replacing the reader
controller PCB.
4-16
Chapter 4
[1] [2] [5]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-51
[2] [1] [4] [3]
0010-6096
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[5] [2] [3]

F-4-48
10) Remove he two screws [1], and then remove the flexible cable guide [2].
11) Remove the reader controller PCB [3] together with the mount.
[3] [2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-52

0010-6097
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
[1]
F-4-49
12) Remove the three screws [1], and remove the reader controller PCB [2]
from the mount.
[2]
[2]
F-4-53

0010-6098
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
F-4-50
4.4.3 Scanner Motor

0010-6095
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
4-17
Chapter 4
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-54
F-4-57
0010-6099 4.4.3.6 Removing the Scanner Motor
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i 0010-4303
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Remove the screw, and then detach the small cover [2]. 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the two screws [2].
2) Remove the spring [3], and then remove the scanner motor [4].
[1]
[4] [1]
[2]
[2] [3] [2]

F-4-58
4.4.4 Contact sensor

F-4-55
3) Remove the screw [1], and then disconnect the ground cable [2] of the 4.4.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover
ADF harness. 0010-6100
4) Disconnect the four connectors [3], and then remove the ADF harness [4]. iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[3] [2] [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-59
[5] [4]
F-4-56 0010-6101
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

When installing the ADF harness [4], fit the harness band [5] in the 1) Open the front cover.
groove in the reader rear cover. 2) Remove the five screws [1]. Remove the two hooks [2], and then detach
4-18
Chapter 4
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-60

0010-6102
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-4-63
ADF harness.
[1] 4) Disconnect the four connectors [3], and then remove the ADF harness [4].
[3] [2] [1]
[2]
F-4-61

0010-6103
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[5] [4]
F-4-64
[2] When installing the ADF harness [4], fit the harness band [5] in the
[1]
[1]
F-4-62

0010-6104
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Remove the screw, and then detach the small cover [2]. [2]
F-4-65

0010-6105
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

4-19
Chapter 4
[3] [1] [1] [2]
F-4-69
[2] 2) Remove the rear side of the contact sensor [1] from the carriage.
3) Disconnect the flexible cable [2], and then remove the contact sensor [1].
F-4-66
[2] [1]
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the
following:
- Glass surface
F-4-70
When removing or installing the contact sensor unit, take care not to
touch the light guide and rod lens array.
Light guide
Rod lens array
F-4-71
4.4.4.8 Procedure after Replacing the CIS

0010-4308
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-4-67
After replacing the contact image sensor (CIS), go through the following
steps to perform inter-channel output correction:
5) Press the 1 key.
4.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor

F-4-68
0010-6107
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

4.4.4.7 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
0010-4307
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i 1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2].
1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow to move the
contact sensor [2] to the position shown below.
4-20
Chapter 4
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-72

0010-6108
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i F-4-75
1) Open the front cover. 4.4.5.5 Removing the Reader Rear Cover
2) Remove the five screws [1]. Remove the two hooks [2], and then detach 0010-6111
the right cover (lower) [3]. iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Remove the screw, and then detach the small cover [2].
[3] [1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-73

0010-6109
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1] F-4-76
ADF harness.
4) Disconnect the four connectors [3], and then remove the ADF harness [4].
[3] [2] [1]

[2]
F-4-74

0010-6110
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[5] [4]
F-4-77
When installing the ADF harness [4], fit the harness band [5] in the
4-21
Chapter 4

[1]
[2]
F-4-78
4.4.5.6 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Close

Sensor (Front/Rear)
0010-4310
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Disconnect the to connectors [1], and then remove the screw [2].
2) Remove the reusable band [3], and then remove the harness [4] from the
sensor mount.
3) Remove the sensor mount [5].
4) Remove the sensor from the sensor mount.
F-4-81
[5] [1] [4]
[2]
F-4-82
[3] 4.4.6.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass

0010-6114
F-4-79 iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

4.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor 1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).
2) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the glass retainer [2].
4.4.6.1 Removing the Copyboard glass 3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].
0010-6113
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1]
[3] [1]
[2] [3]
F-4-83
[2]
F-4-80 - When removing the ADF reading glass, take care not to touch the glass
surface. Dirt on these parts can show up as white/black lines in the image.
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the - When installing the ADF reading glass, position the cut portion [1] of the
following: ADF reading glass sheet at the front-left corner.
- Glass surface
4-22
Chapter 4
[3] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-84
F-4-86
4.4.6.3 Removing the Contact Sensor HP Sensor
0010-4313
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the
following:
1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow to move he - Glass surface
contact sensor [2] to the center. - Standard white plate
2) Remove the two screws [3], and then remove the contact sensor [4] Dirt on these parts can show up as white/black lines in the image. If dirt is
together with the mount. found, remove it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
3) Remove the contact sensor HP sensor.
[1] [2]
[4]
[3]
F-4-87
F-4-85
4.4.7 Original Size Sensor

0010-6115
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-4-88
4.4.7.2 Removing the Original Sensor (Vertical Scan

Direction)
0010-4317
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
4-23
Chapter 4
4.4.7.3 Removing the Original Sensor (Horizontal Scan

[2] [1] Direction)
0010-6116
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[2] [1]
F-4-89
2) Disconnect the flexible cable [1], remove the screw [2], and then detach
the cover [3].
contact sensor [5] to the left.
F-4-93
[5] [3] [2] [1]
2) Disconnect the connector [1] from the reader controller PCB, and then
remove the harness from the edge saddle [2].
3) Remove the two screws [3], and then remove the original sensor [4]
together with the mount.
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
F-4-90
4) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the harness from the edge
saddle/clamp [2].
5) Remove the three screws [3], and then remove the original sensor (vertical
scan direction) [4] together with the mount.
[4]
[2] [1] F-4-94
4) Remove the harness from the edge saddle/clamp [1], and then disconnect
the connector.
5) Remove the original sensor [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-4-91
6) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the original sensor
(vertical scan direction) [2]. F-4-95
[2] 4.4.8 Reader Heater (option)

0010-6117
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1]
F-4-92
4-24
Chapter 4
[3] [1] [2] [1]
[2]
F-4-96
F-4-99
2) Remove the screw [1].
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the 3) Disconnect the connector [2], disconnect the harness from the wire saddle
following: [3], and then remove the reader heater (right) [4].
- Glass surface
Dirt on these parts can show up as white/black lines in the image. If dirt is [4] [2] [3] [1]
F-4-100
4.4.8.3 Removing the Reader Front Cover

0010-6118
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the reader front cover [2].
[1]
F-4-97
[2]
F-4-101
4.4.8.4 Removing the ADF Reading Glass

0010-6120
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-4-98
2) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the glass retainer [2].
3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].
4.4.8.2 Removing the Reader Heater (Right)

0010-4319
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the screw [1], and then detach the heater cover [2].
4-25
Chapter 4
[1] [1]
[3]
[2]
[2] [3] [4]

F-4-102 F-4-105
4) Remove the screw [1], and then detach the heater cover [2].
[2] [1]
- When removing the ADF reading glass, take care not to touch the glass
surface. Dirt on these parts can show up as white/black lines in the image.
- When installing the ADF reading glass, position the cut portion [1] of the
ADF reading glass sheet at the front-left corner.
F-4-106
5) Disconnect the connector [1], remove the screw [2], and then remove the
reader heater (left) [3].
[2] [3] [1]
[1]
F-4-103
4.4.8.5 Removing the Reader Heater (Left)

0010-4321
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Remove the screw [1], and then remove the jump board [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-107
F-4-104
2) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the stream reading glass stay
[2].
contact sensor [4] to the center.
4-26
Chapter 5 Laser Exposure
Contents
Contents
5.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Specifications and Control Mechanism....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 Specifications and Control Mechanism....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.4 Main Components ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.5 Control System Configuration..................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Various Controls................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.1.1 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.1.2 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.1.3 Horizontal Synchronization Control..................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1.4 Horizontal Synchronization Control..................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2.1 Automatic Photocurrent Control (APC)............................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control ............................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter ...................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.4.1 Laser Shutter Control ........................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.1 Laser Scanner Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.1.2 Removing the Right Cover (Lower)..................................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.1.3 Removing the Delivery Tray ................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.1.4 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit........................................................................................................ 5-7
Chapter 5
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Overview
0010-9035
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The laser scanner unit consists of a laser driver, scanner motor, and others. It is controlled by the signals from the DC controller PCB.
The laser driver operates the laser diode to emit light in response to the laser control signals and video signals from the DC controller PCB.
Laser beams are emitted, through a collimator lens and cylindrical lens, to the hexahedral mirror rotating at a constant speed.
Laser beam reflected by the hexahedral mirror focus on the photoconductor drum via the imaging lens and loop-back mirrors installed before the hexahedral mirror.
When the hexahedral mirror rotates at a constant speed, the photoconductor drum is scanned with laser beams at a constant speed.
When the photoconductor drum rotates at a constant speed and the photoconductor is scanned with laser beams at a constant speed, a latent image is formed on the
photoconductor drum.
5.1.2 Specifications and Control Mechanism

0011-2159
iR2016J /
T-5-1
Laser beam
Number of laser beams 1 beams
Scanner Motor
Type of motor DC brushless motor
Rotation control Constant speed rotaion control
Polygon Mirror
Number of facets 6 facets (40-mm dia.)
Control Mechanism
Synchronous control Horizontal (main scan) synchronization
control
Light intensity control Automatic photocurrent control (APC)
Others Laser emission ON/OFF control
Laser scanner motor control
Laser shutter control
5.1.3 Specifications and Control Mechanism
0010-9039
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-5-2
Laser beam
Number of laser beams 2 beams
Scanner Motor
Type of motor DC brushless motor
Rotation control Constant speed rotaion control
Polygon Mirror
Number of facets 6 facets (40-mm dia.)
Control Mechanism
Synchronous control Horizontal (main scan) synchronization
control
Light intensity control Automatic photocurrent control (APC)
Others Laser emission ON/OFF control
Laser scanner motor control
5.1.4 Main Components
0010-4799
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
5-1
Chapter 5
[2] [3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[6]
F-5-1
T-5-3
Name Function
[1] Photoconductive drum Receives laser beams to form a latent image.
[2] Laser mirror 1 (loop-back mirror) Reflects a laser beam toward laser mirror 2.
[3] Laser mirror 2 (loop-back mirror) Reflects a laser beam toward the photoconductor drum.
[4] BD PCB Generates a BD signal.
[5] Polygonal mirror Scans the photoconductive drum with a laser beam in the main
scan direction.
[6] Laser unit Emits laser beams.
[7] BD mirror Reflects a laser beam toward the BD PCB.
5.1.5 Control System Configuration
0010-4801
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The laser exposure system is controlled mainly by the IC5 on the DC controller PCB.
Main control types are as follows:
[1] Laser emission ON/OFF control/video signal input
[2] Horizontal synchronization control
[3] Laser scanner motor control
[4] Automatic photocurrent control (APC)
5-2
Chapter 5
DC Controller PCB
J314
J207
Image Processor
IC5
PCB
J206 J205
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
F-5-2
5.2 Various Controls
5.2.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing
5.2.1.1 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control

0010-7720
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
The purpose of this control is to turn ON/OFF the laser diode (LD) in response to video signals.
The DC controller PCB sends laser control signals (CNTRL0, CNTRL1, and CNTRL2), which are used to switch between laser driver operation modes, to the laser
driver IC along with video signals (VDO1, /VDO1, VDO2, and /VDO2). The laser driver IC controls laser emission (ON/OFF) according to the combination of
CNTRL0, CNTRL1, and CNTRL2 signals.
The following table shows combinations of laser control signals (CNTRL0, CNTRL1, and CNTRL2).
T-5-4
Laser control signal Laser status Description

CTL2 CTL1 CTL0 Laser A Laser B
0 0 0 OFF OFF Laser control OFF
Video signal input Laser beams can be emitted in
1 1 1
enable response to video signals.
Forced emission of laser A (for
1 1 0 ON OFF
adjustment in factory)
Forced emission of laser B (for
1 0 1 OFF ON
adjustment in factory)
Forced emission of laser A and
1 0 0 ON ON laser B (for adjustment in
factory)
0 1 0 ON OFF APC over laser A
0 0 1 OFF ON APC over laser B
0 1 1 OFF OFF Forced stop of laser emission
5.2.1.2 Laser Emission ON/OFF Control
0011-2155
iR2016J /
The purpose of this control is to turn ON/OFF the laser diode (LD) in response to video signals.
The DC controller PCB sends laser control signals (CNTRL0, CNTRL1, and CNTRL2), which are used to switch between laser driver operation modes, to the laser
driver IC along with video signals (VDO1, /VDO1). The laser driver IC controls laser emission (ON/OFF) according to the combination of CNTRL0, CNTRL1,
and CNTRL2 signals.
The following table shows combinations of laser control signals (CNTRL0, CNTRL1, and CNTRL2).
5-3
Chapter 5
T-5-5
Laser control signal Laser

Description
status
CTL2 CTL1 CTL0 Laser A
0 0 0 OFF Laser control OFF
ON Laser beams can be emitted in
0 0 1
response to video signals.
0 1 0 ON APC over laser
0 1 1 OFF Forced stop of laser emission
5.2.1.3 Horizontal Synchronization Control
0010-7721
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
The purpose of this control is to adjust the position where scanning starts in the horizontal direction (main scan direction) of the image with reference to the hori-
zontal synchronization signal (/BD) sent from the BD sensor in the laser scanner. The horizontal synchronization signal is also used as a vertical synchronization
signal to recognize the leading edge of paper. Upon detection of arrival of the fed paper at the prescribed position, the DC controller PCB starts sending the /BD
signal to the image porcessor PCB. The image processor PCB recognizes the leading edge of paper at the start of the continuous /BD signal; it recognizes the trailing
edge of paper at the end of the continuous /BD signal.
Memo:
About Generation of BD Signal
The BD sensor on the BD circuit board receives only the beam of laser B; it does not receive the beam of laser A. The BD signal is generated from the beam of
laser A.
5.2.1.4 Horizontal Synchronization Control

0011-2156
iR2016J /
The purpose of this control is to adjust the position where scanning starts in the horizontal direction (main scan direction) of the image with reference to the hori-
zontal synchronization signal (/BD) sent from the BD sensor in the laser scanner. The horizontal synchronization signal is also used as a vertical synchronization
signal to recognize the leading edge of paper. Upon detection of arrival of the fed paper at the prescribed position, the DC controller PCB starts sending the /BD
signal to the image porcessor PCB. The image processor PCB recognizes the leading edge of paper at the start of the continuous /BD signal; it recognizes the trailing
edge of paper at the end of the continuous /BD signal.
5.2.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light
5.2.2.1 Automatic Photocurrent Control (APC)

0010-7722
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The purpose of this control is to monitor the laser beam emitted to the photodiode on the laser driver circuit board in order to adjust the light quantity.
5.2.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor
5.2.3.1 Laser Scanner Motor Control

0010-7723
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
From the moment the laser scanner motor starts to the moment it reaches the target revolution speed, the revolution speed is controlled with reference to the laser
scanner motor revolution speed signal (FG signal). After the target revolution speed is reached, the revolution speed is controlled so that the BD cycle and the laser
scanner motor revolution cycle are in the same phase.
The revolution speed of the laser scanner motor is controlled using an acceleration signal (ACC signal) and deceleration signal (DEC signal).
5-4
Chapter 5
DC Controller PCB
IC5
J205
/BD
P-DEC
P-ACC
P- FG
F-5-3
5.2.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter
5.2.4.1 Laser Shutter Control

0010-4807
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
When the drum unit is drawn out, the interlocked laser shutter moves down, shutting off the laser beam path. When opening of the front cover or left door is detected,
the laser scanner motor and laser outputs turn off.
5-5
Chapter 5
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
OPEN CLOSE
[2] [2]
[1] [3] [1] [3]
[4] [4]
[5] [5]
F-5-4
[1] Laser shutter
[2] Laser mirror 1
[3] Laser mirror 2
[4] Polygonal mirror
[5] Laser beam
5-6
Chapter 5
5.3 Parts Replacement Procedure [3] [1] [3]
5.3.1 Laser Scanner Unit

0010-6143
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
[2] [5] [2] [4]

F-5-8
[1]
F-5-5

0010-6175
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[3]
[1]
[2]
F-5-6
5.3.1.3 Removing the Delivery Tray

0010-6176
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the delivery tray [2].
[1] [2]
F-5-7
5.3.1.4 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

0010-6177
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the two pieces of sponge [1].

2) Disconnect the three connectors [2].
3) Remove the three screws [3], and then remove the metal plate [4] and laser
scanner unit [5].
5-7
Chapter 6 Image Formation
Contents
Contents
6.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Specifications of Image Formation System................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Major Components of Image Formation System ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Image Formation Process ................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.1 Image Formation Process ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.3 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operation ...................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.4 Driving and Controlling the High-Voltage System............................................................................................ 6-3
6.4.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.5 Drum Unit........................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit ............................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.5.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.5.2 Charging Mechanism .................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.5.2.1 Primary Charging Bias Control ............................................................................................................ 6-4
6.6 Developing Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.6.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.6.2 Developing Bias Control ............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.7 Toner Container.................................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.7.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.8 Transfer Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.8.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit ........................................................................................................................ 6-6
6.8.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias ...................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.8.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control ................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.8.3 Separation Mechanism ................................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.8.3.1 Static Eliminator Bias Control.............................................................................................................. 6-7
6.9 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning ........................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.9.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.9.2 Waste Toner Full Detection ........................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.10 Parts Replacement Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.10.1 Drum Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.10.1.1 Removing the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.10.2 Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.10.2.4 Removing the Delivery Tray .............................................................................................................. 6-9
6.10.2.5 Removing the Developing Assembly................................................................................................. 6-9
6.10.2.6 Precautions about Installation of Developing Assembly ................................................................. 6-10
6.10.2.7 Procedure after Replacing the Developing Assembly...................................................................... 6-10
6.10.3 Transfer Charging Roller......................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.10.3.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller .......................................................................................... 6-10
Chapter 6
6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Specifications of Image Formation System

0010-4265
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-6-1
Photosensitive drum
Drum type OPC drum
Drum diameter 3mm
Cleaning mechanism Cleaning blade
Processing speed 106.7mm/sec
Primary charging
Charging method Roller charging (AC + DC)
ng roller diameter 14mm
Transfer charging
Charging method Roller charging (DC)
Charging roller diameter 16mm
Developing assembly
Developing cylinder diameter 20mm
Developing method Dry, 1-component jumping (AC + DC)
Toner 1-component, negative toner
Remaining toner level detection Remaining toner level sensor (in developing assembly)
Others
Separation method Static Eliminator + Curvature separation
Waste toner Collected in the drum cartridge.
6.1.2 Major Components of Image Formation System
0010-4266
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
Laser beam
[5] [6]
[10]
[9]
[8] [7]
Paper transport
path
F-6-1
[1] Photosensitive drum
[2] Cleaner blade
[3] Primary charging roller
[4] Drum unit
[5] Blade
[6] Developing assembly
[7] Toner bottle
[8] Developing cylinder
[9] Transfer charging roller
[10] Static eliminator
6.2 Image Formation Process
6.2.1 Image Formation Process

0011-0620
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The image formation system of this machine consist of a primary charging roller, a drum unit integrated with a drum cleaner, a toner bottle, a developing assembly,
a transfer charging roller, and so on.
6-1
Chapter 6
The image formation process of this machine is composed of the following five blocks (7 steps):
[1] Electrostatic latent image formation block
Step 1: Primary charging (AC & Minus DC)
Step 2: Laser exposure
[2] Developing block
Step 3: Developing (AC & Minus DC bias)
[3] Transfer block
Step 4: Transfer (Plus DC)
Step 5: Separation (Minus DC)
[4] Fixing block
Step 6: Fixing (Minus DC bias)
[5] Drum cleaning block
Step 7: Drum cleaning
4. Fixing block 6. Fixing Delivery
5. Drum cleaning block

7. Drum cleaning
1. Primary charging 1. Electrostatic latent

image formation block
5. Separation
3. Transfer block 2. Laser beam exposure
4. Transfer
3. Development 2. Developing block
Registration
Manual feed pickup
Rotational direction of
photosensitive drum
Paper flow
Cassette pickup
F-6-2
6.3 Basic Sequence
6.3.1 Basic Sequence of Operation

0011-0628
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The basic sequence of operation of this machine is explained below.

For more details, refer to the explanation of various types of bias control.
- At power-on (when the door is opened/closed)
The main motor starts rotating after completion of the error check.
To prevent fogging of the drum, the developing DC bias voltage is held higher than usual during application of the developing AC bias voltage.
Power ON
or
Door open/close
WAIT STBY
Main motor
(M204)
Scanner motor
(M203)
Primary charging
AC bias
Primary charging
DC bias
Developing
AC bias
Developing
DC bias
Cleaning bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator
bias
Fixing film bias
F-6-3
- During printing
To prevent fogging of the drum, the developing DC bias is held higher than usual except during image formation.
To prevent the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum from sticking to the transfer charging roller, the transfer roller bias which is lower than that applied
during printing the is applied at the prescribed timing.
6-2
Chapter 6
Print command
is received
STBY INTR PRINT [1] PRINT

Main motor
(M204)
Scanner motor
(M203)
Primary charging
AC bias
Primary charging
DC bias
Developing
AC bias
Developing
DC bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator
bias
Fixing film bias
F-6-4
[1] Between sheets
- At the end of printing
To prevent fogging of the drum, the developing DC bias is held higher than usual except during image formation.
To prevent the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum from sticking to the transfer charging roller, the transfer roller bias which is lower than that applied
during printing the is applied at the prescribed timing.
PRINT [1] LSTR STBY
Main motor
(M204)
Scanner motor
(M203)
Primary charging
AC bias
Primary charging
DC bias
Developing
AC bias
Developing
DC bias
Cleaning bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator
bias
Fixing film bias
F-6-5
[1] Time until post-rotation
6.4 Driving and Controlling the High-Voltage System
6.4.1 Outline
0011-0650
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The voltage generated by superimposing the DC voltage over the AC voltage is applied to the primary charging roller and developing cylinder, and a positive or
negative DC voltage is applied to the transfer charging roller according to the instruction of the CPU on the DC controller PCB.
The primary DC bias and developing DC bias are changed according to the image density information sent from the image processor PCB, thus adjusting the image
density.
A negative DC voltage is applied to the electrostatic discharge needle and fixing film.
6-3
Chapter 6
DC controller High-voltage power

PCB supply PCB
J214 J100 Fixing film bias JP5/JP6
ASIC circuit
JP3/JP4
Primary bias
circuit
CPU Static eliminator JP9/JP10

bias circuit
Tr3
Transfer bias circuit
Developing bias JP7/JP8

circuit
Remaining toner JP1/JP2

level detection circuit
F-6-6
6.5 Drum Unit
6.5.1 Outline of the Drum Unit
6.5.1.1 Outline
0010-4275
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Major components of the drum unit are as follows:
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-6-7
[1] Photosensitive drum
[2] Cleaning blade
[3] Primary charging roller
6.5.2 Charging Mechanism
6.5.2.1 Primary Charging Bias Control

0010-4276
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
With the primary charging bias method, the drum is charged directly by the charging roller. In addition to a DC bias, an AC bias is applied to the primary charging
roller to stabilize charging. When the drum is charged, both AC and DC biases are applied. When the drum is discharged, only the AC bias is applied.
The ASIC on the DC controller PCB outputs the primary bias drive signal (/PRACFOT), primary AC bias ON/OFF signal (/PRACON), primary DC bias drive
signal (/PRDCFOT), and primary DC bias output level signal (/PRDCPWM) to apply the voltage generated by superimposing the primary AC bias over the primary
DC bias to the primary charging roller.
The primary AC bias is detected by the primary AC bias current detection circuit, and is fed back to the AC generator circuit via the comparison circuit.
The primary DC bias is detected by the primary DC bias current detection circuit, and is fed back to the DC generator circuit via the comparison circuit. Thus, this
machine controls the primary DC bias voltage. The primary DC bias voltage changes with the developing DC bias voltage according to the image density informa-
tion sent from the image processor PCB.
6-4
Chapter 6
DC controller PCB High-voltage power supply PCB
J214 J100 Primary bias circuit
/PRDCPWM Compariso Primary DC bias voltage

circuit detection circuit
/PRDCFOT DC generation circuit

JP3/JP4
Superimposition
ASIC To primary
/PRACFOT
AC generation circuit charging roller
/PRACON Comparison Primary AC bias current

/PRACMONI
CPU
F-6-8
6.6 Developing Unit
6.6.1 Outline
0010-4279
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Major components of the developing assembly are as follows:
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
F-6-9
[1] Developing Assembly
[2] Stirring plate
[3] Antenna rod
[4] Developing blade
[5] Developing cylinder
6.6.2 Developing Bias Control

0010-4280
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
A DC bias and an AC bias are applied to the developing cylinder.

The ASIC on the DC controller PCB outputs the developing AC bias drive signal (/DVACFOT), developing AC bias ON/OFF signal (/DVACON), developing DC
bias drive signal (/DVDCFOT), and developing DC bias output level signal (/DVDCPWM) to apply the voltage generated by superimposing the developing AC
bias over the developing DC bias to the developing cylinder.
To prevent fogging of the drum, a DC bias higher than usual applied except during image formation and when the developing AC bias is applied for warm-up
rotation.
The developing DC bias is detected by the developing DC bias detection circuit, and is fed back to the DC generation circuit via the comparison circuit, thus con-
trolling the DC bias voltage. The developing DC bias voltage changes with the primary DC bias voltage according to the image density information sent from the
image processor PCB.
The remaining toner level is detected during warm-up rotation and when the developing AC bias is applied for printing. The remaining toner level detection signal
(TNRCHKT) sampled from the antenna (for remaining toner level check) in the developing assembly is compared with the reference signal (TNRCHKD) received
from the developing bias detection circuit.
6-5
Chapter 6
DC controller High-voltage power supply PCB

PCB
Developing bias circuit
/DVDCPWM Comparison Developing DC bias

ASIC
circuit voltage detection circuit
DC generation circuit
/DVDCFOT
JP7/JP8
Superimposition
/DVACFOT To developing
/DVACON AC generation circuit cylinder
Developing AC bias
TNRCHKD current detection circuit
CPU
TNRCHKT Remaining toner level JP1/JP2

detection circuit
From remaining
toner level sensor
F-6-10
6.7 Toner Container
6.7.1 Outline
0010-4281
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The structure of the toner bottle is shown below.

The toner bottle is charged with 1-component, insulating, magnetic toner. The stirring rod in the toner bottle is rotated by the mina motor to supply toner into the
developing assembly through the toner supply port.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-6-11
[1] Stirring rod
[2] Toner bottle lever
[3] Toner supply port
6.8 Transfer Unit
6.8.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit
6.8.1.1 Outline
0010-4287
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The transfer unit consists of a transfer roller [1] and an static eliminator [2].
The transfer roller is driven by the photosensitive drum.
The static eliminator is biased to separate paper from the drum.
6-6
Chapter 6
[2]
[1]
F-6-12
6.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias
6.8.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control

0011-1657
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
A negative bias, sheet-to-sheet bias, or positive bias is applied to the transfer charging roller according to the type of sequence.
The negative bias is applied at the prescribed timing to moves the toner from the transfer charging roller to the photosensitive drum for cleaning.
The sheet-to-sheet bias is lower than that applied during printing and it is applied at the prescribed timing to prevent the toner remaining on the photosensitive drum
from adhering to the transfer charging roller.
The positive bias is applied to transfer toner images from the photosensitive drum to paper.
DC High-voltage power supply PCB

controller
PCB Transfer bias circuit
/TRPWM Comparison Positive current

ASIC
/TRPFOT Positive voltage

generation circuit
Tr3
TRCHG Constant current/voltage Superimposition
switching circuit To transfer
/TRNFOT Negative voltage charging roller
generation circuit
CPU TRCRNT
F-6-13
6.8.3 Separation Mechanism
6.8.3.1 Static Eliminator Bias Control

0011-1658
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Two types of biases, a high-output bias and a low-output bias, are applied to the static eliminator using the static eliminator bias drive signal (/DISDCFOT) and
static eliminator bias output level signal (/DSCPWM) issued from the DC controller PCB according to the type of the print sequence, thus allowing the printing
paper to separate easily from the photosensitive drum.
DC controller High-voltage power supply PCB

PCB
Static eliminator bias circuit
ASIC
/DSCPWM Static eliminator bias
/DISDCFOT generation circuit
JP9/JP10
To static eliminator
CPU
F-6-14
6-7
Chapter 6
6.9 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning
6.9.1 Outline
0010-4292
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Toner reaming on the photosensitive drum after image transfer is scraped by the photosensitive drum cleaner blade and is fed in the waste toner box.
6.9.2 Waste Toner Full Detection

0010-4294
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The waste toner collected by the cleaner blade is fed to the waste toner box using the waste toner feed screw in the drum unit. A torque limiter is provided at the
end of the waste toner feed screw is provided with a torque limiter. When the waste toner box is filled with waste toner, the torque limiter goes on to stop the waster
toner feed screw. As a result, the sensor flag of the waster toner full sensor (SR206) is pushed intermittently, reporting the waste toner full condition to the DC
controller PCB.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
SR206
F-6-15
[1] Cleaner blade
[2] Waste toner stirring rod
[3] Waste toner box
[4] Torque limiter
[5] Drum
MEMO:
The waste toner box is capable of storing about 630 g of toner.
6-8
Chapter 6
6.10.1 Drum Unit

[1]
6.10.1.1 Removing the Drum Unit
0010-6179
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i [2]

2) Turn the developing assembly locking lever [2] clockwise to open the left
door [3].
3) Draw out the drum unit [4].
[1]
[4] F-6-18

0010-6183
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[3]
[2] [3]
[1]
F-6-16
- When attaching or detaching the drum unit, open the left door fully to pre-
vent the damage to the drum unit.
- To prevent exposure of the drum, cover the drum unit with a few sheets of [1]
[2]
paper and place it in a safe place.
F-6-19
6.10.2 Developing Assembly 6.10.2.4 Removing the Delivery Tray

0010-6184
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0010-6181
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

door [3].
[4]
[3]
[1] [2]
F-6-20
6.10.2.5 Removing the Developing Assembly

[2] iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
0010-6185
1) Remove the screw [1], and remove the developing assembly locking lever
[1] [2].
F-6-17
2) Release the two hooks [3] (marked with ), and then remove the toner
bottle cover [4].
- To prevent exposure of the drum, cover the drum unit with a few sheets of

0010-6182
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

6-9
Chapter 6
6.10.2.7 Procedure after Replacing the Developing

[3] Assembly
0011-2541
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[2]
After replacing the developing assembly, go through the following steps
in the developing assembly idle rotation mode before installing the toner car-
tridge.
1) Plug the power cord into the outlet.

4) When a message appears on the operation panel display, press the
following keys to enter the service mode:
Additional Functions key > 2 key > 8 key > Additional Functions key
[1] [4] 5) Select "#PRINT" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
6) Select "#PRINT SW" using the + or - key, and hen press the OK key.
F-6-21 Confirm that the following message is displayed:
3) Draw out the developing assembly [1]. Message: #PRINT SW 001 00000000
# key > 1 key > 1 key
9) Press the OK key. Confirm that "SW 011" changes to "SW 012".
10) Press the Reset key to exit the service mode.
11) Close the front cover. The machine will run in the developer idling mode
for about 1 minute.
6.10.3 Transfer Charging Roller

[1] 6.10.3.1 Removing the Transfer Charging Roller
F-6-22
0010-6187
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

6.10.2.6 Precautions about Installation of Developing 1) Open the left door.
Assembly 2) Remove the transfer charging roller [1]
0010-6186
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
When installing the developing assembly, follow the precaution given

below.
Front side
Fit the convex portion of the main body in the concave portion on the bottom
of the developing assembly.
[1]
F-6-25
Do not touch the transfer charging roller surface.
F-6-23
Rear side
Fit the pin [1] seen in the back of the main body in the support hole [2] pro-
vided at the back of the developing assembly.
[1] [2]
F-6-24
6-10
Chapter 7 Pickup/Feeding System
Contents
Contents
7.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1 Specifications/Configuration/Operation Methods....................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Locations of Main Units.............................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.3 Roller Layout Drawing................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.4 Paper Path Drawing(Printer on its own)...................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.5 Paper Path Drawing(Finisher-U1)............................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.6 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex Unit-A1/Finisher-U1).................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.7 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex-A1) ................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.1.8 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex-A1/Inner 2Way Tray-E1).............................................................................. 7-4
7.1.9 Paper Path Drawing(Inner 2Way Tray-E1)................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.10 Sensor Layout Drawing............................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.2 Detecting Jams ................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 Delay Jams .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
7.2.1.1 Delay Jam in Pickup Assembly............................................................................................................ 7-6
7.2.1.2 Delay Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Leading Edge Jam at Delivery Sensor/Wound Paper Jam at
Fixing Assembly) ......................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Stationary Jams............................................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.2.2.1 Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly ..................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2.2 Stationary Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Trailing Edge Stationary Jam at Delivery Sensor/Stationary
Jam at Delivery Sensor)................................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.2.3 Other Jams ................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.3.1 Door Open Jam..................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.2 Cassette Pickup Operation........................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.3 Cassette Paper Size Detection ..................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.2 Post-pickup Control after Multi Manual Feed Pickup ................................................................................ 7-9
7.5 Parts Replacement Procedure........................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.1 Pickup Roller ............................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.5.1.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Pickup Roller ...................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.2 Cassette Pickup Assembly......................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.2.1 Removing the Lower-left Cover......................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.2.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly し ..................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.3 Cassette Size Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.5.3.1 Removing the Paper Size Detection Switches.................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.4 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor...................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.4.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly .......................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.4.2 Removing the Retry Sensor................................................................................................................ 7-11
7.5.5 Cassette Paper Sensor................................................................................................................................ 7-11
7.5.5.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly ...................................................................................... 7-11
7.5.5.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Presence/Absence Sensor ................................................................... 7-11
7.5.6 Cassette Pickup Solenoid .......................................................................................................................... 7-11
Contents
7.5.6.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly .......................................................................................... 7-11

7.5.6.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................................ 7-12
7.5.7 Manual Feed Tray sensor........................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.5.7.2 Removing the Transfer Registration Unit........................................................................................... 7-12
7.5.7.3 Removing the Feed Guide .................................................................................................................. 7-12
7.5.7.4 Removing the Multifeeder Paper Presence/Absence Sensor.............................................................. 7-12
7.5.8 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.8.2 Removing the Transfer Registration Unit........................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.8.3 Removing the Feed Guide .................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.5.8.4 Removing the Multifeeder Connector Cover...................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.8.5 Removing the Multifeeder Unit.......................................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.8.6 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Solenoid....................................................................................... 7-13
7.5.9 Registration Roller..................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.5.9.2 Removing the Registration Roller ...................................................................................................... 7-14
7.5.10 Registration Clutch .................................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.5.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.5.10.2 Removing the Registration Clutch.................................................................................................... 7-14
7.5.11 Separation Roller ..................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.11.1 Removing the Feed and Separation Rollers...................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.12 Separation Pad ......................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.12.1 Removing the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.5.12.2 Removing the Transfer Registration Unit......................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.12.3 Removing the Feed Guide ................................................................................................................ 7-15
7.5.12.4 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Roller......................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.12.5 Removing the Separation Pad........................................................................................................... 7-16
Chapter 7
7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Specifications/Configuration/Operation Methods

0010-4855
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Functions and operation methods of the pickup/feeding system are as follows:

T-7-1
Item Function/Operation method

Pickup method Cassette Clow retard
Multi manual feed tray Duplo separation
Paper stack Cassette Plain Paper 300Sheets(64g/m2)
260Sheets(75g/m2)
250Sheets(80g/m2)
125Sheets(90g/m2)
Multi manual feed tray Plain paper
Large 50Sheets(64g/m2)*1
Small 100Sheets(64g/m2)
Large 50Sheets(75g/m2)
Thick Paper 50Sheets(105g/m2)
50Sheets(128g/m2)
Label sheet 1Sheets
OHP 50Sheets
Envelope 10Sheets
Postcard 40Sheets
Paper size Setting Cassette Set by user

Multi manual feed tray Set by user
Delivery option Finisher-U1
Inner 2Way Tray-E1
Pickup option Cassette Feeding Module-J1
Cassette Feeding Module-K1
1* Large:more than B4/LGL,Small:less than B4/LGL
7.1.2 Locations of Main Units
0011-0878
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Locations of main units of the pickup/feeding system are shown blow.
]8[
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-1
[1] Pickup assembly
[2] Manual feed pickup assembly
[3] Registration roller
[4] Transfer assembly
[5] Duplex print paper feed assembly(option)
[6] Fixing assembly
[7] First delivery assembly
[8] Second delivery assembly(option)
7.1.3 Roller Layout Drawing

0010-4859
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
7-1
Chapter 7
The layout of the rollers used in the pickup/feeding system is shown below.
[10] [11] [12]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

F-7-2
[1] Pickup roller
[2] Cassette pickup roller
[3] Feed roller 1
[4] Multi pickup roller
[5] Registration roller
[6] Duplex print paper feed roller 3
[7] Transfer roller
[8] Fixing roller
[11] Second delivery roller
[12] First delivery roller
7.1.4 Paper Path Drawing(Printer on its own)

0011-1941
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-3
[1] Cassette pickup
[2] Manual feed pickup
[3] Delivery from copy tray 1
7-2
Chapter 7
7.1.5 Paper Path Drawing(Finisher-U1)

0011-1970
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-4
[1] Cassette pickup
[3] Finisher-U1(option)
7.1.6 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex Unit-A1/Finisher-U1)

0011-0974
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-7-5
[1] Cassette pickup
[3] Both sides re-paper feed(option)
[4] Finisher-U1(option)
7.1.7 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex-A1)

0011-0900
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
7-3
Chapter 7
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-7-6
[1] Cassette pickup
7.1.8 Paper Path Drawing(Duplex-A1/Inner 2Way Tray-E1)

0011-1969
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-7
[1] Cassette pickup
[4] Delivery from copy tray 2(option)
7.1.9 Paper Path Drawing(Inner 2Way Tray-E1)

0011-1956
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
7-4
Chapter 7
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-8
[1] Cassette pickup
[4] Delivery from copy tray 2(option)
7.1.10 Sensor Layout Drawing

0011-0894
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The layout of the sensors used in the pickup/feeding system is shown below.
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

F-7-9
[1] Cassette 2 paper presence/absence sensor
[2] Registration sensor (SR209)
[3] Manual feed paper presence/absence sensor (SR208)
[4] Duplex print paper sensor 2 (SR1003)(Option)
[5] Fixed paper delivery sensor (SR202)
[6] First delivery sensor (SR207)
[7] Duplex print paper sensor 1 (SR1002)(option)
[8] Second delivery sensor (SR1102)(option)
7-5
Chapter 7
7.2 Detecting Jams
7.2.1 Delay Jams
7.2.1.1 Delay Jam in Pickup Assembly

0010-4883
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Delay Jam in Pickup Assembly

The registration sensor cannot detect the leading edge of paper within the jam detection time interval after paper pickup started.
T-7-2
Sensor/Solenoid
Registration sensor (SR209)
Pickup solenoid (SL202)
7.2.1.2 Delay Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Leading Edge Jam at Delivery Sensor/Wound Paper Jam at Fixing
Assembly)
0011-0712
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Paper Leading Edge Jam at Delivery Sensor

The delivery sensor cannot detect presence of paper within the prescribed time after the registration clutch has been turned on.
T-7-3
Sensor/Registration clutch
Delivery sensor (SR203)
Registration clutch (CL203)
Wound Paper Jam at Fuser
The delivery sensor has detected absence of paper within the prescribed time after it detected presence of paper (within the prescribed
time after the registration clutch had been turned on).
T-7-4
Sensor/Registration clutch
Registration clutch (CL203)
7.2.2 Stationary Jams
7.2.2.1 Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly

0010-4884
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly

The registration sensor does not detect absence of paper within the prescribed time before the next leading edge of fed paper reaches the registration sensor.
T-7-5
Sensor
Registration sensor(SR209)
7.2.2.2 Stationary Jam in Delivery Assembly (Paper Trailing Edge Stationary Jam at Delivery Sensor/Stationary Jam at
Delivery Sensor)
0011-0733
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Paper Trailing Edge Stationary Jam at Delivery Sensor

The delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within the prescribed time after the registration sensor has been turned off.
T-7-6
Sensor
Registration sensor (SR209)
Stationary Jam at Delivery Sensor
The delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within the prescribed time after it has detected the leading edge of paper.
T-7-7
Sensor
7.2.3 Other Jams
7.2.3.1 Door Open Jam

0010-4886
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Door Open Jam

The door is opened when paper to be printed is in the paper feed path.
7.3 Cassette Pick-Up Unit
7.3.1 Overview
0010-4887
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The paper picked up from the cassette is fed to the registration roller using the vertical path roller driven by the main motor (M204). The registration roller is not
rotating when paper reaches there, so an arch is formed at the leading of the paper to prevent skewing. The DC controller PCB turns on the registration clutch
(CL203) at the prescribed timing to transfer the main motor rotation to the registration roller, thus feeding the paper to the delivery tray through the transfer, sepa-
7-6
Chapter 7
ration, fixing, and delivery assemblies.
F-7-10
7.3.2 Cassette Pickup Operation

0011-0268
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Rotation of the pickup roller is controlled by the pickup roller drive gear, which transfers the drive power of the main motor (M204) to the pickup roller drive shaft,
and the cassette pickup solenoid (SL202). When the main motor starts rotating, the interlocked relay gear also starts rotating. At this time, the pickup roller drive
gear is not driven because its toothless portion is positioned at the relay gear and therefore these gears are not engaged with each other.
1) The DC controller PCB issues a cassette pickup solenoid drive signal (CSTFD). When the solenoid is turned on, the control arm pushes the cam to rotate the
pickup roller drive gear slightly.
F-7-11
2) When the pickup roller drive gear is engaged with the pickup roller shaft gear, drive power is transferred to the pickup roller shaft gear and consequently the
pickup roller starts rotating.
F-7-12
3) When the feed roller drive gear is engaged with the feed roller shaft gear, drive power is transferred to the feed roller shaft gear and consequently the feed roller
7-7
Chapter 7
starts rotating.
4) When the pickup roller rotates once, the toothless portion of the pickup roller drive gear comes to the position of the relay gear and consequently drive power of
the main motor is not transferred, stopping the rotation of pickup and feed rollers.
5) The picked up paper is fed to the registration roller through the vertical path roller.
F-7-13
7.3.3 Cassette Paper Size Detection

0011-0289
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The size of the paper in the cassette is detected by the DC controller PCB when the user changes the position of the cassette paper size lever. When the cassette is
inserted in the iR host machine, the paper size lever pushes the paper size switches provided in the iR host machine to allow the DC controller PCB to detect presence
of the cassette and the size of paper. Paper size switches are arranged as shown below. Paper sizes are determined by the combinations of the switches pushed by
the paper size lever.
PSIZE4 PSIZE1
PSIZE3 PSIZE2
F-7-14
T-7-8
STM
A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R LGL 11x17 LTR LTRR U1* U2* U3*
T
PSIZ
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
E1
PSIZ
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
E2
PSIZ
OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
E3
PSIZ
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON
E4
ON:The push switch is pushed.
OFF:The push switch is not pushed.
*:Not used.
7-8
Chapter 7
7.4 Manual Feed Pickup Unit
7.4.1 Overview
0011-0304
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
a. Multi Manual feed Pickup Control

The manual feed pickup mechanism picks up sheets of paper in succession from the multi manual feed tray. The sheets of paper stacked in the tray are raised against
the manual feed pickup roller by the inner plate. The manual feed pickup roller is driven by the main motor (M204) via the manual feed pickup solenoid (SL202)
and gears. Only one sheet of paper is picked up by the combination of the manual feed pickup roller and manual feed pickup paper separation pad, and then fed to
the registration roller. These operations are performed for each sheet to be picked. The user must set the size of the paper in the multi manual feed tray using the
operation panel, or the user must register a fixed size in the user mode.
F-7-15
b. Inner Plate Lift Operation
During standby, the inner plate is at the down position with it held by the cams provided at the front and back of the manual feed pickup roller shaft. Rotation of
the pickup roller rotates the interlocked cams to lift the inner plate, raising the sheets of paper (loaded in the manual feed tray) against the manual feed pickup roller.
On the opposite side of the pickup roller is mounted a separation pad that separates only one sheet of paper from others and feeds it to the next section.
c. Manual feed Tray Pickup Drive Mechanism
pickup solenoid drive signal (MFPD) sent from the DC controller PCB. Rotation of the main motor drives the pickup drive power transfer gear. The DC controller
PCB issues a manual feed pickup solenoid drive signal (MFPD). When the solenoid turns on, the stopper operates to rotate the pickup roller once. Next, the stopper
operates again to stop rotation of the pickup roller.
7.4.2 Post-pickup Control after Multi Manual Feed Pickup

0011-0753
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Paper pickup operation ends when paper is pressed against the registration roller. After this, the registration roller starts rotating and the multi manual feed pickup
clutch turns on. This clutch turns off after feeding the paper by the distance equivalent to the paper size - 126.7 mm (*1) -5 mm (*2).
*1 Distance that paper is fed from the multi pickup roller to the point where the registration sensor turns on.
*2 Paper is post-fed to the point which is 5 mm to the training edge.
When the paper size is not specified, paper is post-fed by the distance equivalent to the multi paper feed enabled size (148 mm in longitudinal direction).
Minimum post-feed distance: 148 mm - 126.7 mm -5 mm = 16.3 mm
7-9
Chapter 7
3) Disconnect the three connectors [3], and then remove the cassette pickup
assembly [4].
7.5.1 Pickup Roller

[3]
7.5.1.1 Removing the Cassette Paper Pickup Roller [2]
0011-0655
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1]
1) Remove the cassette.
2) Open the lower-left cover.
3) With the pickup roller [1] down, insert a screwdriver [2] or the like from
the left side of the host machine as shown below.
4) Remove the pickup roller [3] with your fingers as shown below.
[3]
[1] [4]
[1] [2] F-7-19
F-7-16
Install the cassette pickup assembly with the ground plate [1] outside the
side plate.
[3]
[1]
F-7-17 F-7-20
7.5.2 Cassette Pickup Assembly 7.5.3 Cassette Size Sensor

7.5.2.1 Removing the Lower-left Cover 7.5.3.1 Removing the Paper Size Detection Switches
0011-0652
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-0660
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Detach the lower-left cover [2] by opening the rear support [1] with a 1) Remove the screw [1], and then remove the paper size switches [2].
slightly strong force applied in the direction of the arrow.
[2] [1]
F-7-21
7.5.4 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor
7.5.4.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly

0011-2937
[2] [1] iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-7-18
1) Detach the cassette rear cover. (2 screws)
7.5.2.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup AssemblyÇµ 2) Remove the five screws [1] and one screw with toothed washer [2].
0011-0654
3) Disconnect the three connectors [3], and then remove the cassette pickup
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i assembly [4].
1) Detach the cassette rear cover. (2 screws)

2) Remove the five screws [1] and one screw with toothed washer [2].
7-10
Chapter 7
[3] [3]
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
[3] [3]
[1] [4] [1] [4]

F-7-22 F-7-25
Install the cassette pickup assembly with the ground plate [1] outside the Install the cassette pickup assembly with the ground plate [1] outside the
side plate. side plate.
[1] [1]
F-7-23 F-7-26
7.5.4.2 Removing the Retry Sensor 7.5.5.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Presence/Absence
Sensor
0011-0664
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-0661
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the retry sensor [2].
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the cassette paper pres-
[1] [2] ence/absence sensor [2].
[1] [2]
F-7-24
7.5.5 Cassette Paper Sensor F-7-27
7.5.5.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly 7.5.6 Cassette Pickup Solenoid
0011-2938
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i 7.5.6.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly
0011-2939
1) Detach the cassette rear cover. (2 screws) iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
2) Remove the five screws [1] and one screw with toothed washer [2].
3) Disconnect the three connectors [3], and then remove the cassette pickup 1) Detach the cassette rear cover. (2 screws)
assembly [4]. 2) Remove the five screws [1] and one screw with toothed washer [2].
7-11
Chapter 7
3) Disconnect the three connectors [3], and then remove the cassette pickup 3) Draw out the drum unit [4].
assembly [4].
[4]
[3]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-31
To prevent exposure to light, cover the drum with several sheets of copy
[3]
Open the left door fully to prevent the damage to the drum unit
[1] [4]
F-7-28
7.5.7.2 Removing the Transfer Registration Unit
0011-0673
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Install the cassette pickup assembly with the ground plate [1] outside the
side plate. 1) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the transfer registration unit
[2].
[1]
[1]
F-7-29 [2] [1]

F-7-32
7.5.6.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid
7.5.7.3 Removing the Feed Guide
0011-0659
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-0674
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Remove the harness [1] from the two wire saddles [2].
2) Remove the screw [3], and then remove the cassette pickup solenoid [4]. 1) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the feed guide [2].
[2]
[1] [2] [3] [4]

F-7-30
[1]
7.5.7 Manual Feed Tray sensor F-7-33
7.5.7.1 Removing the Drum Unit 7.5.7.4 Removing the Multifeeder Paper Presence/
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
0011-0672
Absence Sensor
0011-0675
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Turn the developer pressure release lever [2] clockwise, and then open the 1) Remove the two claws [1]. Remove the connector [2], and then remove
left door [3]. the multifeeder paper presence/absence sensor [3].
7-12
Chapter 7
[3] [2] [2]
[1]
F-7-34
[1]
7.5.8 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid
F-7-37
7.5.8.1 Removing the Drum Unit 7.5.8.4 Removing the Multifeeder Connector Cover
0011-2965
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i 0011-1051
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Turn the developer pressure release lever [2] clockwise, and then open the 1) Detach the multifeeder connector cover [1], and then disconnect the three
connectors [2].
left door [3].
[4] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-35
[1]
Open the left door fully to prevent the damage to the drum unit F-7-38
7.5.8.5 Removing the Multifeeder Unit

0011-1050
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-2966
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the multifeeder unit [2].
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the transfer registration unit
[2]. [2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-39
[2] [1] 7.5.8.6 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Solenoid

0011-1052
F-7-36 iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
7.5.8.3 Removing the Feed Guide 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the harness from the guide.
0011-2967
2) Remove the screw [2], and then remove the multifeeder pickup solenoid
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i [3].
1) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the feed guide [2].
7-13
Chapter 7
[1] [2] [3]
[3] [2] [1]

F-7-40
7.5.9 Registration Roller

0011-2969
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Turn the developer pressure release lever [2] clockwise, and then open the [3] [1] [2]
left door [3]. F-7-42
7.5.10 Registration Clutch
[4]
0011-0665
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[3] 1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-7-41
[1]
paper and place it in a safe place. F-7-43
7.5.10.2 Removing the Registration Clutch

0011-0666
Open the left door fully to prevent the damage to the drum unit iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the harness from the three
wire saddles [2].
7.5.9.2 Removing the Registration Roller 2) Remove the resin ring [3], and then remove the registration clutch [4].
0011-0677
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1] [4]
1) Remove the two screws [1], remove the two metal plates [2], and remove
the registration roller [3].
[2] [3]
F-7-44
7-14
Chapter 7
7.5.11 Separation Roller

[1]
7.5.11.1 Removing the Feed and Separation Rollers
0011-0656
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the cassette.

2) Open the lower-left cover.
3) Lower the separation roller [1] as shown below, and then remove the sep-
aration roller [1] and feed roller [3] by holding the claws [2] of the roller col-
lars.
[3]
[2] [1]
F-7-47
7.5.12.3 Removing the Feed Guide

0011-2973
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the feed guide [2].
[2]
[1] [2]
F-7-45
7.5.12 Separation Pad

0011-3156
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Turn the developer pressure release lever [2] clockwise, and then open the
left door [3].
[4]
[1]
F-7-48
[3] 7.5.12.4 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Roller

0011-0670
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Remove the bearing [1], and then remove the multi-paper roller [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-7-46
[1]
Open the left door fully to prevent the damage to the drum unit
F-7-49
0011-2972
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i When installing the multifeeder pickup roller, pay attention to the orien-
tation.
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the transfer registration unit Left-side axis: [1] Long Right-side axis: Short [2]
[2].
7-15
Chapter 7
[1] [2]
F-7-50
7.5.12.5 Removing the Separation Pad

0011-0671
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) I use a minus screwdriver and remove separation pad [1].
[1]
F-7-51
7-16
Chapter 8 Fixing System
Contents
Contents
8.1 Construction ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Major Components ...................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms............................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film.................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed ....................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature ................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature ............................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.2.3 Target Temperatures by Mode ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper ................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Protective Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1 Protective Functions .................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.4.1 Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 8-7
8.4.1.1 Removing the Drum Unit ..................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4.1.2 Removing the rear cover ...................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4.1.4 Removing the Left Door....................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4.1.5 Removing the Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.4.2 Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.4.2.2 Removing the rear cover ...................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.4.2.5 Removing the Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.4.2.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ......................................................................................................... 8-10
8.4.2.7 Removing the Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................ 8-12
8.4.3 Fixing Film ................................................................................................................................................ 8-13
8.4.3.2 Removing the rear cover .................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.3.4 Removing the Left Door..................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.3.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit ......................................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Sensor.............................................................................................................................. 8-17
8.4.4.4 Removing the Left Door..................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.4.4.6 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor ............................................................................................... 8-18
8.4.5 Fixing Film Sensor .................................................................................................................................... 8-19
Contents

8.4.5.4 Removing the Left Door ..................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.4.5.6 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor ...................................................................................................... 8-21
Chapter 8
8.1 Construction
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions

0011-1113
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-8-1
Item Function/Method
Fixing method by fixing film + pressure roller
Fixing heater Unitary flat heater incorporating both main heater and sub heater
Fixing temperature detection [1] Main thermistor (TH1): Temperature control and fault detection
[2] Sub thermistor (TH2): Fault detection
[3] Thermo-switch (TP1): Fault detection
Fixing temperature control [1] Warm-up temperature control
[2] Normal temperature control
[3] Sheet-to-sheet temperature control
Protection functions [1] Detection of error in temperature control by thermistor
[2] Detection of temperature rise by thermo-switch
Fixing drive control Speed control by detecting fixing film rotation
8-1
Chapter 8
8.1.2 Major Components

0011-1106
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
M201 [1]
SR202
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-8-1
[1] Inner delivery roller [4] Pressure roller

[2] Fixing film speed sensor SR202 Fixing delivery sensor
[3] Fixing film unit M201 Fixing drive motor
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
F-8-2
[1] Fixing film speed sensor [4] Thermo-switch (TP1)

[2] Sub thermistor (TH2) [5] Pressure roller
[3] Main thermistor (TH1) [6] Fixing film unit
8-2
Chapter 8
8.2 Various Control Mechanisms
8.2.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film
8.2.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed

0011-2069
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The rotation cycle is measured with reference to the mark provided at the end of the fixing film to rotate the fixing drive motor at the optimum speed, thus keeping
the paper feed speed constant. Measurement of the cycle of each rotation (excluding the initial rotation and post-rotation) of the fixing drive motor starts when 1
second lapses after the motor starts rotating and ends when the trailing edge of the last sheet has passed through the fixing nipper.
[1] FILM_SENS
[2]
J217
DC Controller PCB
F-8-3
[1] Film rotation detection signal (FILM_SENS): Set to 1 and 0 alternately when the fixing film is rotating.
[2] Rotation cycle measurement mark
8.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature
8.2.2.1 Outline
0011-2070
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The surface temperature of the fixing heater is detected to control the fixing heater drive signal so that the fixing heater temperature becomes the target temperature.
The temperature of the fixing heater is detected by the thermistor (TH1/TH2) provided on the fixing heater. If the surface temperature rises, the resistance of the
thermistor lowers and the voltage of the fixing heater temperature detection signal (M_TH/S_TH) also lowers.
The CPU on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the M_TH/S_TH signal to control the fixing heater 1 drive signal (H1DRV) and fixing heater 2 drive signal
(H2DRV). These two voltages are generated based on the zero crossing detection signal which is output from the heater control circuit. The CPU controls these two
signals to adjust the fixing heater temperature to the prescribed value.
8.2.2.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature

0011-2071
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

This machine performs fixing temperature control according to the fixing heater temperature as mentioned below.
1) Warm-up temperature control
Upon receipt of a print command from the DC controller, the fixing heater heats to the temperature below the target paper-present section temperature.
2) Paper-present section temperature control
The fixing heater temperature is adjusted to the target paper-present section temperature according to the combination of the paper size, number of sheets fed,
fixing mode, and temperature detected by the fixing main thermistor.
3) Sheet-to-sheet temperature control
The fixing heater temperature is held relatively below the target paper-present section temperature to prevent the paper-absent section temperature from rising
between sheets.
4) Down sequence
The temperature may detect an abnormally high temperature during continuous printing. If the sub-thermistor detects a temperature equal to or higher than 275
deg C, the sheet-to-sheet distance is increased to prevent the paper-absent section temperature from rising. If the sub-thermistor detects a temperature equal to
or lower than 220 deg C in the down sequence, normal control resumes.
5) Cooling mode
If printing is performed using wider sheets (*1) after printing is performed using narrower sheets in the continuous print mode, fixing offset may occur due to
the difference in temperature between the edge and center. If the sub-thermistor detects a temperature equal to or higher than 130 deg C, paper feed and printing
stop to prevent the temperature from rising at the edge. If the sub-thermistor detects a temperature equal to or lower than 130 deg C or two or more minutes lapse,
normal control resumes.
*1: The large size is a paper of which the width is 10 mm larger than the previous job.
8-3
Chapter 8
8.2.2.3 Target Temperatures by Mode

0011-2072
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
This machine controls the fixing temperature according to the "media type" selected in the user mode and the "target temperature" set in the "special mode."
The correspondence between each mode and target temperature is as follows:
T-8-2
Fixing mode Paper type Target initial fixing Initial number of Condition
temperature (*1) sheets (*2)
Normal Plain paper (colored paper/recycled paper/ 190 deg C 1-9 (A4/LTR) Special Mode P: OFF
label sheet (64-80 g/m2) 185 deg C 1-9 (A4/LTR) Special Mode P: ON
Rough Paper Lo Heavy paper 1 195 deg C 1-9 (A4/LTR)
(81-90 g/m2)
Heavy paper 2
(91-105g/m2)
Rough Paper Heavy paper 3 220 deg C 1-9 (A4/LTR)
(106-128g/m2)
Super rough paper Bond paper 220 deg C 1-100 (A4/LTR) Bond SP. FIX. Mode: OFF
Super rough paper Hi Bond paper 220 deg C 1-100 (A4/LTR) Bond SP. FIX. Mode: ON
Postcard Postcard 220 deg C 1-2 Fix. Unit Offset: OFF
Postcard H Postcard 220 deg C 1 Fix. Unit Offset: 1 or 2
Envelope Envelope 220 deg C 1-2
OHP OHP 190 deg C 1-9 (A4/LTR)
*1: Target fixing temperature at startup. When the initial temperature of the fixing unit is high, the target temperature is lowered. In the continuous copy mode, the
target temperature is lowered in 5 deg C steps.
*2: Number of sheets controlled at the initial target temperature. If it is exceeded, the target temperature is lowered. The prescribed number of sheets varies with
the paper size.
8.2.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper
8.2.3.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper

0011-1112
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

The paper passage detection mechanism of the fixing unit is shown below.
DC Controller PCB
J217-12
EXP_P_SNS
SR502
F-8-4
If a delay jam is detected by the fixing delivery sensor (SR202), the fixing motor is stopped immediately to prevent paper from winding around the fixing roller.
8-4
Chapter 8
8.3 Protective Functions
8.3.1 Protective Functions

0011-2087
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
AC
DC Power supply PCB DC Controller PCB
F1 F2
NF NF
P1
SW1
Low voltage power
+3.3V, +5.1V, +24V,+24VR
supply circuit
J11 J215 CPU
Zero crossing -15 ZEROX -3
circuit
Heater drive circuit J11 J215
-16 RLDRV -2
Relay -13 H1DRV -5 ASIC
circuit -12 H2DRV -6
RL1 J217
GND -6 High temp.
detection circuit
GND -5
Heater trigger
S_TH -4
circuit
High temp.
detection circuit
J13
-1
-2
-3
GND -3
M_TH -2
THCNCT -1 Connecting
Fixing unit detection
circuit
TH2 TH1
J31 TP1
-1
H2
-2
H1
F-8-5
Protection Functions
This machine is provided with the following four protection functions to prevent the fixing heater from overheating:
1) The CPU monitors the thermistor (TH1) voltage. If the thermistor (TH1) voltage is abnormal, the CPU judges that the fixing heater is faulty and turns off the
relay (RL1). At the same time, the CPU notifies the DC controller of occurrence of the fixing heater failure.
2) If the temperature of the fixing heater rises abnormally and the thermistor (TH1) detects a voltage lower than about 0.7 V (equivalent of 240 deg C), the fixing
heater high temperature detection circuit cuts off the power supplied to the fixing heater.
3) If the temperature of the fixing heater rises abnormally and the thermo switch (TP1) detects a temperature higher than 244 deg C, the thermo switch turns off to
cuts off the power supplied to the fixing heater.
Failure Detection
The CPU performs error detection at intervals of 40 msec. If any one of the cases a to d occurs, the CPU stops the machine completely. To restart the machine,
remove the cause of the failure and carry out initial rotation. If a failure is detected, an error code "EXXX-YYYY" (XXX stands for an error code and YYYY stands
for a detail code) is displayed on the operation panel.
a. Failure at startup
1) The main thermistor has detected temperatures lower than 30 deg C continuously for 400 or more msec since 1 second lapsed after energization of the fixing
heater.
2) The main thermistor has detected temperatures lower than 70 deg C continuously for 400 or more msec since 2 seconds lapsed after energization of the fixing
heater.
3) The sub-thermistor has detected temperatures lower than 75 deg C continuously for 400 or more msec since 5 seconds lapsed after energization of the fixing
heater.
4) The temperature rise detected by the main thermistor is less than 5 deg C when energization of the fixing heater starts, when the temperature detected by the main
thermistor is less than 100 deg C, or when 1 sec has lapsed since start of energization.
5) The main thermistor has detected temperatures less than 115 deg C continuously for 400 or more msec since 1 second has lapsed after detection of 100 deg C.
8) The target printing temperature is not reached when 30 seconds have lapsed since start of the initial rotation.
b. Low temperature detection during temperature control
During temperature control, the main or sub thermistor has detected low temperatures continuously for 400 or more msec after the target temperature was reached.
c. Abnormally high temperature detection
1) The main thermistor has detected 240 C deg irrespective of whether the fixing heater is of or off.
2) The sub thermistor has detected 295 deg C irrespective of whether the fixing heater is of or off.
3) An abnormally high temperature has been detected in the ASIC irrespective of whether the fixing heater is of or off.
d. Drive circuit failure
1) The zero crossing signal frequency of the power supply has not been detected during initial rotation.
2) During temperature control, no zero crossing signal has been input for 3 seconds.
3) A triac short circuit has been detected in the ASIC.
Fixing System Error Codes

E000-0000 STARTUP ERROR
The temperature detected by the main and sub thermistors did not reach the prescribed temperature during startup control.
E001-0000 ABNORMALLY HIGH TEMPERATURE (detected by main thermistor)
The main thermistor detected an abnormally high temperature (250 deg C) during temperature control.
E001-0001 ABNORMALLY HIGH TEMPERATURE (detected by sub thermistor)
8-5
Chapter 8
The sub thermistor detected an abnormally high temperature (295 deg C) during temperature control.
E002-0000 LOW TEMPERATURE DETECTED DURING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The main and sub thermistors detected an abnormally low temperature (140 deg C) during temperature control.
E003-0000 ABNORMALLY LOW TEMPERATURE (detected by main thermistor)
The temperature detected by the main thermistor does not reach the target temperature during initial rotation after it has reached the target temperature.
E003-0001 ABNORMALLY LOW TEMPERATURE (detected by sub thermistor)
The temperature detected by the sub thermistor does not reach the target temperature during initial rotation after it has reached the target temperature.
E007-0000 ABNORMALLY LOW TEMPERATURE (detected by sub thermistor)
A fixing film sensor failure has been detected.
E808-0000 DRIVE CIRCUIT FAILURE
A zero crossing signal cannot be detected.
A fixing drive motor failure has been detected.
8-6
Chapter 8

[2]
8.4.1 Fixing Unit

0010-9892
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1]
door [3].
[4]
F-8-8
[3]
8.4.1.4 Removing the Left Door
0010-9909
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the screw [1] securing the door support band. Remove the
connector [2] and reusable band [3], and release the duplex unit harness
from the wire saddle [4].
[2]
[1]
F-8-6
[1]
8.4.1.2 Removing the rear cover
0010-9894
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i [2]

[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
F-8-9
2) Open the left door until it sops and pull out the hinge shaft [1].
[1]
MEMO:
F-8-7 When a duplex unit (option) is installed, remove it before pulling out the
hinge shaft for each access.
0010-9895
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

8-7
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-12
[1] 2) Remove the screw [1], and then detach the heater harness cover [2].
Disconnect the connector [3].
[2]
[3]
F-8-10
3) Lift the left door with both hands to release it from the door rotation shaft
[1], and then remove the left door.
[1]
F-8-13
3) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and then release the fixing unit harness
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-11
F-8-14
8.4.1.5 Removing the Fixing Unit 4) Raise the delivery upper guide [1]. Remove the three screws [2], and then
0010-9911
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i remove the fixing unit [3].
1) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the inner cover [2] at the [1]
upper front.
[2] [3] [2]

F-8-15
8-8
Chapter 8
8.4.2 Pressure Roller

8.4.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit connector [2] and reusable band [3], and release the duplex unit harness
0010-9936
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

door [3].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-8-16
vent the damage to the drum unit. [3] [4]
8.4.2.2 Removing the rear cover MEMO:

0010-9937 When a duplex unit (option) is installed, remove it before pulling out the
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i hinge shaft for each access.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-17

0010-9938
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i [1]

[2]
F-8-20
[1]
F-8-18

0010-9939
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
8-9
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-24
4) Raise the delivery upper guide [1]. Remove the three screws [2], and then
remove the fixing unit [3].
[1]
F-8-21
8.4.2.5 Removing the Fixing Unit

0010-9940
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the inner cover [2] at the
upper front.
[2] [3] [2]

F-8-25
[1]
8.4.2.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit
0010-9941
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[2]
1) Release the hooks [1], and then remove the spur unit [2] by sliding it.
[1]
[1]
F-8-22
2) Remove the screw [1], and then detach the heater harness cover [2].
[2]
[2]
[3]
F-8-26
2) Remove the resin ring [1], and then remove the fixing pressure release
lever [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-23
F-8-27
8-10
Chapter 8
When installing the fixing pressure release lever, check that the rib [1] of the [3]
lever is inside the pressure block [2].
[1]
[2]
[5] [4]
F-8-32
[2] [1]
F-8-28
When installing the electrode plate [1], place it under the three claws [2] as
3) Release the fixing unit harness [2] from the wire saddle [1]. shown below.
[2] [1]
[2]
F-8-29
4) Remove the screw [1], and then remove the fixing paper guide [2].
[1]
F-8-33
7) Remove the ground cable [1] from the holder, and then free the fixing unit
AC harness.
[1]
[1] [2]
F-8-30
5) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the right side stay [1] and
left side stay [2].
[3]
[2]
F-8-34
8) Remove the two pressure springs [1], remove the pressure plate by turning
it in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[1]
F-8-31
6) Disconnect the connector [1], and then disconnect the sensor harness [2].
Remove the screw [3], release the hook [4], and then remove the sensor
holder [5].
[2]
F-8-35
- When installing the pressure plate, check that the inner springs [1] are fit in
place as shown below.
- When reinstalling the pressure plate, check that the spacer (F) [2] and
8-11
Chapter 8
spacer (R) [3] are pressed against the rib [4] of the flange cap.
[1]
[1]
F-8-36
[2] F-8-39
[3]
10) Remove the delivery roller unit [1], and then remove the fixing film unit
[2].
[1]
[4]
F-8-37
9) Release the claw [1] of the pressure cam, remove the pressure cam [2]
from the pressure shaft, and then pull out the pressure shaft [3] in the
direction of the arrow.
[2] [1] [2]
F-8-40
11) Remove the spacer (F) [1] and spacer (R) [2] by sliding them.
[1] [2]
[3]
F-8-41
8.4.2.7 Removing the Pressure Roller

0010-9942
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Raise the claw [1] of the fixing unit inlet guide, and remove the slide the
fixing unit inlet guide [2] by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
F-8-38 [2]
When installing the pressure cam, position it inside the bent portion [1] of
the side plate as shown below.
[1]
F-8-42
2) Remove the E-ring [1] and gear [2], and then remove the pressure roller
[3].
8-12
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-8-46
F-8-43
0010-9925
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

When installing the pressure roller, bring the ground plate [4] into contact
with the roller shaft [5]. 1) Remove the three screws [1], and then detach the left cover (rear).
[2]
[1]
[4] [5]
F-8-44
8.4.3 Fixing Film

F-8-47
0010-9923 8.4.3.4 Removing the Left Door
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i 0010-9926
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Turn the developing assembly locking lever [2] clockwise to open the left 1) Remove the screw [1] securing the door support band. Remove the
door [3]. connector [2] and reusable band [3], and release the duplex unit harness
3) Draw out the drum unit [4]. from the wire saddle [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-8-45
8.4.3.2 Removing the rear cover

0010-9924
[3] [4]
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
F-8-48
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2]. 2) Open the left door until it sops and pull out the hinge shaft [1].
MEMO:
When a duplex unit (option) is installed, remove it before pulling out the
8-13
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-51
[2]
[3]
F-8-49
[1]
F-8-52
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-50
F-8-53
0010-9927
upper front.
[2] [3] [2]

F-8-54
8-14
Chapter 8
8.4.3.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit

0010-9928
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Release the hooks [1], and then remove the spur unit [2] by sliding it.
[1]
[1] [2]
F-8-59
5) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the right side stay [1] and
left side stay [2].
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-8-55
lever [2].
[2] [1]
F-8-60
6) Disconnect the connector [1], and then disconnect the sensor harness [2].
[1] Remove the screw [3], release the hook [4], and then remove the sensor
holder [5].
[3]
F-8-56
[1]
When installing the fixing pressure release lever, check that the rib [1] of the
[2]
[5] [4]
F-8-61
When installing the electrode plate [1], place it under the three claws [2] as
shown below.
[2]
[2] [1]
F-8-57
3) Release the fixing unit harness [2] from the wire saddle [1].
[2] [1]
[1]
F-8-62
7) Remove the ground cable [1] from the holder, and then free the fixing unit
AC harness.
F-8-58
8-15
Chapter 8
[1] [2] [1]
[3]
F-8-63
8) Remove the two pressure springs [1], remove the pressure plate by turning
it in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
F-8-67
When installing the pressure cam, position it inside the bent portion [1] of
the side plate as shown below.
[2] [1]
F-8-64
- When installing the pressure plate, check that the inner springs [1] are fit in
place as shown below.
- When reinstalling the pressure plate, check that the spacer (F) [2] and
spacer (R) [3] are pressed against the rib [4] of the flange cap.
F-8-68
10) Remove the delivery roller unit [1], and then remove the fixing film unit
[1] [2].
[1]
F-8-65
[2] [3]
[2]
[4]
F-8-69
F-8-66
11) Remove the spacer (F) [1] and spacer (R) [2] by sliding them.
9) Release the claw [1] of the pressure cam, remove the pressure cam [2]
from the pressure shaft, and then pull out the pressure shaft [3] in the
direction of the arrow. [1] [2]
F-8-70
8-16
Chapter 8
8.4.4 Fixing Delivery Sensor

8.4.4.1 Removing the Drum Unit connector [2] and reusable band [3], and release the duplex unit harness
0010-9950
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

door [3].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-8-71
vent the damage to the drum unit. [3] [4]
8.4.4.2 Removing the Rear Cover MEMO:

0010-9951 When a duplex unit (option) is installed, remove it before pulling out the
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i hinge shaft for each access.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-72

0010-9952
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i [1]

[2]
F-8-75
[1]
F-8-73

0010-9954
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
8-17
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-79
[1]
F-8-76

0010-9955
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

upper front.
[2] [3] [2]

F-8-80
[1]
8.4.4.6 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor
0010-9960
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[2]
lever [2].
[1]
[2]
F-8-77
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-81
[1] When installing the fixing pressure release lever, check that the rib [1] of the
F-8-78
8-18
Chapter 8
[1]
[2] [1] [2] [1]

F-8-82
2) Remove the fixing unit harness [2] from the wire saddle [1] and harness F-8-87
guide.
[2] [1]
When installing the sensor holder, place the electrode plate [1] under the
three claws.
[2]
F-8-83
[1]
F-8-88
8.4.5 Fixing Film Sensor
[1] [2]
0010-9913
F-8-84 iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

4) Remove the screw [1], and then remove the right side stay [2]. 1) Open the front cover [1].
[2] door [3].
[4]
[1] [3]
F-8-85
5) Remove the connector [1], and then remove the sensor harness [2].
Remove the screw [3], release the hook [4], and then remove the sensor
holder [5].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-8-89
[1] vent the damage to the drum unit.
[2]
[5] [4] 0010-9918
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-8-86
6) Release the four sensor claws [1], and then remove the fixing delivery 1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2].
sensor [2].
8-19
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-90

0010-9919
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1]
[2]
F-8-93
[1] [1], and then remove the left door.
F-8-91

0010-9920
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1]
F-8-94
[1]
0010-9921
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[2]
upper front.
[3] [4]
F-8-92
MEMO:
8-20
Chapter 8
8.4.5.6 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor

0010-9922
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Disconnect the connector [1], release the two hooks [2], and then remove
the film sensor [3].
[1]
[1] [2]
[2]
[1]
F-8-95
[2] [3]
F-8-99
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-96
[1]
[2]
F-8-97
[1]
[2] [3] [2]

F-8-98
8-21
Chapter 9 External and Controls
Contents
Contents
9.1 Control Panel...................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Fans .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.2 Fan Control.................................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.3 Power Supply System......................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.1 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.1.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.1.2 Rated Output of the Power Supply PCB .............................................................................................. 9-2
9.4.1 Main Drive Assembly ................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.4.1.4 Removing the Main Motor ................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.4.1.5 Removing the Registration Clutch ....................................................................................................... 9-3
9.4.1.6 Removing the Main Drive Unit............................................................................................................ 9-4
9.4.2 Fixing Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.2.5 Removing the Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.4.2.8 Removing the LAN Cover.................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.2.9 Removing the IP Cover ........................................................................................................................ 9-7
9.4.2.10 Removing the IP Cover ...................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.4.2.11 Removing the Image Processor PCB Mount...................................................................................... 9-8
9.4.2.12 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit........................................................................................................ 9-9
9.4.3 Power Supply Unit .................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.4.3.4 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................ 9-10
9.4.4 Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover..................................................................................................... 9-10
9.4.4.2 Removing the Operation Panel Unit................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.5 DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ..................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.6 Option Power Supply PCB........................................................................................................................ 9-11
Contents

9.4.6.4 Removing the Option Power Supply PCB.......................................................................................... 9-12
9.4.7 HVT PCB................................................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.4.7.4 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................ 9-12
9.4.7.5 Removing the HVT PCB .................................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.8 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ........................................................................................................................ 9-13
9.4.8.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan.......................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.9 Fan Filter.................................................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.4.9.1 Removing the Fan Filter ..................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.4.10 Motor of Main Drive Assembly .............................................................................................................. 9-14
9.4.10.2 Removing the Main Motor ............................................................................................................... 9-14
9.4.11 Fixing Driver Motor ................................................................................................................................ 9-15
9.4.11.2 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ...................................................................................................... 9-15
9.4.11.3 Removing the RAM Cover ............................................................................................................... 9-15
9.4.11.4 Removing the SDRAM..................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.4.11.5 Removing the LAN Cover................................................................................................................ 9-15
9.4.11.6 Removing the IP Cover..................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.4.11.7 Removing the IP Cover..................................................................................................................... 9-16
9.4.11.8 Removing the Image Processor PCB Mount .................................................................................... 9-17
9.4.11.9 Removing the Fixing Unit Drive Motor ........................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.12 Left Door ................................................................................................................................................. 9-18
9.4.12.1 Removing the Drum Unit ................................................................................................................. 9-18
9.4.12.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) ...................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.12.4 Removing the Left Door ................................................................................................................... 9-18
Chapter 9
9.1 Control Panel
9.1.1 Overview
0011-3750
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 /
The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs, and is controlled by the ASIC of the image processor PCB.
The indication on the LCD is in 2 lines (120 x 24 dots).
Image Processor Cntrol Panel PCB Control Panel PCB

PCB for FAX (Option)
CPU
Key SW
ASIC Key SW
LED
LED
LCD
F-9-1
9.2 Fans
9.2.1 Overview
0011-2095
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
This machine is provided with a fan to cool the fixing unit.
FM1
F-9-2
9.2.2 Fan Control

0011-2096
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

The fan motor control circuit is shown below.
DC Controller PCB
+24V
CPU J219 FM1

FAN FULL
Fan drive FANDRV
voltage 3
FAN HALF GND
switching circuit 2
FAN_LOCK
1
F-9-3
Switching between full-speed rotation and half-speed rotation is controlled as described below.
1) Full-speed control
When the CPU on the DC controller outputs a fan full speed signal (FAN_FULL), the fan drive voltage switching circuit supplies a +24 V fan drive voltage to turn
the heat exhaust fan at the full speed.
2) Half-speed control
9-1
Chapter 9
When the CPU on the engine controller outputs a fan half speed signal (FAN_HALF), the fan drive voltage switching circuit supplies a +16 V fan drive voltage to
turn the heat exhaust fan at the half speed.
Fan Control Sequence
Power switch ON/ Power switch OFF/

Going out of sleep mode Copy start key ON Going into sleep mode
INTR STBY WMUPR PRINT PRINT LSTR STBY
Heat Discharge Fan 30sec

(FM1)
Registration sensor
(SR209)
Fixing Drive Motor
(M201)
: Full speed (+24V) : Half speed (+16V)
F-9-4
E805-0000 (Main body fan error)

When the cooling fan of the main body starts, the fan lock detection signal (FAN_LOCK) has been held at the "H" level for longer than the prescribed time.
9.3 Power Supply System
9.3.1 Power Supply
9.3.1.1 Outline
0011-2193
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
When the main power switch (SW1) is turned on, AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit in the power supply PCB.
The low-voltage power supply circuit supplies +3.3 V, +5 V, and +24 V to operate the machine.
+24 V is supplied to the motors, fan, electromagnetic clutch, solenoid, etc. +5 V and +3.3 V are supplied to the sensor, etc.
There are two types of +24 V voltages: +24 V which is normaly supplied from the low voltage power supply and +24 VR which is cut off when the front cover or
the left door is opened. The +24 VR also plays the role of a door open detection signal (DOPEN). This signal allows the CPU to detect that the front cover or the
left door has opened.
T-9-1
Part Name Function

Power supply PCB Generates DC power from AC power.
Option power supply PCB (option) Generates DC power from AC power for the options.
Main power switch (SW1) Supplies AC power to the power supply PCB.
Front cover switch (SW2) Detects opening/closing of the front cover and cuts off +24 VR.
Left door switch (SW3) Detects opening/closing of the left door and cuts off +24 VR.
: AC
: DC
Power supply PCB
SW1 F1 F2 Option
NF NF Option +24Vop - Finisher
P1
power supply - Inner 2-way tray
PCB - Duplex unit
- Cassette feeding
+24V module
+5VR
Low-voltage +3.3VR
power supply Reader Motor
RL1 Sensor
circuit controller
PCB DADF (option)
+5V
Heater drive +3.3V Control panel
circuit Image
FAX board (option)
Processor
PCB
+24VR
+24V
+24VR
+24V
+5VR
+3.3VR Laser unit
SW2 DC
controller Motor
PCB Clutch
SW3 Solenoid
+24VR Fan
+5VR Sensor
+3.3VR
TP1 HVT
PCB
H1
H2
F-9-5
9.3.1.2 Rated Output of the Power Supply PCB

0011-2195
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
9-2
Chapter 9
T-9-2
Output 24V 5V 5VR 3.3V 3.3VR

Rated output voltage 24V 5.1V 5.1V 3.4V 3.4V
Output voltage tolerance +10%ÅA-5% +3%ÅA-4% +3%ÅA-4% +3%ÅA-3% +3%ÅA-3%
Rated output current 5.5A 1.0A 2.0A 2.5A 1.0A
Overcurrent protection trigger current 8.0A 2.5A 4.0A 5.0A 2.0A
Overvoltage protection trigger voltage 32.5V 8.0V 8.0V 5.5V 5.5V
9.4.1 Main Drive Assembly [2]

0011-0050
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

2) Turn the developing assembly locking lever [2] clockwise to open the left [1]
door [3].
[4]
[3]
F-9-8
9.4.1.4 Removing the Main Motor

0011-0053
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Disconnect the connector [1], remove three screws [2], and then remove
the main motor [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
[1]
F-9-6

0011-0051
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[2]
F-9-9
[1] 9.4.1.5 Removing the Registration Clutch

0011-1524
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[2] 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and then remove the harness from the three
wire saddles [2].
2) Remove the resin ring [3], and then remove the registration clutch [4].
[1] [4]
[1]
F-9-7

0011-0052
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[2] [3]
F-9-10
9-3
Chapter 9
9.4.1.6 Removing the Main Drive Unit

iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
0011-0055
[2]
1) Open the left door fully.

2) Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear unit [2] and gear [3].
[2] [3] [1]
[1] [1]
F-9-14
6) Release the gear stopper [1] from the shaft, and then remove the gear [2].
F-9-11
3) Pull out the handle [1] at the back of the machine, remove the screw [2],
and then remove the stopper [3].
[2]
[2]
[1] [3]
F-9-12
4) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and then remove the harness [2] from
the wire saddle [3].
[2]
[1]
F-9-15
7) Remove the six screws [1], and then remove the main drive unit [2].
[1] [2] [1]
[3] [1] [1]

F-9-13
5) Remove the three screws [1], and then remove the handle unit [2].
[1]
F-9-16
Since the gears in the main drive unit are not secured, gears will fall if the
main drive unit is inclined. If gears should fall, install them at the positions
shown below.
9-4
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
F-9-17
9.4.2 Fixing Drive Assembly F-9-20
9.4.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit 9.4.2.4 Removing the Left Door
0011-0607
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-0611
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Open the front cover [1]. 1) Remove the screw [1] securing the door support band. Remove the
2) Turn the developing assembly locking lever [2] clockwise to open the left connector [2] and reusable band [3], and release the duplex unit harness
door [3]. from the wire saddle [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-9-18
9.4.2.2 Removing the Rear Cover [3] [4]

0011-0608
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i F-9-21

MEMO:
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-19

0011-0610
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
9-5
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-24
[2]
[3]
F-9-22
[1]
F-9-25
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-9-23
F-9-26
0011-0613
upper front.
[2] [3] [2]

F-9-27
9-6
Chapter 9

0011-0614
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the RAM cover [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
F-9-31
[2]
F-9-28 [2] [1]
0011-0615
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-0617
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the LAN cover [2].
[1]
F-9-32
4) Open a core [1].
[1] [2]
F-9-29 [1]
0011-0618
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-9-33
[1] [2] [2]
[1]
F-9-34
F-9-30 6) Remove the 10 screws [1], and then detach the IP cover [2].
9-7
Chapter 9
[1]
[1] [1]
F-9-38
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-9-35 [1]
0011-0619
iR2016J /
F-9-39
[1]
[2] [1]
F-9-36 [1]
[2] [1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-40
9.4.2.11 Removing the Image Processor PCB Mount

0011-0630
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Disconnect the two reader flexible cables [1]. Release the harness [2] from
the wire saddles [3]. Remove the two screws [4], and then detach the
flexible cable cover [5].
F-9-37
3) Open a core [1].
9-8
Chapter 9
[3] [1] [2] [1]
[2]
[5]
[1]
F-9-43
9.4.2.12 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit

0011-0631
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Release the claw [1] on the gear cover, and then remove the gear cover [2]
by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
[4]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-9-41
2) Turn over the reader flexible cable cover [1], and then secure to the back
of the reader temporarily using a screw [2].
F-9-44
2) Release the gear stopper [1], and then remove the gear [2].
[2] [1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-45
3) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the fixing drive unit [2].
F-9-42
3) Disconnect all connectors and remove the five screws [2], then remove the
image processor PCB with the PCB mount.
9-9
Chapter 9
[2] [3] [2]
[1] [2]
F-9-49
[2] [1] [2] 9.4.3.4 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB
F-9-46 0010-9969
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

9.4.3 Power Supply Unit 1) Remove the connector [1] and screw [2], and then remove the power
supply PCB [3].
0010-9965
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i [2] [1] [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1] F-9-50
F-9-47

0010-9967
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[3]
[2]
F-9-51
9.4.4 Control Panel
9.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover

0010-9978
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1] 1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).
[2] 2) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the reader front cover [2].
F-9-48
[1]
0010-9968
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[2]
F-9-52
9-10
Chapter 9
9.4.4.2 Removing the Operation Panel Unit remove the DC controller PCB [3].
0010-9979
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 /

[2] [1] [2]
1) Remove the two screw [1], and then detach the left cover [2] of the
operation panel unit.
[1]
[2] [1] [3] [2]

[2] F-9-56
F-9-53
9.4.6 Option Power Supply PCB
2) Remove the flat cable [1] and two screws [2], and then remove the
operation panel unit [3].
0011-0413
[2] iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-57

[3] 0011-0414
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1] 2) Remove the five screws [1]. Remove the two hooks [2], and then detach
F-9-54 the right cover (lower) [3].
9.4.5 DC Controller PCB

0010-9963
[3]
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2] F-9-58

0011-0415
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1] 1) Remove the two screws [1], and then detach the delivery tray [2].
F-9-55
9.4.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB

0010-9964
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Disconnect all connectors [1]. Remove the four screws [2], and then
9-11
Chapter 9

0010-9972
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[3]
[1] [2]
F-9-59
9.4.6.4 Removing the Option Power Supply PCB

0011-0416
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[1]
1) Disconnect the connector (J16) [1] on the power supply PCB. [2]
F-9-63

0010-9973
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
F-9-60
2) Disconnect the connector (J53) [1] on the power supply PCB. Remove the
three screws [2], and then remove the option power supply PCB [3].
[2] [3] [1] [2]

F-9-64
9.4.7.4 Removing the Main Power Supply PCB

0010-9974
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

1) Remove the connector [1] and screw [2], and then remove the power
supply PCB [3].
[2] [1] [2]
[2] [1] [2]

F-9-61
9.4.7 HVT PCB

0010-9971
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[2]
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the rear cover [2]. F-9-65
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-62
9-12
Chapter 9
[2]
[2]
F-9-66
[1] [1]
9.4.7.5 Removing the HVT PCB
0010-9975
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the connector [1] and screw [2], and then remove the HVT PCB.
[3] [1]
F-9-69
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and then release the harness from the wire
saddle [2].
[2]
[2]
F-9-67
When installing the HVT PCB, check that the contacts on the high voltage
electrode plate [1] touch the contacts on the PCB.
[1]
F-9-70
[1]
4) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the duct [2].
F-9-68
[2]
9.4.8 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
9.4.8.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan

0011-0419
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Open the left door until it stops.

2) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the transfer/registration unit
[2].
[1]
F-9-71
5) Remove the fixing heart discharge fan [1].
9-13
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
F-9-72
9.4.9 Fan Filter [1]

F-9-75
9.4.9.1 Removing the Fan Filter 5) Remove the fan filter [1] from the duct.
0011-0418
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Open the left door until it stops.

2) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the transfer/registration unit
[2].
[2]
[1]
F-9-76
MEMO:
When a duplex unit is used, first remove the duplex unit and next remove the
fan filter from it.
[1] [1] 9.4.10 Motor of Main Drive Assembly

0011-0048
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
[1]
F-9-73
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and then release the harness from the wire
[2]
saddle [2].
[2]
[1]
F-9-77
9.4.10.2 Removing the Main Motor

0011-0049
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Disconnect the connector [1], remove three screws [2], and then remove
the main motor [3].
[1]
F-9-74
4) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the duct [2].
9-14
Chapter 9
[1] [3] [1]
[2]
F-9-81
[2] 9.4.11.4 Removing the SDRAM

F-9-78 0011-0622
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

9.4.11 Fixing Driver Motor
9.4.11.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0011-0623
0011-0406 iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i

iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the LAN cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-79

0011-0407
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i [1] [2]

F-9-82
0011-0624
iR2016 / iR2020 / iR2016i / iR2020i

[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-9-80
9.4.11.3 Removing the RAM Cover

0011-0621
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

F-9-83
1) Remove the four screws [1], and then detach the RAM cover [2]. 2) Release SOFT ID cable [1] from the cable clamp [2].
9-15
Chapter 9
[1]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-9-84
3) Release a claw [1] of cable guide and detach the cable guide [2] upward. [2]
[1]
[2] [1] F-9-88

0011-0625
iR2016J /
F-9-85
4) Open a core [1].
[2] [1]
F-9-89
[2] [1]
[1]
F-9-86
[2]
[1]
F-9-90
3) Open a core [1].
F-9-87
9-16
Chapter 9
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-9-91 [5]
[2]
[1]
[4]
F-9-92
5) Remove the 10 screws [1], and then detach the IP cover [2]. [1]
[1]
F-9-94
2) Turn over the reader flexible cable cover [1], and then secure to the back
of the reader temporarily using a screw [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-9-93 [1]
9.4.11.8 Removing the Image Processor PCB Mount

0011-0626
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Disconnect the two reader flexible cables [1]. Release the harness [2] from
the wire saddles [3]. Remove the two screws [4], and then detach the
flexible cable cover [5].
F-9-95
3) Disconnect all connectors and remove the five screws [2], then remove the
image processor PCB with the PCB mount.
9-17
Chapter 9

[1] [2] [1] iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
0010-9899
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-99
[1]
0011-0612
F-9-96 iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
9.4.11.9 Removing the Fixing Unit Drive Motor 1) Remove the three screws [1], and then detach the left cover (rear).
0011-0629
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Disconnect the connector [1], remove the two screws [2], and then remove [2]
the fixing motor [3].
[1]
F-9-100
[2] [1] [3] 9.4.12.4 Removing the Left Door

0010-9900
F-9-97 iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
9.4.12 Left Door 1) Remove the screw [1] securing the door support band. Remove the
9.4.12.1 Removing the Drum Unit from the wire saddle [4].
0010-9897
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

door [3].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-9-98
- When attaching or detaching the drum unit, open the left door fully to pre- [3] [4]
- To prevent exposure of the drum, cover the drum unit with a few sheets of F-9-101
paper and place it in a safe place. 2) Open the left door until it sops and pull out the hinge shaft [1].
9-18
Chapter 9
MEMO:
[1]
F-9-102
[1]
F-9-103
9-19
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection
Contents
Contents
10.1 Periodically Replaced Parts............................................................................................................................ 10-1

10.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Reader Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.3 Printer Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2 Durables and Consumables ............................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Reader Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.3 Printer Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ............................................................................................................ 10-2
10.3.1 Scheduled Servicing ................................................................................................................................ 10-2
Chapter 10
10.1 Periodically Replaced Parts
10.1.1 Overview
0011-0421
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine has parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of functional performance. (The loss of the function of any of these parts
will significantly affect the machine performance, regardless of the presence/absence of external changes or damage.)
If possible, schedule the replacement so that it coincides with a scheduled service visit.
The timing of replacement may vary depending on the site environment or user habit.
10.1.2 Reader Unit

0011-0422
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
10.1.3 Printer Unit

0011-0423
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The printer unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement.
10.2 Durables and Consumables
10.2.1 Overview
0011-0424
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The machine has parts that may require replacement once or more during the period of product warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by
referring to their indicated estimated lives.
- Checking the Timing of Replacement
Use the following service mode item to check the timing of replacement:
#COUNTER > DRBL-1
- FX-UNIT: Fixing Unit
- TR-ROLL: Transfer roller
- DV-UNIT-C: Developing unit
- M-PU-RL: Manual feed pickup roller
- M-SP-PD: Manual feed separation pad
10.2.2 Reader Unit

0011-0425
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables.
10.2.3 Printer Unit

0011-0426
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-10-1
As of Aug. 2005
Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks
[1] Manual feed pickup roller FL2-3202-000 1 150K
[2] Manual feed separation pad FL2-3201-000 1 150K
[3] Devrloping unit FM2-3286-000 1 150K
[4] Transfer roller FC6-4313-000 1 150K
[5] Fixing unit (120V) FM2-3345-000 1 150K
Fixing unit (230V) FM2-3352-000 1 150K
The value is the mean value collected from the results of evaluation. The parts number may change because of changes in design.
10-1
Chapter 10
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
F-10-1
10.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
10.3.1 Scheduled Servicing

0011-2842
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

The reader and printer unit does not have items that require scheduled servicing.
Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during every service visit.
10-2
Chapter 11 Standards and Adjustments
Contents
Contents
11.1 Scanning System ............................................................................................................................................ 11-1

11.1.1 Procedure after Replacing the CIS .......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Image Formation System................................................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2.1 Procedure after Replacing the Developing Assembly............................................................................. 11-1
11.3 Electrical Components ................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.3.1 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor PCB ............................................................................ 11-1
Chapter 11
11.1 Scanning System The optical system starts scanning. Several seconds later, automatic adjust-
ment of the reading position finishes and "OK" appears.
11.1.1 Procedure after Replacing the CIS

0011-2391 If automatic adjustment fails, "NG" appears. Perform the following pro-
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i cedure:
Clean the white roller of the DADF and the document glass of the host ma-
After replacing the contact image sensor (CIS), go through the following chine, and then retry auto adjustment.
steps to perform inter-channel output correction:
5) Press the 1 key.
11.2 Image Formation System
11.2.1 Procedure after Replacing the Developing

Assembly
0011-2545
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
After replacing the developing assembly, go through the following steps

in the developing assembly idle rotation mode before installing the toner car-
tridge.
1) Plug the power cord into the outlet.

4) When a message appears on the operation panel display, press the
following keys to enter the service mode:
Additional Functions key > 2 key > 8 key > Additional Functions key
5) Select "#PRINT" using the + or - key, and then press the OK key.
6) Select "#PRINT SW" using the + or - key, and hen press the OK key.
Confirm that the following message is displayed:
# key > 1 key > 1 key
9) Press the OK key. Confirm that "SW 011" changes to "SW 012".
10) Press the Reset key to exit the service mode.
11) Close the front cover. The machine will run in the developer idling mode
for about 1 minute.
11.3 Electrical Components
11.3.1 Procedure after Replacing the Image Processor

PCB
0011-2555
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
After replacing the image processor PCB with a new one, input the all value
printed on the service label affixed to the rear cover.
Make the following adjustments:
- Correction of output between CIS channels
5) Press the 1 key.
- Read position adjustment (Stream reading: Only when the ADF is installed)
Press the User Mode key " ", 2 key, 8 key, User Mode key " " on the
operation panel of the host machine.
5) Press the 3 key. "SHEET POS ADJ" appears.
11-1
Chapter 12 Correcting Faulty Images
Contents
Contents
12.1 Making lnitial Checks .................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1.1 Site Environment ..................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Checking the Paper.................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper............................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.4 Checking the Durables ............................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.5 Checking the Units and Functional Systems ........................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.6 Others ...................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Outline of Electrical Components .................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2.1 Clutch/Solenoid ....................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.1.1 List of Clutches/Solenoids ............................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.2 Motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.2.1 List of Motors ................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.3 Fan ........................................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.3.1 List of Fans ....................................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.4 Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................... 12-4
12.2.4.1 List of Sensors .................................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.2.5 Switch ...................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.5.1 List of Switches ................................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others .................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.6.1 List of Lamps, Heaters, and Others .................................................................................................. 12-6
Chapter 12
12.1 Making lnitial Checks
12.1.1 Site Environment

0011-2557
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
a. There must be a source of power whose voltage is as specified (+/-10%). The power plug must never be disconnected day and night.
b. The machine must not be in an area subject to high humidity (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier). The site must not be too cold or subject to dust. The
machine must not be near a source of fire.
c. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas.
d. The machine must not be exposed to the rays of the sun. As necessary, curtains must be provided.
e. The area must be well ventilated. The machine must be on a level floor.
f. Be sure that there is a source of power that can be used by the machine.
12.1.2 Checking the Paper

0011-2558
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
a. Be sure the paper being used is of a type recommended by Canon.

b. Be sure that the paper is not moist. Try using paper fresh out of package.
12.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper

0011-2559
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
a. There must be paper in the cassette or the tray deposited within a specific limit.
b. If transparencies are used, be sure that they are placed in the manual feed tray in the correct orientation.
12.1.4 Checking the Durables

0011-2560
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Refer to the table of durables, and replace those that have reached the end of their lives.
12.1.5 Checking the Units and Functional Systems

0011-2564
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<Reader>
- Check whether the optical system (contact sensor/white panel/copyboard glass) is free from scratches, stain, foreign objects.
- Check whether the contact sensor unit moves smoothly. Check whether the rails are free from dirt.
- Check whether the contact sensor is not flickering.
- Check whether the optical system is free from dew condensation.
<Process>
- Check whether the drum unit and toner bottle are installed securely.
- Check whether the photoconductor drum is free from scratches and stain.
<Transfer>
- Check whether the transfer roller is free from scratches, stain, and deformation.
<Fixing>
- Check whether the fixing film and pressure roller are free from wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check whether the fixing thermistor is broken.
- Check whether the thermo switch is conductive.
<Paper transport >

- Check whether the paper transport path is free from foreign objects such as paper chips.
- Check whether the paper pickup, feed, and separation rollers are free from paper dust. Also check whether these rollers are free from wear, scratches, dirt, and
deformation.
- Check whether the registration roller and paper path are free from wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check whether the transport guide is free from wear, scratches, dirt, and deformation.
- Check whether the leading edge of paper is not folded, curled, wavy, or damp.
- Check whether use of the Canon-recommended paper/transparency solves the problem.
<Machine>
- Check whether the drive system load is heavy.
- Check whether gears are worn or cracked?
<Cassette>
- Check whether the cassette is installed properly. Check whether the paper size is set properly. Check whether the same symptom occurs when the cassette is
replaced with the cassette verified to be normal.
- Check whether the middle plate of the cassette moves smoothly. Check whether it is deformed.
- Check whether the side and rear alignment plates are adjusted properly.
- Check whether the cassette heater switch is turned on (when a cassette heater is installed).
<Service Mode>
- Check whether various adjustment values are the same as those printed on the service label.
- Check whether the output between CIS channels has been corrected.
(Service mode>TEST MODE>"2"(SCANTEST)>"1")
- Check whether the read position has been adjusted properly. (Stream reading: Only when the ADF is installed)
(Service mode>TEST MODE>"2"(SCANTEST)>"3"(SHEET POS ADJ))
- Check whether the error has been cleared.
(Service mode>CLEAR>ERR)
<General>
- Check whether the power cord is plugged in the outlet securely.
- Check whether the specified AC voltage is applied to the outlet.
- Check whether sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids are operating normally. Check whether connectors are connected properly.
(Check the power supply and signal routes with reference to the general circuit diagram.)
- Check whether all cables are routed properly and all screws are not loose.
- Check whether all outer covers are attached.
12-1
Chapter 12
- Check whether the main power switch and the power switch on the operation pane are turned on.
- Check the power cables and signal cables of options are connected properly.
- Check whether no fuse on PCBs is blown.
- Check whether the user uses the machine properly.
12.1.6 Others
0011-2837
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
If a machine is brought from a cold to warm room, its inside can start to develop condensation, leading to various problems.
a. condensation on the BD sensor is likely to cause problems associated with E100
b. condensation on the dust-proof glass is likely to cause poor image density in sub scanning direction
c. condensation on the contact sensor of the reader unit or on the copyboard glass can cause light images
d. condensation on the pickup or feed guide can cause paper feed problems
If the problem given in d. above has occurred, dry wipe the units in the feed system. Do not open the package containing a toner cartridge, developing unit, or drum
unit right after it has been brought in from a cold to warm place to avoid condensation. Be sure to leave it alone for a while (1 to 2 hr), opening it after it has become
fully used to the temperature of the site.
12.2 Outline of Electrical Components
12.2.1 Clutch/Solenoid
12.2.1.1 List of Clutches/Solenoids

0011-2720
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit has no clutch/solenoid.
<Printer Unit>
T-12-1
Symbol Name Function

CL201 Manual pickup clutch Drives the manual pickup roller.
CL202 Cassette feed clutch Drives the cassette feed roller.
CL203 Registration clutch Drives the registration clutch.
SL201 Manual pickup solenoid Drives the manual pickup roller.

SL202 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid Drives the cassette 1 pickup roller.
T-12-2
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB

CL201 FK2-1070 J219
CL202 FK2-1068 J211
CL203 FK2-1069 J210
SL201 FK2-1083 J219
SL202 FK2-1082 J209
CL203
CL201
SL201
SL202
CL202
F-12-1
12.2.2 Motor
12.2.2.1 List of Motors

0011-2721
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<Reader Unit>
T-12-3

M401 Reader motor Drives the carriage.
12-2
Chapter 12
T-12-4
Symbol Part No. Reader controller PCB Error

M401 FK2-1066 J409
M401
F-12-2
<Printer Unit>
T-12-5

M201 Fixing motor Drives the fixing unit.
M203 Polygon motor Drives the laser scanner.
M204 Main motor Drives the main parts of the printer.
T-12-6
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Error

M201 FK2-1067 J202 E007, E808
M203 Scanner unit J205
FM2-3383(iR2016J/2020J)
FM2-3384(iR2016/2016i/2020/2020i)
M204 FK2-1080 J208 E010
M201
M203
M204
F-12-3
12.2.3 Fan
12.2.3.1 List of Fans

0011-2722
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit has no fan.
<Printer Unit>
T-12-7

FM1 Heat discharge fan Cools fixing unit.
12-3
Chapter 12
T-12-8
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Error

FM1 FK2-1073 J219 E805
FM1
F-12-4
12.2.4 Sensor
12.2.4.1 List of Sensors

0011-2723
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<Reader Unit>
T-12-9

SR401 CIS HP sensor Detects the CIS home position.
Copyboard cover open/closed sensor
SR402 Detects opening/closing of the copyboard cover.
(rear)
Copyboard cover open/closed sensor
SR403 Detects opening/closing of the copyboard cover.
(front)
SR404 Original sensor 1 Detects the original size (AB, INCH/A, or INCH/AB).
SR405 Original sensor 2 Detects the original size (AB, A, or INCH/AB).
SR406 Original sensor 3 Detects the original size (all destinations).
SR407 Original sensor 4 Detects the original size (AB or INCH/AB).
SR408 Original sensor 5 Detects the original size (INCH/A).
CIS1 CIS Reads the original.
T-12-10
Symbol Part No. Reader controller PCB Jam code

SR401 WG8-5696 J406
SR402 WG8-5696 J405
SR403 WG8-5696 J405 000f
SR404 FH7-7569 J407
SR405 FH7-7569 J407
SR406 FH7-7569 J413
SR407 FH7-7569 J413
SR408 FH7-7569 J413
CIS1 FM2-3369 J408
12-4
Chapter 12
SR407 SR408
SR406
SR404
SR403
SR402
SR405
SR401
CIS1
F-12-5
<Printer Unit>
T-12-11

SR101 Fixing film speed sensor Detects the fixing film speed.
SR202 Fixing delivery sensor Detects fixing delivery.
SR203 No.1 delivery sensor Detects delivery.
SR204 Cassette 1 paper sensor Detects presence/absence of cassette 1 paper.
SR206 Waste toner full detection sensor Detects the waste toner full status.
SR207 No.1 paper full sensor Detects the No.1 paper full status.
SR208 Manual paper sensor Detects presence/absence of manually fed paper.
SR209 Registration sensor Detects registration paper.
TH1 Fixing main thermistor Detects the fixing heater temperature.

TH2 Fixing sub thermistor Detects the fixing heater temperature.
TP1 Thermo switch Cuts off the heater power supply line when an
abnormal temperature is detected.
T-12-12
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Jam code

SR201 FG3-3501 J217
SR202 WG8-5696 J217 010c, 0210, 0214, 1118
SR203 WG8-5696 J221 010c, 0210, 0214, 1118
SR204 WG8-5696 J213
SR206 WG8-5696 J216
SR207 WG8-5696 J201
SR208 WG8-5696 J219
SR209 WG8-5696 J212 0104, 0208, 010c, 0214, 1118
T-12-13
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Power supply PCB

TH1,TH2 Fixing film unit J217
TP1 FM2-3346(120V) J13
FM2-3353(230V)
12-5
Chapter 12
SR207
SR203
TH1, TH2, TP1
SR208
SR101
SR209
SR204
SR202 SR206
F-12-6
12.2.5 Switch
12.2.5.1 List of Switches

0011-2724
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit has no switch.
<Printer Unit>
T-12-14

SW2 Front cover switch Detects opening/closing of the front cover.
SW3 Left door switch Detects opening/closing of the left door.
SW4 Cassette 1 size detection switch Detects the cassette 1 paper size.
T-12-15
Symbol Part No. DC controller PCB Power supply PCB

SW2 FM2-4433 J12
SW3 FM2-4433 J12
SW4 WC2-5332 J213
SW2
SW3 SW4
F-12-7
12.2.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
12.2.6.1 List of Lamps, Heaters, and Others

0011-2725
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<Reader Unit>
12-6
Chapter 12
T-12-16
Symbol Name Part No. Function

Prevents dew condensation on the ADF
H3 Reader heater (left) NPN
reading glass.
Prevents dew condensation on the
H4 Reader heater (right) NPN
copyboard glass.
H4
H3
F-12-8
<Printer unit>
T-12-17

H1 Fixing main heater Used as the main heater for fixing.
H2 Fixing sub heater Used as the sub heater for fixing.
H6 Cassette heater Prevents paper in the cassette from absorbing moisture.
VA1 Varistor Used as a varistor.
SP1 Speaker Used as a speaker (for fax unit).

T-12-18
Symbol Part No.

Fixing film unit
H1,H2 FM2-3346(120V)
FM2-3353(230V)
H6 FK2-1146(100V)
FK2-1088(230V)
T-12-19
Symbol Part No. Modem PCB

VA1 FH5-3543
SP1 FK2-1265 J1203
H1, H2
VA1 SP1
H6
F-12-9
12-7
Chapter 13 Self Diagnosis
Contents
Contents
13.1 Error Code Table ............................................................................................................................................ 13-1

13.1.1 List of Error Codes .................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2 Error Code Details.......................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2.1 Error Code Details................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Jam Code ........................................................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.3.1 Jam Codes (Related to Printer Unit)........................................................................................................ 13-3
13.3.2 Jam Codes (Related to Finisher) ............................................................................................................. 13-3
13.3.3 Jam Codes (Related to ADF)................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.3.4 Jam Codes (Related to Duplex Unit)....................................................................................................... 13-4
13.3.5 Jam Codes (Related to Inner 2-way Tray)............................................................................................... 13-4
13.4 Finisher Error Codes ...................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.4.1 Error Code Details................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.5 FAX Error Codes............................................................................................................................................ 13-8
13.5.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.5.1.1 Error Code Outline ........................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.5.2 User Error Code....................................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.5.2.1 User Error Code................................................................................................................................ 13-8
13.5.3 Service Error Code .................................................................................................................................. 13-8
13.5.3.1 Service Error Code ........................................................................................................................... 13-8
Chapter 13
13.1 Error Code Table
13.1.1 List of Error Codes

0011-2570
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-1
Detail
Error Code Error Name/Explanation of Error
Code
E000 0000 Fixing temperature abnormal rise
0000 Fixing unit temperature rise detection (by main thermistor)
E001
0001 Fixing unit temperature rise detection (by sub thermistor)
E002 0000 Fixing unit temperature insufficient rise
0000 Low fixing temperature detection after standby (by main thermistor)
E003
0001 Low fixing temperature detection after standby (by sub thermistor)
E007 0000 Fixing film rotation error
E010 0000 Main motor rotation error
0001 Waste toner full detection
E019
0002 Waster toner full detection sensor failure
E052 0000 Duplex unit connection error
E100 0000 BD cycle out of range
E197 0000 Erroneous communication with printer engine
E500 0001 Finisher communication error
E520 0000 Offset error
E531 0000 Stapling error
0001 Paper surface not detected (standard tray)
0002 Not moved within the specified time (standard tray)
E540
0003 Sensor not reached within 3 seconds (standard tray)
0005 Encoder clock failure (standard tray)
0001 Paper surface not detected (optional tray)
0002 Not moved within the specified time (optional tray)
E542
0003 Sensor not reached within 3 seconds (optional tray)
0005 Encoder clock failure (optional tray)
E575 0000 Stack delivery error
E584 0000 Shutter failure
E716 0000 Erroneous communication with optional cassette
0000 Erroneous communication with card reader (serial communication)
E719
0002 Erroneous communication with coin vender (serial communication)
E733 0000 Erroneous communication between controller and printer
E736 0000 CCU communication error
E739 0000 Erroneous communication between controller and network board
E805 0000 Fan failure
E808 0000 Fixing drive circuit failure
13.2 Error Code Details
13.2.1 Error Code Details

0011-2580
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-2
Display
Detail Code Main Cause/Symptom Countermeasure
Code
E000 0000 Startup error
The temperature detected by the main - Check the fixing film connector.
or sub thermistor does not rise to the - Replace the fixing film unit.
specified value during startup control. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
E001 0000 Abnormally high temperature (detected by main thermistor)
The main thermistor detected an - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
abnormally high temperature (240 deg - Replace the fixing film unit.
C) during temperature control. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
0001 Abnormally high temperature (detected by sub thermistor)
The sub thermistor detected an - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
abnormally high temperature (295 deg - Replace the fixing film unit.
C) during temperature control. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
E002 0000 Low temperature during temperature control.
The target temperature is not reached - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
during temperature control. - Replace the fixing film unit.
- Replace the DC controller PCB.
13-1
Chapter 13
Display
Code
E003 0000 Abnormally low temperature (detected by main thermistor)
After the temperature detected by the - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
main thermistor has reached the - Replace the fixing film unit.
specified value, it does not reach the - Replace the DC controller PCB.
specified value during initial rotation.
0001 Abnormally low temperature (detected by sub thermistor)
After the temperature detected by the - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
sub thermistor has reached the - Replace the fixing film unit.
specified value, it does not reach the - Replace the DC controller PCB.
specified value during initial rotation.
E007 0000 Fixing film sensor failure
The fixing film sensor is faulty. - Check the connector of the fixing film
sensor.
- Replace the fixing film sensor.
E010 0000 Main motor failure
The main motor is faulty. - Check the connector of the main motor.
- Replace the main motor.
E019 0000 Waste toner full detection
The waste toner full state was detected. Replace the drum unit.
0001 Waster toner full detection sensor is faulty.
The waste toner full state was detected - Check the connector of the waster toner full
continuously for five or more seconds sensor.
while the main motor was turning. - Replace the waste toner full sensor.
E052 0000 Erroneous connection to duplex unit
Disconnection of the duplex unit was - Check the connectors of the duplex unit and
detected after power-on, detection of DC controller PCB.
normal connection to the duplex unit, - Replace the duplex controller PCB.
and start of communication. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
E100 0000 BD detection PCB failure
The BD detection PCB is faulty. - Check the connector of the BD detection
PCB.
- Replace the laser scanner unit.
E197 0000 Printer engine communication error
Erroneous communication between the - Check the connectors of the DC controller
DC controller PCB and image PCB and image processor PCB.
processor PCB was detected. - Replace the DC controller PCB for normal
connection.
- Replace the image processor PCB.
E716 0000 Erroneous communication with optional cassette
Disconnection of the optional cassette - Check the connectors of the optional cassette
was detected after power-on, detection PCB and DC controller PCB.
of normal connection to the optional - Replace the optional cassette PCB for
cassette, and start of communication. normal connection.
E719 0000 Erroneous communication with card reader (serial communication)
- Disconnection from the card reader - Check the connectors of the card reader and
has been detected since image processor PCB.
communication started after - Replace the card reader for normal
confirmation of normal connection to connection.
the card reader (after power-on). - Replace the image processor PCB.
- A serial communication error has
occurred. (The serial communication
error cannot be recovered.)
0002 Erroneous communication with coin vendor (serial communication)
- Disconnection from the coin vendor - Check the connection between the image
has been detected since processor PCB and serial PCB.
communication started after - Check the connectors of the serial PCB and
confirmation of normal connection to coin vendor for normal connection.
the coin vendor (after power-on). - Replace the serial PCB.
- A serial communication error has - Check the coin vendor.
occurred. (The serial communication - Replace the image processor PCB.
error cannot be recovered.)
E733 0000 Erroneous communication between controller and printer
Cannot communicate with the printer - Check the connectors of the DC controller
at startup. PCB and image processor PCB for normal
connection.
- Check the power supply of the printer
(Check whether initialization is performed at
startup).
- Replace the DC controller PCB or image
processor PCB.
13-2
Chapter 13
Display
Code
E736 0000 CCU communication error
The installed modem PCB is - Check the connectors of the image processor
incompatible. PCB and modem.
- Replace the modem PCB.
E739 0000 Erroneous communication between controller and network board
The installed network board is - Check the connectors of the image processor
incompatible. PCB and LAN PCB for normal connection.
- Replace the LAN PCB.
E805 0000 Fan failure
The fan is faulty. - Check the fan connector.
- Replace the fan.
E808 0000 Fixing drive circuit failure
- The heater does not turn on. - Check the connector of the fixing film unit.
- A fixing drive motor failure was - Replace the fixing film unit.
detected. - Replace the fixing drive motor.
- Replace the power supply PCB.
13.3 Jam Code
13.3.1 Jam Codes (Related to Printer Unit)

0011-2846
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-3
Code Name Sensor No. Description

0104 Delay jam in paper SR209 The registration sensor cannot detect the leading edge of paper from
pickup section the moment paper pickup starts to the moment the jam detection
time is reached.
0208 Stationary jam in paper SR209 The registration sensor cannot detect the no paper status specified
pickup section time before the leading edge of the picked up paper reaches this
sensor.
010c Delay jam in deliver SR202, - The fixing delivery sensor cannot detect presence of paper within
section SR203, the specified time after turning on of the registration clutch.
SR209 - The fixing delivery sensor detected absence of paper within the
specified time after the sensor had detected presence of paper within
the specified time after turning on of the registration clutch.
- The No.1 delivery sensor cannot detect presence of paper within
the specified time after turning on of the fixing delivery sensor.
0210 Stationary jam in SR202, - The fixing delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within
delivery section SR203 the specified time after turning off of the registration clutch.
- The fixing delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within
the specified time after the sensor detected the leading edge of
paper.
- The No.1 delivery sensor cannot detect absence of paper within
the specified time after the sensor detected the leading edge of
paper.
0214 Stationary jam in SR202, Paper was detected in the paper transport path during initial
machine SR203, rotation, during automatic delivery, at the end of cleaning, or at
SR209 reception of an emergency stop command.
1118 Door open jam SR202, The door was opened when there was printing paper in the transport
SR203, path.
SR209,
SW2, SW3
13.3.2 Jam Codes (Related to Finisher)
0011-2849
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-4

0130 Delayed feed jam PI5 The inlet sensor is not turned on within the specified time after
reception of a paper ejection signal from the host machine.
0231 Staying paper jam PI5 The inlet sensor is not turned off even if paper is fed by the specified
distance after the leading edge of the paper from the host machine
has passed through the sensor.
0033 Stack ejection jam PI1 When a paper stack is ejected, the HP sensor is not turned off within
the specified time.
0035 Staple jam Stapler HP The stapler HP sensor was turned off once after start of stapler
sensor operation, but the HP has not been reached within the specified
(built in time.
stapler)
1036 Power-on jam PI5 The inlet sensor detected paper at power-on.
1137 Door open jam SW1 The front cover switch detected opening of the front cover during
standby or copy operation.
13-3
Chapter 13
13.3.3 Jam Codes (Related to ADF)

0011-2839
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-5

0000 Unknown jam - Other errors
0007 Initial stationary PI6,PI7,PI8 Paper is detected in the transport path before the DADF starts initial
operation.
0008 Read sensor delay PI7,PI8 The read sensor does not detect paper when the paper has been fed
by the predetermined distance since reception of a pickup request.
0009 Read sensor stationary PI7 The trailing edge of paper is not detected when the paper has been
fed by the predetermined distance since detection of it by the read
sensor.
000a Paper absence (Pull out PI11 The Document set sensor has been held off since start of pickup.
the document.)
000c Delivery reversal sensor PI6,PI7 The delivery reversal sensor does not detect paper since the paper
delay has been fed by the predetermined distance since the read sensor
was turned on.
000d Delivery reversal sensor PI6 The trailing edge of paper is not detected when the paper has been
stationary fed by the predetermined distance since the delivery reversal sensor
detected the paper.
000e ADF cover open PI10 The feeder cover was opened during operation (of the drive system).
000f User ADF open sensor of The ADF was opened during operation (of the drive system).
the reader
unit
0010 Pickup NG - The registration sensor has been held off since paper pickup started.
13.3.4 Jam Codes (Related to Duplex Unit)
0011-2840
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-6

0120 Delay jam at duplex SR1002 The duplex paper sensor 1 does not turn on within the specified
paper sensor 1 time after the delivery sensor on the main unit side turns on.
0124 Delay jam at duplex SR1003 The duplex paper sensor 2 does not turn on within the specified
paper sensor 2 time after the duplex reverse motor starts.
0221 Stationary jam at SR1002 - The duplex paper sensor 1 does not turn off when the specified
duplex paper sensor 1 time has lapsed since the duplex paper sensor 2 turned on.
- The duplex paper sensor 1 does not turn off when the paper
with a longitudinal length of 280 mm reaches the standby
position (about 90 mm from the duplex paper sensor 2).
0228 Stationary jam at SR1003 The duplex paper sensor 2 does not turn off when the specified
duplex paper sensor 2 time has lapsed since the feed motor started.
13.3.5 Jam Codes (Related to Inner 2-way Tray)
0011-2850
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-7

010e Delay jam at No.2 SR1101 The No.2 delivery sensor does not detect presence of paper within
delivery section the specified time after turning on of the fixing delivery sensor.
0212 Stationary jam at No.2 SR1101 Absence of paper is not detected within the specified time after
delivery section turning on of the No.2 delivery sensor.
13.4 Finisher Error Codes
13.4.1 Error Code Details

0011-2652
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-8
Display Detail
Main Cause/Symptom Countermeasure
code Code
E500 0001 Finisher communication error
Data communication could not be - Check the connectors of the finisher controller
performed normally. It has been retried PCB and DC controller PCB for normal connection.
three times in vain. - Replace the finisher controller PCB.
13-4
Chapter 13
Display Detail
code Code
E520 0001 - Offset motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Offset HP sensor failure
- The offset motor was driven for 1000 - Check the connector of the offset HP sensor.
ms in the HP sensor approach direction, - Check the connector of the offset motor.
but the offset HP sensor did not turn on. - Replace the offset HP sensor.
- Replace the offset motor.
- Replace the finisher controller PCB.
0002 - Offset motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Offset HP sensor failure
- The offset motor was driven for 1000 - Check the connector of the offset HP sensor.
ms in the HP sensor escape direction, but - Check the connector of the offset motor.
the offset HP sensor did not turn off. - Replace the offset HP sensor.
- Replace the offset motor.
E531 0001 - Staple unit failure
- Staple HP sensor failure
- Finisher controller PCB failure
- The staple home position was not left - Check the connector of the staple unit.
when 400 ms have lapsed since start of - Replace the staple unit.
staple operation. - Replace the finisher controller PCB.
0002 - Staple unit failure
- Staple HP sensor failure
- Finisher controller PCB failure
- The staple home position had been left - Check the connector of the staple unit.
once, but it was not reached again when - Replace the staple unit.
400 ms have lapsed since start of staple - Replace the finisher controller PCB.
operation. In addition, the staple home
position could not be reached by
performing reverse operation for 400 ms.
13-5
Chapter 13
Display Detail
code Code
E540 0001 - Standard tray shift motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Standard tray HP sensor failure
- Standard tray clock sensor failure
- Standard tray shift motor load failure
The standard tray was moved but the - Check the connector of the standard tray HP
paper surface was not detected. sensor.
- Check the connector of the standard tray clock
sensor.
- Check the connector of the standard tray shift
motor.
- Replace the standard tray HP sensor.
- Replace the standard tray clock sensor.
- Replace the standard tray shift motor.
0002 - Standard tray shift motor or finisher controller PCB failure
Cannot move (to the pickup position) - Check the connector of the standard tray HP
within the specified time. sensor.
sensor.
motor.
The standard tray was operated, but it did - Check the connector of the standard tray HP
not reach the sensor within 300 ms. sensor.
sensor.
motor.
The encoder clock signal was not - Check the connector of the standard tray HP
detected two or more times when the sensor.
standard tray was operated for 300 ms. - Check the connector of the standard tray clock
sensor.
motor.
13-6
Chapter 13
Display Detail
code Code
E542 0001 - Optional tray motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Optional tray HP sensor failure
- Optional tray clock sensor failure
- Optional tray shift motor load failure
The optional tray was operated, but the - Check the connector of the optional tray HP
paper surface was not detected. sensor.
- Check the connector of the optional tray clock
sensor.
- Check the connector of the optional tray shift
motor.
- Replace the optional tray HP sensor.
- Replace the optional tray clock sensor.
- Replace the optional tray shift motor.
0002 - Optional tray motor or finisher controller PCB failure
Cannot move (to the pickup position) - Check the connector of the optional tray HP
within the specified time. sensor.
- Check the connector of the optional tray clock
sensor.
motor.
- The optional tray was moved upward, - Check the connector of the optional tray HP
but it did not reach the HP sensor within sensor.
3000 ms. - Check the connector of the optional tray clock
sensor.
motor.
- The encoder clock signal was not - Check the connector of the optional tray HP
detected two or more times when the sensor.
optional tray was operated for 300 ms. - Check the connector of the optional tray clock
sensor.
motor.
E575 0001 - Stack delivery motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Stack delivery HP sensor failure
- The stack delivery motor was driven for - Check the connector of the stack delivery HP
2000 ms in the stack delivery direction sensor.
(HP sensor approach direction), but the - Check the connector of the stack delivery motor.
stack delivery HP sensor did not turn on. - Check the connector of the stack delivery HP
sensor.
- Replace the stack delivery motor.
0002 - Stack delivery motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Stack delivery HP sensor failure
- The stack delivery motor was driven for - Check the connector of the stack delivery HP
2000 ms in the HP sensor escape sensor.
direction, but the stack delivery HP - Check the connector of the stack delivery motor.
sensor did not turn off. - Check the connector of the stack delivery HP
sensor.
- Replace the stack delivery motor.
13-7
Chapter 13
Display Detail
code Code
E584 0001 - Shutter drive motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Shutter open detection sensor failure
- Shutter clutch failure
- The shutter open sensor did not turn on - Check the connector of the shutter open sensor.
when 1000 ms have lapsed since the - Check the connector of the shutter clutch.
shutter unit had performed open - Check the connector of the shutter motor.
operation, resulting in incomplete open - Replace the shutter open sensor.
operation. - Replace the shutter clutch.
- Replace the shutter drive motor.
0002 - Shutter drive motor or finisher controller PCB failure
- Shutter open detection sensor failure
- Shutter clutch failure
- The shutter open sensor did not turn off - Check the connector of the shutter open sensor.
when 1000 ms have lapsed since the - Check the connector of the shutter clutch.
shutter unit had performed close - Check the connector of the shutter motor.
operation, resulting in incomplete close - Replace the shutter open sensor.
operation. - Replace the shutter clutch.
- Replace the shutter drive motor.
13.5 FAX Error Codes
13.5.1 Outline
13.5.1.1 Error Code Outline

0011-3633
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
An error code is used to indicate a fault in a machine, and is indicated in the machine's LCD or reports, showing the nature (symptoms) of the fault. Using the error
code, the user or the service man can readily find out how to correct the fault by simply referring to the User's Manual or service manual.
An error code may be either of the following two types:
User Error Codes
A fault indicated as a user error code is one that can easily be corrected by the user, as by operating the machine. It takes the form of "#+number."
Service Error Codes
If a fault calls for a service man for correction, it is indicated as a service man error code in the form of "##+number" or "SYSTEM ERROR E+number."
Memo
A service error code expressed in the form of "##+number" will not appear on the LCD, Error Tx Report, or Activity Report while the machine remains
in factory default state. To check a service error code, shift bit 0 of service soft switch #1 SSSW SW01 to '1'.
Memo
Display only the error codes which are newly incorporated in this machine as well as which require remedies unique to the product. For the causes and
countermeasures of other error codes, refer to the separate G3/G4 Facsimile Error Code List (Rev. 2).
13.5.2 User Error Code
13.5.2.1 User Error Code

0011-3635
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-9
No. Tx/Rx Description

#0001 [Tx] an original has jammed.
#0003 [Tx/Rx] tine-out for copying or sending/receiving a single page has occurred.
#0005 [Tx/Rx] time-out for initial identification (T0/T1) has occurred.
#0009 [Rx] recording paper has jammed or is absent.
#0012 [Tx] recording paper is absent at the other party.
#0018 [Tx/Rx] auto call initiation has failed.
#0037 [Rx] image memory overflow at time of reception has occurred.
#0059 [Tx] The number you dial and connected number (CSI) does not match.
#0995/0099 [Tx/Rx] a memory communication reservation has been cancelled.
13.5.3 Service Error Code
13.5.3.1 Service Error Code

0011-3636
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-13-10

##0100 [Tx] at time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than
specified.
##0101 [Tx/Rx] the modem speed does not match that of the other party.
##0102 [Tx] at time of transmission, fall-back cannot be used.
##0103 [Rx] at time of reception, EOL cannot be detected for 5 sec (15 sec if CBT).
##0104 [Tx] at time of transmission, RTN or PIN is received.
13-8
Chapter 13

##0106 [Rx] at time of reception, the procedural signal is received for 6 sec while in wait for the
signal.
##0107 [Rx] at time of reception, the transmitting party cannot use fall-back.
##0109 [Tx] at time of transmission, a signal other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR, or CRP is
received, and the procedural signal has been sent more than specified.
##0111 [Tx/Rx] memory error has occurred.
##0114 [Rx] at time of reception, RTN is transmitted.
##0200 [Rx] at time of reception, no image carrier is detected for 5 sec.
##0201 [Tx/Rx] DCN is received outside the normal parity procedure.
##0220 [Tx/Rx] system error (main program out of control) has occurred.
##0232 [Tx] encoding error has occurred.
##0237 [Rx] decoding error has occurred.
##0261 [Tx/Rx] system error has occurred.
specified.
specified.
specified.
specified.
##0284 [Tx] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of TCF.
##0285 [Tx] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOP.
##0286 [Tx] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOM.
##0287 [Tx] at time of transmission DCN is received after transmission of MPS.
##0288 [Tx] after transmission of EOP, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has
been received.
##0289 [Tx] after transmission of EOM, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has
been received.
##0290 [Tx] after transmission of MPS, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has
been received.
##0670 [Tx] at time of V.8 late start, the V.8 ability of DIS front the receiving party is expected
to be detected, and the CI signal is expected to be transmitted in response; however,
the procedure fails to advance, and the line is released because of T1 time-out.
##0671 [Rx] at time of V.8 arrival, procedure fails to move to phase 2 after detection of CM
signal from caller, causing T1 time-out and releasing line
##0672 [Tx] at time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and
thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0673 [Rx] at time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and thereafter
stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##0674 [Tx] at time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the
control channel and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and
suffer T1 timeout.
##0675 [Rx] at time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the
control channel and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and
suffer T1 timeout.
##0750 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of
PPS-NULL, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0752 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-NULL.
##0753 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than
specified after transmission of PPS-NULL, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
specified after transmission of PPS-NULL.
PPS-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0757 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after retransmission of PPS-MPS.
specified after transmission of PPS-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
specified after transmission of PPS-MPS.
PPS-EOM, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0762 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOM.
specified after transmission of PPS-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
specified after transmission of PPS-EOM.
PPS-EOP, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0767 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOP.
specified after transmission of PPS-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
specified after transmission of PPS-EOP.
13-9
Chapter 13

EOR-NULL, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0772 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-NULL.
specified after transmission of EOR-NULL, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0774 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-NULL.
EOR-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0777 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-MPS.
specified after transmission EOR-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0779 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-MPS.
EOR-EOM, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0782 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOM.
specified after transmission of EOR-EOM, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0784 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOM.
EOR-EOP, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##0787 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.
specified after transmission of EOR-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##0789 [Tx] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.
##0790 [Rx] at time of ECM reception, ERR is transmitted after transmission of EOR-Q.
##0791 [Tx/Rx] while ECM mode procedure is under way, a signal other than a meaningful signal
is received.
##0792 [Rx] at time of ECM reception, PPS-NULL cannot be detected over partial page
processing.
##0793 [Rx] at time of ECM reception, no effective frame is received while high-speed signal
reception is under way, thus causing time-out.
##0794 [Tx] at time of ECM reception, PPR with all 0s is received.
##0795 [Tx/Rx] a fault has occurred in code processing for communication.
13-10
Chapter 14 Service Mode
Contents
Contents
14.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................ 14-1

14.1.1 Outline of Service Mode ......................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Using the Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Default settings............................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.1 Service Mode Menus............................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.3 Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW) ........................................................................................................................ 14-7
14.3.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.3.1.1 Bit Switch Composition ................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.3.2 SSSW-SW01 ........................................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.3.2.1 List of Functions............................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.3.2.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 ........................................................................................................... 14-7
14.3.3 SSSW-SW03 ........................................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.3.4 SSSW-SW04 ........................................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.3.5 SSSW-SW05 ........................................................................................................................................... 14-8
14.3.6 SSSW-SW12 ........................................................................................................................................... 14-9
14.3.7 SSSW-SW13 ........................................................................................................................................... 14-9
14.3.8 SSSW-SW14 ......................................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.3.8.1 List of Functions............................................................................................................................. 14-10
14.3.8.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 2 ......................................................................................................... 14-10
14.3.9 SSSW-SW28 ......................................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.3.10 SSSW-SW30 ....................................................................................................................................... 14-11
14.3.10.1 List of Functions........................................................................................................................... 14-11
Contents
14.3.10.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 5........................................................................................................14-11

14.3.11 SSSW-SW33........................................................................................................................................14-11
14.3.11.1 List of Functions ...........................................................................................................................14-11
14.3.12 SSSW-SW34........................................................................................................................................14-11
14.3.12.1 List of Functions ...........................................................................................................................14-11
14.4 Setting of Menu Switch (Menu) ...................................................................................................................14-12
14.4.1 Menu Switch Composition ....................................................................................................................14-12
14.4.2 <No.005 NL equalizer> .........................................................................................................................14-12
14.4.3 <No.006 telephone line monitor>..........................................................................................................14-12
14.4.4 <No.007 ATT transmission level> ........................................................................................................14-12
14.4.5 <No.008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit> ......................................................................................14-13
14.4.6 <No.009 V.34 data speed upper limit>..................................................................................................14-13
14.4.7 <No.010 Frequency of the pseudo CI signal> .......................................................................................14-13
14.5 Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.) ....................................................................................14-13
14.5.1 Numerical Parameter Composition........................................................................................................14-13
14.5.2 <002: RTN transmission condition (1)><003: RTN transmission condition (2)><004: RTN transmission
condition (3)> ............................................................................................................................................... 14-13
14.5.3 <005: NCC pause length (pre-ID code)>...............................................................................................14-14
14.5.4 <006: NCC pause length (post-ID code)> .............................................................................................14-14
14.5.5 <010: line connection identification length>.........................................................................................14-14
14.5.6 <011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception)> ....................................................................................................14-14
14.5.7 <013: T.30 EOL timer> .........................................................................................................................14-14
14.5.8 <016: time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover> ........................................................14-14
14.5.9 <017: pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length><018: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length
(short)><019: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (long)>............................................................14-14
14.5.10 <020: pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length><021: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length
(short)><022: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long)>................................................................14-14
14.5.11 <023: CNG detention level for fax/tel switchover> ............................................................................14-14
14.5.12 <024: pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover>................................................. 14-14
14.5.13 <025: Answering machine connection function signal detection time> .............................................14-14
14.5.14 <027: V.21 low-speed flag preamble identification length> ............................................................... 14-14
14.5.15 <056 - 061: Count type select >...........................................................................................................14-14
14.6 Setting of Scanner Functions (SCANNER)..................................................................................................14-17
14.6.1 Setting of Bit Switch..............................................................................................................................14-17
14.6.2 Numeric Parameter Functional configuration .......................................................................................14-18
14.6.3 <024:CIS scan position during ADF scanning>....................................................................................14-18
14.6.4 <026:Distance from the standby position of CIS to the shading start point>........................................14-19
14.6.5 <031Vertical scan start position adjustment>........................................................................................14-19
14.6.6 <032Horizontal scan start position adjustment> ...................................................................................14-19
14.6.7 <033Vertical scan magnification correction> .......................................................................................14-19
14.6.8 <035: - 036:Reader motor speed change> .............................................................................................14-19
14.6.9 <041: Vertical scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)> .........14-19
14.6.10 <042: Horizontal scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)> ...14-19
Contents
14.6.11 <043: Horizontal scan end position correction (copy)>...................................................................... 14-19

14.6.12 <044: Horizontal scan end position correction (superfine)>............................................................... 14-19
14.6.13 <045: Horizontal scan end position correction (fine)> ....................................................................... 14-19
14.6.14 <046: Horizontal scan end position correction (standard)> ................................................................ 14-19
14.6.15 <047: Vertical scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)> ....... 14-19
14.6.16 <048: Horizontal scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>... 14-19
14.6.17 <054: Pickup motor speed correction (when the ADF is used) > ....................................................... 14-20
14.6.18 <193: ADF special standard-sized paper: LGL misidentification-ready> .......................................... 14-20
14.6.19 <194: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR misidentification-ready> .......................................... 14-20
14.6.20 <195: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR_R misidentification-ready>...................................... 14-20
14.6.21 <196: Shading Target Value (Red)> ................................................................................................... 14-20
14.6.22 <197: Shading Target Value (Green)>................................................................................................ 14-20
14.6.23 <198: Shading Target Value (Blue)> .................................................................................................. 14-20
14.7 Setting of Printer Functions (PRINTER) ..................................................................................................... 14-20
14.7.1 Service Soft Switch Settings (PRINTER) ............................................................................................. 14-20
14.7.1.1 SSSW-SW05 .................................................................................................................................. 14-20
14.7.1.1.1 List of Functions...................................................................................................................... 14-20
14.7.1.1.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 .................................................................................................. 14-21
14.7.1.2 SSSW-SW14 .................................................................................................................................. 14-21
14.7.1.3 SSSW-SW15 .................................................................................................................................. 14-22
14.7.2 Numerin Parameter Settings (Numeric Prama.).................................................................................... 14-22
14.7.2.2 <031: Top registration adjustment (manual feed tray)>................................................................. 14-23
14.7.2.3 <032: Top registration adjustment (cassette)> ............................................................................... 14-23
14.7.2.4 <033: Top registration adjustment (duplex unit)> ......................................................................... 14-23
14.7.2.5 <034: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray)> ......................................................... 14-23
14.7.2.6 <035: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)>..................................................................... 14-23
14.7.2.10 <039: Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit)> ................................................................ 14-23
14.7.2.11 <040: Target fixing temperature adjustment (manual feed tray)> ............................................... 14-23
14.7.2.12 <041: Target fixing temperature adjustment (cassette 1)>........................................................... 14-23
14.7.2.16 <045: Fixing film speed change (manual feed tray)> .................................................................. 14-24
Contents
14.7.2.17 <046: Fixing film speed change (cassette)> .................................................................................14-24

14.7.3 Setting of Cassette (CST) ......................................................................................................................14-24
14.7.3.1 Special Standard-sized Paper Compatibility...................................................................................14-24
14.8 Setting of System Functions (SYSTEM)......................................................................................................14-24
14.8.1 Bit Switch Settings ................................................................................................................................ 14-24
14.9 Registration of Accessories (ACC) ..............................................................................................................14-24
14.9.1 Accessory Registration ..........................................................................................................................14-24
14.10 Display of Counter Information (COUNTER) ...........................................................................................14-25
14.10.1 Counters ............................................................................................................................................... 14-25
14.10.2 Clearing Counters ................................................................................................................................ 14-25
14.11 Service Report (REPORT) .........................................................................................................................14-26
14.11.1 Report Output ......................................................................................................................................14-26
14.11.2 System Data List..................................................................................................................................14-26
14.11.3 System Dump List ...............................................................................................................................14-26
14.11.4 Counter List .........................................................................................................................................14-28
14.11.5 Error Log List ......................................................................................................................................14-28
14.11.6 Spec List ..............................................................................................................................................14-30
14.11.7 Service Label .......................................................................................................................................14-31
14.12 Download (DOWNLOAD) ........................................................................................................................14-32
14.12.1 Download.............................................................................................................................................14-32
14.13 Initialization of Set Value (CLEAR) ..........................................................................................................14-32
14.13.1 Clear.....................................................................................................................................................14-32
14.14 Display of ROM Information (ROM).........................................................................................................14-32
14.14.1 ROM display........................................................................................................................................14-32
14.15 Test Mode (TEST) ......................................................................................................................................14-33
14.15.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................14-33
14.15.2 Test Mode Menu List...........................................................................................................................14-33
14.15.3 D-RAM test<(1) D-RAM TEST> .......................................................................................................14-35
14.15.4 Scan Test ((2) SCAN TEST) ............................................................................................................... 14-35
14.15.5 Print Test ((3) PRINT TEST) ..............................................................................................................14-36
14.15.6 MODEM Test((4) MODEM TEST) ....................................................................................................14-36
14.15.7 Function test ((6) FUNCTION TEST) ................................................................................................14-38
14.15.8 Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN)....................................................................................14-42
Chapter 14
14.1 Outline
14.1.1 Outline of Service Mode

0011-1237
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The items that follow may be checked/set using the machine's service mode, which is designed the way the service mode used in fax machines is designed in terms
of contents and operation.
#SSSW
Use it to register/set basic fax functions (e.g., error control, echo remedy, communication error correction).
Use it to make settings related counter functions.
#MENU
Use it to register/set items related to functions needed at time of installation (e.g., NL equalizer, transmission level).
#NUMERIC PARAMETER
These setting items are for inputting numeric parameters such as the various conditions for the RTN signal transmission.
#SPECIAL
These setting items are for telephone network control functions.
#NCU
These setting items are for telephone network control functions such as the selection signal transmission conditions and the detection conditions, for the control
signals sent from the exchange.
#FAX
Do not use.
#SCAN
These setting items are for image adjustment in scanning.
#PRINT
These setting items are for image adjustment in printer assembly and for special mode for the field-related measures.
#NETWORK
Do not use.
#CODEC
Do not use.
#SYSTEM
These are used for the import/export of user information through USB.
#COUNTER
Use it to check estimates for maintenance/parts replacement.
#REPORT
Use it to generate reports on various service data.
#DOWNLOAD
Use it to download firmware to the ROM of a PCB in question.
#CLEAR
Use it to reset various data to initial settings.
#ROM
Displays ROM information, such as version numbers and checksums.
#TEST MODE
Makes various status checks, such as contact sensor, sensor and print status.
14.1.2 Using the Mode

0011-1721
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14-1
Chapter 14
<Operation at the time of Bit SW> <Operation at the time of Parameter>
AUTO AUTO
TEXT/PHOTO 01 TEXT/PHOTO 01
1) Selecting User Mode 1) Selecting User Mode
Press the User mode key, 2key, 8key, Press the User mode key, 2key, 8key,
User mode key sequentially. User mode key sequentially.
#SSSW #SSSW
2) Selecting a Menu Item

Select the Menu item using the
2) Press the OK key. left/right arrow key.
#SSSW #NUMERIC Param.
001 000000000
3) Selecting a Menu Item
Press the OK key. Or, press
the keypad after pushing # key.
#NUMERIC Param.
001 0
#SSSW
033 000000000
4) Selecting a Prarameter
Select the Prarameter using the
4) Selecting a Bit Switch
left/right arrow key.
Select the bit using the
left/right arrow key. #NUMERIC Param.
002 0
#SSSW
033 000000000 5) Registering/Setting Data
5) Registering/Setting Data Enter data using the keypad,
Enter data using the keypad, and press the OK key.
and press the OK key. #3 NUMER I C P a r am.
002 10
#SSSW
033 000000001 6) Press the Stop key or User
6) Press the Stop key or User mode key to end service mode.
mode key to end service mode.
F-14-1
14.2 Default settings
14.2.1 Service Mode Menus

0011-1722
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
#SSSW
No. Initial setting Function
SW01 0 error/copy control
SW02 not used
SW03 0 echo remedy setting
SW04 10000000 communication fault remedy setting
SW05 0 standard function (DIS signal) setting
SW06 - SW11 not used
SW12 10 page timer setting
SW13 0 meter/inch resolution setting
SW14 1 inch/meter resolution setting
SW28 0 V.8/V.34 protocol settings
SW29 not used
SW30 00000000(JPN)/ Assigning a New Dial Tone Detection Method
00000011(EURO)/
00000001(Other country/region)
SW31- SW32 not used
SW33 0 counter function settings
SW34 1 waste toner full display setting
#MENU
No. Initial setting Range of Function
setting
01: - 04: not used
05: 0 ON/OFF NL equalizer setting
14-2
Chapter 14
#MENU
setting
06: 0 0: DIAL line monitor setting
1: SERVICEMAN [1]
2: SERVICEMAN [2]
3: OFF
07: 10 0-15 transmission level setting
08: 0 0: 3429 V.34 baud rate
1: 3200
2: 3000
3: 2800
4: 2743
5: 2400
09: 0 0: 33.6kbs V.34 transmission speed
1: 31.2kbs
2: 28.8kbs
3: 26.4kbs
4: 24.0kbs
5: 21.6kbs
6: 19.2kbs
7: 16.8kbs
8: 14.4kbs
9: 12.0kbs
10: 9.6kbs
11: 7.2kbs
12: 4.8kbs
13: 2.4kbs
10: 1 0: 50Hz pseudo CI signal frequency setting
1: 25Hz
2: 17Hz
11: - 20: not used
#NUMERIC Param.
No. Initial setting Range of setting Function
001: not used
002: 10 (10%) (1 - 99) RTN signal transmission condition (1) setting
003: 15 (15lines) (2 - 9) RTN signal transmission condition (2) setting
004: 12 (12times) (1 - 99) RTN signal transmission condition (3) setting
005: 4 (4sec) (1 - 60) NCC pause time (pre-ID code) setting
006: 4 (4sec) (1 - 60) NCC pause time (post-ID code) setting
007: - 009: not used
010: 5500 (55sec) (0 - 9999) line connection identification time length
011: 3500 (35sec) (0 - 9999) T.30 T1 timer (for reception)
012: not used
013: 1300 (13sec) (500 - 3000) T30 EOL timer
014: not used
015: 120 (1200ms) (0 - 999) hooking detection time setting
016: 4 (4sec) (0 - 9) fax/tel switch-over function: between line acquisition and pseudo RBTtransmission
017: 100 (1000ms) (0 - 999) pseudo RBT signal pattern: ON time setting
018: 0 (0ms) (0 - 999) pseudo RBT signal pattern: OFF time (short) setting
019: 200 (2000ms) (0 - 999) pseudo RBT signal pattern: OFF time (long) setting
020: 100 (1000ms) (0 - 999) pseudo CI signal pattern: ON time setting
021: 0 (0ms) (0 - 999) pseudo CI signal pattern: OFF time (short) setting
022: 200 (2000ms) (0 - 999) pseudo CI signal pattern: OFF time (long) setting
023: 4 (0 - 7) fax/tel switch-over pseudo RBT transmission level
024: 20 (-20dBm) (0 - 20) fax/tel switch-over pseudo RBT transmission level
025: 60 (60sec) (0 - 999) pseudo RBT signal pattern: OFF time (long) setting
026: not used
027: 0 (0 - 20) V21 low-speed flag preamble detection time length
028: - 055: not used
056: 101 (0 - 999) count type select 1
062: - 080: not used
#SPECIAL Do not change.

#NCU Do not change.
#FAX Not used.
14-3
Chapter 14
#SCAN
No. Initial setting Range setting Explanation
#SCAN SW SW1 00000000 Outputting an Image for ADF Squareness Adjsutment
SW2 - SW50 Not used
#SCAN 001: - 023: Not used
NUMERIC 024: 385 300 to 450, one CIS scan position during ADF scanning.
unit=0.1mm
026: 22 6 to 48, one Distance from the standby position of CIS to the shading start point.
unit=0.1mm
027: - 030: Not used
031: 35 0 to 70, one Vertical scan start position adjustment
unit=0.1mm
032: 115 50 to 150, one Horizontal scan start position adjustment
unit=0.1mm
033: 16 0 to 32, one Vertical scan magnification correction
unit=0.1%
034: Not used
035: - 036: 474 Reader motor speed adjustment
037: - 040: Not used
041: 35 0 to 70, one Vertical scan start position adjustment (scanning on ADF)
unit=0.1mm
042: 220 170 to 270, one Horizontal scan start position adjustment (scanning on ADF)
unit=0.1mm
043: 24 0 to 200, one Horizontal scan end position correction (copy)
unit=0.1mm
044: 36 0 to 200, one Horizontal scan end position correction (superfine)
unit=0.1mm
045: 47 0 to 200, one Horizontal scan end position correction (fine)
unit=0.1mm
046: 47 0 to 200, one Horizontal scan end position correction (standard)
unit=0.1mm
047: 16 0 to 32, one Vertical scan magnification correction (scanning on ADF)
unit=0.1%
048: 16 0 to 32, one Horizontal scan magnification correction (scanning on ADF)
unit=0.1%
049: - 053: Not used
054: 16 0 to 32, one Pickup motor speed correction (when the ADF is used)
unit=0.1%
055: - 192: Not used
193: 0 0: LEGAL ADF special paper, standardized size: LGL misidentification-ready
1: FOOLSCAP
2: M_OFFICIO
3: A_FOOLSCAP
4: FOLIO
5: G_LEGAL
6: A_OFFICIO
7: B_OFFICIO
194: 0 0: LTR ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR misidentification-ready
1: G_LTR
2: A_LTR
195: 0 0: LTR_R ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR_R misidentification-ready
1: FOOLSCAP
2: OFFICIO
3: E_OFFICIO
4: G_LTR_R
5: A_LTR_R
196: 272 0 to 511 shading target value (red)
197: 272 0 to 511 shading target value (green)
198: 272 0 to 511 shading target value (blue)
199: - 350: Not used
#PRINT
#PRINT SW SW01 - SW04 Not used
SW05 10000000 Horizontal scanning priority record
SW06 - SW13 Not used
SW14 00000000 Special mode setting
SW15 00000000 Delivery setting
SW16 - SW50 Not used
14-4
Chapter 14
#PRINT
#PRINT 01: - 30: Not used
NUMERIC 31: 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 Top registration adjustment (manual paper feed tray)
mm
32: 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 Top registration adjustment (cassette)
mm
33: 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 Top registration adjustment (duplex unit)
mm
34: 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 Left-end registration adjustment (manual paper feed tray)
mm
35: 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)
mm
mm
mm
mm
39: 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit)
mm
40: 6 -30 to 0, 1 unit = 5 deg C Target fixing temperature adjustment (multi)
41: 6 -30 to 0, 1 unit = 5 deg C Target fixing temperature adjustment (cassette 1)
45: 15 0 to 30, 1 unit = 0.4% Fixing film speed adjustment (manual paper feed tray)
46: 15 0 to 30, 1 unit = 0.4% Fixing film speed adjustment (cassette)
47: - 50: Not used
#PRINT CST U1 0 0: G_LTR Paper size group U1 special, standard-size paper entry
29: A-LTR
31: G-LTR
40: 8K
U2 0 0: FLSP Paper size group U2 special, standard-size paper entry
24: FLSP
26: OFI
27: E-OFI
28: B-OFI
36: A-OFI
37: M-OFII
39: 16K
U3 0 0: G-LGL Paper size group U3 special, standard-size paper entry
25: AFLS
32: GLTRR
30: ALTRR
35: FORIO
34: G-LGL
#NETWORK Not used.

#CODEC Not used.
#SYSTEM
setting
#SYSTEM SW SW01- SW02 not used
SW03 00001000 Import/export of the user information via USB
#SYSTEM 001: -100: not used
NUMERIC
#ACC
Item Initial setting Range of setting Function
CARD 0 0 - 99999 Card reader installation setting
CC-SPSW 0 0 or 1 Control card I/F support setting
COIN 0 0 or 1 Coin vendor change setting
CONTROL 0 0 or 1 Pinter output control setting at the time of support of control card I/F
14-5
Chapter 14
#COUNTER
Item Function
TOTAL total counter
PICK_UP pickup-related counter
FEEDER feeder counter
JAM jam-related counter
MISC other counter
DRBL-1 durables counter
#REPORT
Setting Function
#REPORT SW Not used
#REPORT OUTPUT SERVICE DATA LIST Output of service data list
SYSTEM DATA LIST Output of system data list
SYSTEM DUMP LIST Output of system dump list
COUNTER LIST Output of counter list
ERROR LOG LIST Output of error log list
SPEC LIST Output of spec list
SERVICE LABEL Output of service label
#REPORT NUMERIC Not used
#DOWNLOAD Download mode
#CLEAR
Item Level2 Function
TEL & USER DATA Use it to clear all areas under user registration/setting.
SERVICE DATA Use it to clear the counters (numerator), date, and start
data form the system dump list.
COUNTER Use it to clear the maintenance/parts counter data and each mode counter data.
SOFT-CNT Not used.
TYPE Use it to clear the user data and the service data by specified settings.
HST ACTIVITY Use it to clear the contents of the communications control
report.
ACCOUNT Use it to clear each print history.
JAM Use it to clear the contents of the jam history.
ERR Use it to clear the contents of the error (E code) history.
ALARM Use it to clear the contents of the alarm history.
CARD Use it to clear the control cars error data.
ERR E355 Not used.
E719 Use it to clear the management information at the time of card reader removal.
PWD Use it to clear the system administrator's password.
ALL Use it to clear all settings/registration data except the
counter (denominator, numerator).
#ROM
Item Function
MAIN Use it to indicate the version of the ROM (SYSTEM) on the image processor PCB.
MAIN2 Use it to indicate the version of the ROM (BOOT) on the image processor PCB.
OPROM Use it to indicate the version of option ROM.
ECONT Use it to indicate the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB.
#TEST MODE [1] - [9]

Item Function
(1) DRAM [1] - [2] Data check in D-RAM
(2) SCAN TEST [1] - [8] CS automatic correction and document scan position adjustment
(3) PRINT TEST [1] - [9] Output of test prints
(4) MODEM TEST [1] - [9] modem/NCU related tests
(5) AGING TEST not used
(6) FACULTY TEST [1] - [9] Various functional tests
(0) ROLLER CLEAN Printer and ADF roller cleaning
14-6
Chapter 14
14.3 Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW)
14.3.1 Outline
14.3.1.1 Bit Switch Composition

0011-1732
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The items registered and set by each of these switches comprise 8-bit switches. The figure below shows which numbers are assigned to which bits. Each bit has a
value of either 0 or 1.
t2
t1
t7
t6
t5
t4
t3
t0
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
Bi
#SSSW
001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F-14-2
Do not change service data identified as "not used"; they are set as initial settings.
14.3.2 SSSW-SW01
14.3.2.1 List of Functions

0011-1735
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-1
Bit Function 1 0
0 service error code output not output
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
14.3.2.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 0
0011-1736
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Selects whether or not service error codes are output.
When output is selected, service error codes is report.
14.3.3 SSSW-SW03

0011-1737
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-2
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 tonal signal before CED signal transmission transmit do not transmit
0011-1738
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to enable/disable transmission of a 1080-Hz tonal signal before transmission of the CED signal.
Select 'transmit' if errors occur frequently because of an echo when reception is from overseas.
Memo:
Any of the following error code may be indicated because of an echo at time of reception
##0005, ##0101, ##0106, ##0107, ##0114, ##0200, ##0201, ##0790
14.3.4 SSSW-SW04

0011-1739
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14-7
Chapter 14
T-14-3
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 the number of final flag sequences of protocol signals 2 1
3 Reception mode after CFR signal transmission high speed high speed/low speed
4 the length of the period of ignoring low speed signals after 1500 ms 700 ms
CFR output
5 not used - -
6 CNG signal for manual transmission Not transmitted Transmitted
7 CED signal for manual reception Not transmitted Transmitted
0011-1740
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to select the number of last flag sequences for a protocol signal (transmission speed at 300 bps). Select '2' if the other party fails to receive the protocol signal
properly.
Memo:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of transmission
##0100, ##0280, ##0281, ##0750, ##0753, ##0754, ##0755, ##0758, ##0759, ##0760, ##0763 ##0764, ##0765, ##0768, ##0769,##0770, ##0773, ##0775, ##0778,
##0780, ##0783, ##0785, ##0788

0011-1741
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to select an appropriate reception mode after transmission of the CFR signal.
If errors occur frequently at time of reception because of the condition of the line, select 'high speed' for reception mode and, at the same time, selects 'do not receive'
for 'ECM reception.'
Memo:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of line condition
##0107, ##0114, ##0201
Be sure to change bit 4 before changing this bit; if errors still occur, change this bit.
When 'high speed' is selected, only high-speed signals (images) will be received after transmission of the CFR signal.

0011-1742
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Use it to select the time length during which low-speed signals are ignored after transmission of the CFR signal.
If the condition of the line is not good and, therefore, the reception of image signals is difficult, select '1500 ms.'

0011-1743
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Selects whether or not to transmit CNG signal during manual transmission.
In manual transmitting to a fax with the FAX/TEL switching mode, if there are frequent errors due to failure to switch to fax mode, select "Transmitted" for the
CNG signal.

0011-1744
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Selects whether or not to transmit CED signals during manual reception. If the other fax does not transmit even when you start manual reception, select "Transmit-
ted" for the CED signal.
14.3.5 SSSW-SW05

0011-1745
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-4
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 Conversion from mm to inch (text mode) convert do not convert
2 Conversion from mm to inch (text/photo mode) convert do not convert
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
0011-1746
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to enable/disable millimeter/inch conversion in sub scanning direction for images read in text mode.
Scanning direction in conversion follows the Bit 2 setting of SW14.
14-8
Chapter 14

0011-1747
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to enable/disable millimeter/inch conversion in sub scanning direction for images read in text/photo mode while bit 1 is set to '1'.
14.3.6 SSSW-SW12

0011-1748
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-5
Bit Function 1 0
0 Time-out period for one page upon transmission 1 0
1 Time-out period for one page upon transmission 1 0
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 Time-out period for one page upon reception 1 0
5 Time-out period for one page upon reception 1 0
6 not used - -
7 Respective page timer settings for transmission and for enable do not enable
reception
The machine will stop the ongoing communication if the transmission/reception of a single original page takes 32 min or more. To use the timer for a purpose other
than this function, refer to the tables that follow, and select an appropriate time length.
When 'do not enable' is selected using bit 7, the time-out length for a single page for all modes will depend on the setting of bit 0 and bit 1.
T-14-6
Time-Out Length for Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Transmission/Reception
8 min 0 * * * * * 0 0
16 min 0 * * * * * 0 1
32 min 0 * * * * * 1 0
64 min 0 * * * * * 1 1
T-14-7
Transmission (in text
mode)
8 min 1 * * * * * 0 0
16 min 1 * * * * * 0 1
32 min 1 * * * * * 1 0
64 min 1 * * * * * 1 1
T-14-8
Reception
8 min 1 * 0 0 * * * *
16 min 1 * 0 1 * * * *
32 min 1 * 1 0 * * * *
64 min 1 * 1 1 * * * *
14.3.7 SSSW-SW13

0011-1749
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-9
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 Convert "inch" into "mm" when transmitting the received convert do not convert
image data
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
0011-1750
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
It converts "inch" into "mm" when transmitting the received image data.
14-9
Chapter 14
14.3.8 SSSW-SW14

0011-1751
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-10
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 direction of scanning for inch/mm conversion both main and sub sub scanning
scanning directions direction only
3 not used - -
4 inch-configuration resolution declaration declare do not declare
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
0011-1752
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to specify whether to convert or not convert an inch-configuration resolution into a millimeter-configuration resolution for image read in G3 transmission:
either in sub scanning direction only or in both main and sub scanning directions. The setting is valid only when bit 1 of SW05 of #SSSW is set to '1'.

0011-1753
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to specify whether to declare or not declare an inch-configuration resolution to the other machine for G3 communication: if 'declare' is selected, the machine
will indicate that it reads and records at an inch-configuration resolution using the DIS, DCS, or DTC signal.
14.3.9 SSSW-SW28

0011-1754
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-11
Bit Function 1 0
0 Caller V.8 protocol NO YES
1 Called party V.8 protocol NO YES
2 Caller V.8 protocol late start NO YES
3 Called party V.8 protocol late start NO YES
4 V.34 reception fallback Prohibited Not prohibited
5 V.34 transmission fallback Prohibited Not prohibited
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
0011-1755
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to use the V.8 protocol when calling. If NO is selected, the V.8 protocol is inhibited at calling and the V.21 protocol is used.

0011-1756
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to use the V.8 protocol when called. If NO is selected, the V8 protocol is inhibited when called and the V.21 protocol is used.

0011-1757
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
If ANSam signal is not received during transmission, select whether to use the V.8 protocol when the other fax machine declares the V.8 protocol in DIS signal. If
NO is selected, the CI signal is not transmitted and the V.8 protocol is not used even if the DIS that specifies the V.8 protocol is received.
The V.8 late start is not executed during manual transmission regardless of this setting.

0011-1758
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to declare the V.8 protocol in DIS signal for reception. If NO is selected, the V.8 protocol cannot be used because it is not declared in DIS signal.
The V.8 late start is not executed during manual reception regardless of this setting.

0011-1759
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Select whether the receiver falls back during V.34 reception. If 'Prohibit' is selected, the receiver does not fall back.

0011-1760
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether the transmitter falls beck during V.34 transmission. If 'Prohibit' is selected, teh transmitter does not fall back.
14-10
Chapter 14
14.3.10 SSSW-SW30

0011-3590
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-12
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 New dial tone detection method Detect with the new Detect with the
method. existing method.
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -
0011-3592
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
When "Detect with the new method" is selected, tone is detected for 3.5 seconds before call origination in order to discriminate between dial tone and voice. If dial
tone is detected and the time since line seizure is 3.5 seconds or longer, call origination takes place immediately. If the time since line seizure is less than 3.5 seconds,
call origination takes place after waiting for 1 second. (If the time since line seizure reaches 3.5 seconds during the 1-second waiting period, call origination takes
place immediately. By default, "Detect with a new method" is assigned for this SW.
14.3.11 SSSW-SW33

0011-1761
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-13
Bit Function 1 0
0 count B4 (Print) as large size Yes No
1 indicate serial No. on counter check screen Yes No
2 count B4 (Scan) as large size Yes No
3 the counter display type change in Japan Yes No
4 not used - -
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
0011-1762
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to specify whether B4 paper (Print) should be counted as large-size paper.

If 'yes' is selected, B4 paper will be counted as large-size paper.
If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, B4 paper will be counted as small-size paper.

0011-1763
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to specific whether to indicate the machine serial No. on the Counter Check screen, appearing when the Counter key is pressed.
If 'yes' is selected, the serial No. will be indicated.
If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, the serial No. will not be indicated.

0011-1764
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to specify whether B4 paper (Scan) should be counted as large-size paper.

If 'yes' is selected, B4 paper will be counted as large-size paper.
If 'no' is selected, on the other hand, B4 paper will be counted as small-size paper.

0011-1765
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to switch the counter display type in effect in Japan to the conventional or new type. Select "Yes" to display counters in the new type. Select "No"
to display counters in the conventional type.
14.3.12 SSSW-SW34

0011-1766
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-14
Bit Function 1 0
0 Display the waste toner full YES NO
warning
14-11
Chapter 14
Bit Function 1 0
1 Switch the waste toner full Drum replacement required E019 displayed on an service
warning message displayed on an call
operator call
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -
The default setting of this SSSW varies depending on the destination of the product.
Product for Japan: 00000000
Product for countries in Euro zone: 00000011
Products for other countries/regions: 00000001

0011-3594
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
You can select whether a waste toner full warning is to be displayed.

When "1" is selected, a waste toner full warning is displayed.
When "0" is selected, a waste toner full warning is not displayed.

0011-1767
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to display the waste toner full warning as a drum replacement required message or as E019 displayed on an operator call. Select 1 to display a rum
replacement required message on an operator call. Select 0 to display E019 on an service call.
14.4 Setting of Menu Switch (Menu)
14.4.1 Menu Switch Composition

0011-1768
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-15
No. Function Range of settings

005 NL equalizer 1: ON, 0: OFF
006 telephone line monitor 0:DIAL, 1:SERVICEMAN1, 2:SERVICEMAN2, 3:OFF
007 transmission level (ATT) from 0 to 15 (ex: 15= -15 dBm)
008 V.34 modulation speed upper 0:3429, 1:3200, 2:3000, 3:2800, 4:2743, 5:2400
limit
009 V34 data speed upper limit 0:33.6 kbps, 1:31.2 kbps, 2:28.8 kbps, 3:26.4 kbps, 4:24.0 kbps,
5:21.6 kbps, 6:19.2 kbps, 7:16.8 kbps, 8:14.4 kbps, 9:12.0 kbps,
10:9.6 kbps, 11:7.2 kbps, 12:4.8 kbps, 13:2.4 kbps
010 Frequency of pseudoring signal 0:50 Hz, 1:25 Hz, 2:17 Hz
14.4.2 <No.005 NL equalizer>
0011-1770
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to enable-disable the NL equalizer.

If errors occur often during communication because of the condition of the line, enable (ON) the NL equalizer.
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of transmission because of the line condition:
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
14.4.3 <No.006 telephone line monitor>

0011-1771
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to s the telephone line monitor function:

DIAL: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker from the start of transmission to DIS.
SERVICEMAN [1]: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker from the start of communication to the end of it.
SERVICEMAN [2]: generate the monitor sound of the telephone line2 (Option).
OFF: do not generate the monitor sound of the telephone line using the speaker.
14.4.4 <No.007 ATT transmission level>

0011-1772
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set the transmission level (ATT).

Raise the transmission level if errors occur frequently at time of communication because of the condition of the line. (It means close to 8)
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760, ##762, ##764, ##765,
##767, ##769, ##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782, ##784, ##785, ##787, ##789
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of the line condition:
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
14-12
Chapter 14
14.4.5 <No.008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit>

0011-1773
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set an upper limit to the modulation speed (baud rate) for the V.34 primary channel.
14.4.6 <No.009 V.34 data speed upper limit>

0011-1774
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set an upper limit to the data transmission speed for the V.34 primary channel between 2.4K and 33.6K bps in increments of 2400 bps. (0: 2.4K to 13:
33.6K bps).
14.4.7 <No.010 Frequency of the pseudo CI signal>

0011-1775
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
You may select a frequency for the pseudo CI signal.

Some types of external telephones do not ring when the fax/tel switch-over function is ON. To sound the ring, change the pseudo CI signal.
14.5 Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.)
14.5.1 Numerical Parameter Composition

0011-1777
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-16
No. Item Range of settings

002 RTN transmission condition(1) 1% to 99%
003 RTN transmission condition (2) 2 to 99 item
004 RTN transmission condition (3) 1 to 99 lines
005 NCC pause time length (pre-ID code) 1 to 60 sec
006 NCC pause time length (post-ID code) 1 to 60 sec
010 line condition identification time length 0 to 9999 (10 msec)
011 T.30T1 timer (for reception) 0 to 9999 (10 msec)
013 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3000 (10 msec)
015 hooking detection time length 0 to 999
016 time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover 0 to 9
017 pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length 0 to 999
018 pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999
(short)
019 pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999
(long)
020 pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length 0 to 999
021 pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length 0 to 999
(short)
022 pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long) 0 to 999
023 CNG detection level at time of fax/tel switchover 0 to 7
024 pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover 10 to 20
0 to 20 (120/230V)
025 Answering machine connection function signal detection 0 to 999
time
027 preamble detection time length for V21 low-speed flag 20 (x 10ms)
056 display the type of soft counter 1 101 (Fixed)
057 Display the type of soft counter 2 0 to 999
14.5.2 <002: RTN transmission condition (1)><003: RTN transmission condition (2)><004: RTN transmission condition (3)>
0011-1788
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set RTN signal transmission conditions. Raise these parameters for more lenient conditions if errors occur frequently at time of reception because of trans-
mission of the RTN signal.
Memo:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated at time of reception because of RTN signal transmission
##0104, ##0107, ##0114, ##0201
RTN signal transmission condition (1) affects the ratio of error lines to the total number of lines per single page of received images.
RTN signal transmission condition (2) affects the standard value (*2) of burst errors (*1).
RTN signal condition (3) affects the number of errors not reaching the standard value of burst errors.
*1: transmission error occurring cover several lines.

*2: for instance, if '15' is set, a single burst error will represent an error occurring continuously cover 15 lines.
If any of these lines is detected while an image signal is being received, the RTN signal will be transmitted after receiving the protocol signal of the transmitting
party. Higher parameters restrict the transmission of the RTN signal.
14-13
Chapter 14
14.5.3 <005: NCC pause length (pre-ID code)>

0011-1789
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set the length of the pause automatically entered between access code and ID code when the NCC (New Common Carrier) line is used for dialing.
14.5.4 <006: NCC pause length (post-ID code)>

0011-1790
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set the length of the pause automatically entered between ID code and telephone number of the other party when the NCC (New Common Carrier) line is
used for dialing.
14.5.5 <010: line connection identification length>

0011-1791
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set the time for identifying the line connection. Raise this parameter if errors occur frequently at time of communication because of the condition of the line.
Memo:
Any of the following error codes may be indicated because of the condition of the line
##0005, ##0018
The line condition identification time is between when the dial signal is transmitted and when the line condition is cut for the transmitting party, while it is between
when the DIS signal is transmitted and when the line is cut for the receiving party.
14.5.6 <011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception)>

0011-1792
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Set the T1 timer for the receiver (wait time after DIS transmission starts until a significant signal is received).
14.5.7 <013: T.30 EOL timer>

0011-1793
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Set it so that the 1-line transmission time is longer for reception to prevent reception errors caused by a long data length per line (e.g., computer FAX).
14.5.8 <016: time length to first response at time of fax/tel switchover>

0011-1795
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Allows setting of the time from seizing the line till pseudo RBT is sent, when the Fax/ Tel switching function is operating.
14.5.9 <017: pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time length><018: pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (short)><019:
pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time length (long)>
0011-1796
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set the pattern of the pseudo RBT signal transmitted at time of a fax/tel switchover.
14.5.10 <020: pseudo CI signal pattern ON time length><021: pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (short)><022:
pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time length (long)>
0011-1797
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set the pseudo CI signal pattern transmitted at time of a fax/tel switchover.
14.5.11 <023: CNG detention level for fax/tel switchover>

0011-1798
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set the CNG detention level for a fax/tel switchover.
14.5.12 <024: pseudo RBT transmission level at time of fax/tel switchover>

0011-1799
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to set the pseudo transmission level for a fax/tel switchover.
14.5.13 <025: Answering machine connection function signal detection time>

0011-1800
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Sets the signal detection time for the answering machine connection function operation. When the answering machine connection function is operating, if the func-
tion does not operate normally because the fax does not detect CNG signal sent from the line, raise this parameter to increase the signal detection time.
14.5.14 <027: V.21 low-speed flag preamble identification length>

0011-1801
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to detect the time of detection after which command analysis is started after detecting V.21 low-speed command preambles continuously for a specific period
of time.
14.5.15 <056 - 061: Count type select >

0011-1858
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to confirm the count type indicated on the Counter Check screen, which appears in response to a press on the Counter key.
When '0' is selected, count type will not be indicated.
No.56: Use it to indicate the type of software counter 1 of the control panel. The type of soft counter 1 cannot be changed.
No.57: Use it to change the type of soft counter 2* of the control panel to suit the needs of the user.
14-14
Chapter 14
*:The default type settings of soft counter is different from models.
<Soft Counter Specifications>
The soft counters are classified a follows in terms of input numbers:
100s: total
200s: copy
300s: print
400s: copy + print
500s: scan
700s: received file print
800s: report pint
900s: transmitted scan
Guide to the Table

- 1:Count sheets of all sizes by one.
- 2:Count sheets of the large size by two.
- C:full color
- Bk:black mono
- L:large size (larger than A4/LTR)
- S:small size (A4/LTR or smaller)
MEMO:
To make a change so that B4 papers (for print) will be counted as large-size, use service mode: make the following selections, and change bit 0 to '1': #SSSW>SW33.
To make a change so that B4 papers (for scan) will be counted as large-size, use service mode: make the following selections, and change bit 2 to '1': #SSSW>SW33.
Seri Counter type Print system

al Bk 1-sided L Bk 1-sided S Bk 2-sided L Bk 2-sided S
No.
on Local PDL FAX Repo Local PDL FAX Repo Local PDL FAX Repo Local PDL FAX Repo
cou copy print print rt copy print print rt copy print print rt copy print print rt
nter print print print print
chec
k
scre
en
101 Total1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
102 Total2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
103 Total (L) 1 1 1 1
104 Total (S) 1 1 1 1
108 Total (Bk1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
109 Total (Bk2) 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
112 Total (Bk/L) 1 1 1 1
113 Total (Bk/S) 1 1 1 1
114 Total1 (2-sided) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
115 Total2 (2-sided) 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
116 L (2-sided) 1 1 1 1
117 S (2-sided) 1 1 1 1
126 TotalA1 1 1 1 1 1 1
127 TotalA2 2 2 2 1 1 1
128 TotalA (L) 1 1 1
129 TotalA (S) 1 1 1
132 TotalA (Bk1) 1 1 1 1 1 1
133 TotalA (Bk2) 2 2 2 1 1 1
136 TotalA (Bk/L) 1 1 1
137 TotalA (Bk/S) 1 1 1
138 TotalA1 (2-sided) 1 1 1 1 1 1
139 TotalA2 (2-sided) 2 2 2 1 1 1
140 L A (2-sided) 1 1 1
141 S A (2-sided) 1 1 1
150 TotalB1 1 1 1 1 1 1
151 TotalB2 2 2 2 1 1 1
152 TotalB (L) 1 1 1
153 TotalB (S) 1 1 1
156 TotalB (Bk1) 1 1 1 1 1 1
157 TotalB (Bk2) 2 2 2 1 1 1
160 TotalB (Bk/L) 1 1 1
161 TotalB (Bk/S) 1 1 1
162 TotalB1 (2-sided) 1 1 1 1 1 1
163 TotalB2 (2-sided) 2 2 2 1 1 1
164 LB (2-sided) 1 1 1
165 SB (2-sided) 1 1 1
201 Copy(Total1) 1 1
202 Copy(Total2) 2 1
203 Copy(L) 1
14-15
Chapter 14

No.
chec
k
scre
en
204 Copy(S) 1
205 CopyA (Total1) 1 1
206 CopyA (Total2) 2 1
207 CopyA (L) 1
208 CopyA (S) 1
209 Local copy(Total1) 1 1
210 Local copy(Total2) 2 1
211 Local copy(L) 1
212 Local copy(S) 1
221 Copy(Bk1) 1 1
222 Copy(Bk2) 2 1
227 Copy(Bk/L) 1
228 Copy(Bk/S) 1
237 Copy(Bk/L/2-sided) 1
238 Copy(Bk/S/2-sided) 1
249 CopyA (Bk1) 1 1
250 CopyA (Bk2) 2 1
255 CopyA (Bk/L) 1
256 CopyA (Bk/S) 1
265 CopyA (Bk/L/2-sided) 1
266 CopyA (Bk/S/2-sided) 1
277 Local copy(Bk1) 1 1
278 Local copy(Bk2) 2 1
283 Local copy(Bk/L) 1
284 Local copy(Bk/S) 1
293 Local copy(Bk/L/2-sided) 1
294 Local copy(Bk/S/2-sided) 1
301 Print (Total1) 1 1 1 1
302 Print (Total2) 2 2 1 1
303 Print (L) 1 1
304 Print (S) 1 1
305 PrintA (Total1) 1 1 1 1
306 PrintA (Total2) 2 2 1 1
307 PrintA (L) 1 1
308 PrintA (S) 1 1
313 Print (Bk1) 1 1 1 1
314 Print (Bk2) 2 2 1 1
319 Print (Bk/L) 1 1
320 Print (Bk/S) 1 1
329 Print (Bk/L 1 1
330 Print (Bk/S/2-sided) 1 1
331 PDL print (Total1) 1 1
332 PDL print (Total2) 2 1
333 PDL print (L) 1
334 PDL print (S) 1
339 PDL print (Bk1) 1 1
340 PDL print (Bk2) 2 1
345 PDL print (Bk/L) 1
346 PDL print (Bk/S) 1
355 PDL print (Bk/L/2-sided) 1
356 PDL print (Bk/S) 1
403 Copy+Print (Bk/L) 1 1 1
404 Copy+Print (Bk/S) 1 1 1
405 Copy+Print (Bk2) 2 2 2 1 1 1
406 Copy+Print (Bk1) 1 1 1 1 1 1
411 Copy+Print (L) 1 1 1
412 Copy+Print (S) 1 1 1
413 Copy+Print (2) 2 2 2 1 1 1
414 Copy+Print (1) 1 1 1 1 1 1
14-16
Chapter 14

No.
chec
k
scre
en
421 Copy+Print (Bk/L) 1 1 1
422 Copy+Print (Bk/S) 1 1 1
701 Recieved print (Total1)
702 Recieved print (Total2)
703 Recieved print (L)
704 Recieved print (S)
709 Recieved print (Bk1)
710 Recieved print (Bk2)
715 Recieved print (Bk/L)
716 Recieved print (Bk/S)
725 Recieved print (Bk/L/2- 1
sided)
726 Recieved print (Bk/S/2- 1
sided)
801 Report print (Total1)
802 Report print (Total2)
803 Report print (L)
804 Report print (S)
809 Report print (Bk1)
810 Report print (Bk2)
815 Report print (Bk/L)
816 Report print (Bk/S)
825 Report print (Bk/L) 1
826 Report print (Bk/S) 1
Serial Counter type Scan system

No. on Bk 1-sided L Bk 1-sided S Bk 2-sided L Bk 2-sided S
counter
check Total E- FileS E- FileS E- Total Total E- FileS E- E- Total
screen scan mail hare mail hare mail scan scan mail hare mail FileS mail scan
scan DBsc FileS DB FileS scan DB FileS hare FileS
an hare BoxF hare scan hare DB hare
DB scan DB DB scan DB
scan Box scan BOX
scan
501 Scan (Total1) 1 1
505 Bk scan (Total1) 1 1
506 Bk scan (Total2) 2 1
507 Bk scan (L) 1
508 Bk scan (S) 1
509 C scanTotal (1) 1 1
510 C scanTotal (2) 2 1
511 C scan (L) 1
512 C scan (S) 1
915 Transmission scan total2 (C) 1
916 Transmission scan total2 (Bk) 1
917 Transmission scan total3 (C) 1
918 Transmission scanTotal3 (Bk) 1
921 Transmission scanTotal5 (C) 1
929 Transmission scanTotal6 (C) 1
945 Transmission scan/E-mail (C) 1
946 Transmission scan/E-mail (Bk) 1
14.6 Setting of Scanner Functions (SCANNER)
14.6.1 Setting of Bit Switch

0011-3600
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
<SCAN SW SSSW01>
14-17
Chapter 14
T-14-17
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Outputting an Image for ADF Perpendicularity output not output
Adjsutment
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -
Specify whether to output an image for ADF perpendicularity adjustment.
14.6.2 Numeric Parameter Functional configuration

0011-1997
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
No. Function Default Setting range Unit

001: - 023: Not used
024: CIS scan position during ADF scanning. 385 300-450 one unit=0.1mm
025: Not used
026: Distance from the standby position of CIS to the 22 6-48 one unit=0.1mm
shading start point.
027: - 030: Not used
031: Vertical scan start position adjustment 35 0-70 one unit=0.1mm
032: Horizontal scan start position adjustment 115 50-150 one unit=0.1mm
033: Vertical scan magnification correction 16 0-32 one unit=0.1%
034: Not used
035: - 036: Reader motor speed adjustment 474
037: - 040: Not used
041: Vertical scan start position adjustment (scanning 35 0-70 one unit=0.1mm
on ADF)
042: Horizontal scan start position adjustment 220 170-270 one unit=0.1mm
(scanning on ADF)
043: Horizontal scan end position correction (copy) 24 0-200 one unit=0.1mm
044: Horizontal scan end position correction 36 0-200 one unit=0.1mm
(superfine)
045: Horizontal scan end position correction (fine) 47 0-200 one unit=0.1mm
046: Horizontal scan end position correction (standard) 47 0-200 one unit=0.1mm
047: Vertical scan magnification correction (scanning 16 0-32 one unit=0.1%
on ADF)
048: Horizontal scan magnification correction 16 0-32 one unit=0.1%
(scanning on ADF)
049: - 053: Not used
054: Pickup motor speed correction (when the ADF is 16 0-32 one unit=0.1%
used)
055: - 192: Not used
193: ADF special paper, standardized size: LGL 0 0 : LEGAL
misidentification-ready 1 : FOOLSCAP
2 : M_OFFICIO
3 : A_FOOLSCAP
4 : FOLIO
5 : G_LEGAL
6 : A_OFFICIO
7 : B_OFFICIO
194: ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR 0 0 : LTR
misidentification-ready 1 : G_LTR
2 : A_LTR
195: ADF special paper, standardized size: LTR_R 0 0 : LTR_R
misidentification-ready 1 : FOOLSCAP
2 : OFFICIO
3 : E_OFFICIO
4 : G_LTR_R
5 : A_LTR_R
196: shading target value (red) 272 0-511
197: shading target value (green) 272 0-511
198: shading target value (blue) 272 0-511
199: - 350: Not used
If any operation error occurs after changing the setting value, change the setting value to the original one.
14.6.3 <024:CIS scan position during ADF scanning>

0011-3598
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14-18
Chapter 14
This value is used when automatic scan position adjustment (TESTMODE>"2"SCAN TEST>"3"SHEET POS ADJ) fails.
14.6.4 <026:Distance from the standby position of CIS to the shading start point>
0011-2004
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
White shading can be adjusted finely.
Normally, do not change the setting value. If any operation error occurs after changing the setting value, change the setting value to the original one.
14.6.5 <031Vertical scan start position adjustment>

0011-2005
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the position at which vertical scanning of a book starts. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the left-side margin of the image becomes.
14.6.6 <032Horizontal scan start position adjustment>

0011-2007
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a book starts. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the top margin in the image becomes.
14.6.7 <033Vertical scan magnification correction>

0011-2008
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Correct the magnification of vertical scanning of a book. The larger the adjustment value, the more the image stretches in the vertical scanning direction.
14.6.8 <035: - 036:Reader motor speed change>

0011-2010
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Though no market adjustment work needs to be carried out, enter factory defaults at image processor PCB replacement.
14.6.9 <041: Vertical scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
0011-2011
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the position at which vertical scanning of a document fed from the ADF starts. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the left-side margin of the
image becomes.
14.6.10 <042: Horizontal scan start position adjustment (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
0011-2017
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a document fed from the ADF starts. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the top margin of the image
becomes.
14.6.11 <043: Horizontal scan end position correction (copy)>

0011-2020
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a document being copied ends. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the bottom margin of the image
becomes.
14.6.12 <044: Horizontal scan end position correction (superfine)>

0011-2021
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a FAX document scanned in superfine mode ends. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the bottom
margin of the image becomes.
14.6.13 <045: Horizontal scan end position correction (fine)>

0011-2022
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a FAX document scanned in fine mode ends. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the bottom margin
of the image becomes.
14.6.14 <046: Horizontal scan end position correction (standard)>

0011-2024
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the position at which horizontal scanning of a FAX document set to the standard scan resolution ends. The larger the adjustment value, the narrower the
bottom margin of the image becomes.
14.6.15 <047: Vertical scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
0011-2025
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Correct the magnification of vertical scanning of a document fed from the ADF. The larger the adjustment value, the more the image stretches in the vertical scan-
ning direction.
14.6.16 <048: Horizontal scan magnification correction (when scanning on a document fed from ADF)>
0011-2027
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Correct the magnification of horizontal scanning of a document fed from the ADF. The smaller the adjustment value, the more the image stretches in the horizontal
scanning direction.
This menu is used to adjust the ADF feed motor speed. If you changed the adjustment value in this mode, the adjustment value selected for SCAN NUMERIC>54
must also be incremented/decremented by the same amount.
14-19
Chapter 14
Do not change the adjustment value extremely.
14.6.17 <054: Pickup motor speed correction (when the ADF is used) >
0011-2028
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
This menu is used to adjust the ADF pickup motor speed. If you have adjusted the ADF feed motor speed by selecting SCAN NUMERIC>48, the ADF pickup
motor speed must also be incremented/decremented by the same amount.
Do not change the adjustment value extremely.
14.6.18 <193: ADF special standard-sized paper: LGL misidentification-ready>

0011-2048
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Set to use special standard-sized paper that is not otherwise identifiable to the ADF (because it is misidentified as "LEGAL").
0: LEGAL
1: FOOLSCAP
2: M_OFFICIO
3: A_FOOLSCAP
4: FOLIO
5: G_LEGAL
6: A_OFFICIO
7: B_OFFICIO
14.6.19 <194: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR misidentification-ready>

0011-2049
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Set to use special standard-sized paper that is not otherwise identifiable to the ADF (because it is misidentified as "LTR").
0: LTR
1: G_LTR
2: A_LTR
14.6.20 <195: ADF special standard-sized paper: LTR_R misidentification-ready>

0011-2051
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Set to use special standard-sized paper that is not otherwise identifiable to the ADF (because it is misidentified as "LTRR").
0: LTR_R
1: FOOLSCAP
2: OFFICIO
3: E_OFFICIO
4: G_LTR_R
5: A_LTR_R
14.6.21 <196: Shading Target Value (Red)>

0011-3601
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
This is market-related measures taken to improve shadow images generated by a thick original such as a book or a folded or wrinkled original. When taking the
measures, assign the same values for R, G, and B. After changing the values, be sure to turn off the power and turn it on again.
14.6.22 <197: Shading Target Value (Green)>

0011-3602
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14.6.23 <198: Shading Target Value (Blue)>

0011-3603
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14.7 Setting of Printer Functions (PRINTER)
14.7.1 Service Soft Switch Settings (PRINTER)

14.7.1.1 SSSW-SW05
14.7.1.1.1 List of Functions
0011-1861
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-18
Bit Function 1 0
0 not used - -
1 not used - -
2 not used - -
3 not used - -
4 not used - -
14-20
Chapter 14
Bit Function 1 0
5 not used - -
6 not used - -
7 priority on recording in sub scanning direction place do not place
14.7.1.1.2 Detailed Discussions of Bit 7

0011-1862
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to enable/disable placement of priority on recording in sub scanning direction.

T-14-19
place: if B4 recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and an A4 extra-long image
(*) is received, printing will be on the B4 recording paper.
do not place: if B5 horizontal recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and a B4 image is
received, printing will be by division and on B5 horizontal recording paper.
*: Image B4 or shorter and that cannot be printed by division and on A4 recording paper.
14.7.1.2 SSSW-SW14
0011-1884
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-20
Bit Function 1 0
0 Transfer bias pressure reduction mode Enable Disable
1 Developing assembly idling mode Enable Disable
2 Black belt addition mode Enable Disable
3 Post-rotation reduction mode Enable Disable
4 Flicker reduction mode Enable Disable
5 Silent mode Enable Disable
6 Terminal temperature rise noise reduction mode Enable Disable
7 Not used - -
0011-1885
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to enable or disable transfer bias pressure reduction mode.
Select "Enable" to avoid image defects (black spots) produced by transfer bias leaks occurring in a low-pressure region, such as one at a high altitude. This setting
regulates the transfer bias to keep it from exceeding a predetermined level during printing.
0011-1888
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to enable or disable developing assembly idling mode. Select "Enable" to drive the main motor for a specified period of time to apply idling and
developing bias (AC + DC) to prevent the thinning of the image density when the unit is installed or the developing unit is replaced in a low-temperature, low-
humidity region. This mode works only on a new developing assembly and before a toner cartridge is loaded.
0011-1889
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to enable or disable black belt addition mode. If the user uses paper that causes fixed toner on paper to be fused and adhered to drum, selecting
"Yes" will clean the drum by forming a black band on the drum surface during the reverse rotation which is performed after printing on 50 sheets.
Implementation of this mode could result in a drum life falling short of its life expectancy.

0011-1890
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to enable or disable post-rotation reduction mode. Selecting "Enable" will reduce the noise caused by the polygon motor by stopping the motor
immediately after post-rotation.
0011-1891
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to enable or disable flicker reduction mode. Select "Enable" and enter a count to modify fusing temperature control to cancel fluorescent flicking
during printing.
Implementation of this mode would degrade the throughput.
14-21
Chapter 14

0011-1892
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to enable or disable silent mode. Select "Enable" to modify the registration loop amount and thus reduce noises or squeaks the registration rollers
produce after picking paper from the individual paper inlets.
0011-1894
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to enable or disable noise reduction mode during terminal temperature rises. Select "Enable" to start slowdown at a temperature lower than normal
when printing on smaller-sized paper than B4. Slowdown control thus enabled prevents the thermal degradation of the fusing film grease, assuring smooth sliding
among the fixing film, heater and film guide to cut squeaks.
14.7.1.3 SSSW-SW15
0011-1895
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
T-14-21
Bit Function 1 0
0 Inhibit automatic delivery tray replacement while running Enable Disable
jobs
1 Halt stapling job when out of staples Enable Disable
2 Inhibit tray full indication while the stapled document Enable Disable
count is exceeded
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -
0011-1896
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to inhibit automatic delivery tray replacement while running jobs with an inner two-way tray mounted in position. Select "Enable" to inhibit auto-
matic tray replacement.
0011-1897
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to halt stapling job when a finisher installed has run out of staples. Select "Enable" to halt staple jobs when the finisher has run out of staples.
0011-1898
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Select whether to display a tray full message when the maximum allowable stapled document count is exceeded with a finisher installed. Select "Enable" not to
display the message.
14.7.2 Numerin Parameter Settings (Numeric Prama.)

0011-1900
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
No. Function Default Setting range

01: - 30: Not used
31: Top registration adjustment (manual feed tray) 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 mm
32: Top registration adjustment (cassette) 50 0 to 100, one unit = 0.1 mm
33: Top registration adjustment (duplex unit) 50 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 mm
34: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray) 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 mm
35: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1) 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 mm
39: Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit) 100 0 to 200, one unit = 0.1 mm
40: Target fixing temperature adjustment (multi) 6 -30 to 0, one unit = 5 deg C
41: Target fixing temperature adjustment (cassette 1) 6 -30 to 0, one unit = 5 deg C
14-22
Chapter 14
No. Function Default Setting range

45: Fixing film speed change (manual feed tray) 15 0 to 30, 1 unit = 0.4%
46: Fixing film speed change (cassette) 15 0 to 30, 1 unit = 0.4%
47: - 50: Not used
14.7.2.2 <031: Top registration adjustment (manual feed tray)>

0011-1901
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the top registration margin of paper picked from a manual feed tray. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the top margin of the image becomes.
14.7.2.3 <032: Top registration adjustment (cassette)>

0011-1902
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the top registration margin of paper picked from cassettes. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the top margin of the image becomes.
14.7.2.4 <033: Top registration adjustment (duplex unit)>

0011-1903
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the top registration margin of paper picked from a duplex unit. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the top margin of the image becomes.
14.7.2.5 <034: Left-end registration adjustment (manual feed tray)>

0011-1904
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the left-end registration margin of paper picked from a manual feed tray. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the left-end margin of the image be-
comes.
14.7.2.6 <035: Left-end registration adjustment (cassette 1)>

0011-1906
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the left-end registration margin of paper picked from cassette 1. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the left-end margin of the image becomes.

0011-1907
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-1908
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i


0011-1909
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14.7.2.10 <039: Left-end registration adjustment (duplex unit)>

0011-1910
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Adjust the left-end registration margin of paper picked from a duplex unit. The larger the adjustment value, the wider the left-end margin of the image becomes.
14.7.2.11 <040: Target fixing temperature adjustment (manual feed tray)>

0011-1911
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Lower the fixing temperature from the target temperature setting to reduce the chances of fixing offsets and curled or stuck delivered sheets occurring with paper
picked from a manual feed tray.
14.7.2.12 <041: Target fixing temperature adjustment (cassette 1)>

0011-1914
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
picked from cassette 1.

0011-1915
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-1916
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

0011-1917
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14-23
Chapter 14
14.7.2.16 <045: Fixing film speed change (manual feed tray)>

0011-1913
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Change the fixing film speed to reduce the chances of streaks appearing in the trailing edge of images caused by shocks from the fixing roller out of position while
picking paper from a manual feed tray.
14.7.2.17 <046: Fixing film speed change (cassette)>

0011-1918
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Change the fixing film speed to reduce the chances of streaks appearing in the trailing edge of images caused by shocks from the fixing roller out of position while
picking paper from a cassette.
14.7.3 Setting of Cassette (CST)
14.7.3.1 Special Standard-sized Paper Compatibility

0011-1968
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
With a special paper compatibility kit (cassette size adjuster) installed, set the cassette paper size lever to paper size groups U1 to U3 to set the paper sizes listed
below.
Paper size group Setting (*default) Paper name Marking

U1 0* Government LETTER G-LTR
29 Argentine LETTER A-LTR
31 Government LETTER G-LTR
40 8K 8K
U2 0* FOOLSCAP FLSP
24 FOOLSCAP FLSP
26 OFFICIO OFI
27 Ecuadorian OFFICIO E-OFI
28 Bolivian OFFICIO B-OFI
36 Argentine Offico A-OFI
37 Mexican OFFICIO M-OFI
39 16K 16K
U3 0* Government LEGAL G-LGL
25 Australian FOOLSCAP AFLS
30 Argentine LETTERR ALTRR
32 Government LETTERR FLTRR
34 Government LEGAL G-LGL
35 FORIO FORIO
14.8 Setting of System Functions (SYSTEM)
14.8.1 Bit Switch Settings

0011-1934
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
SSSW-SW03 functional configuration

T-14-22
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Imports and exports user information via USB. Enable Disable
7 Not used - -
Bit 6 details
Select whether to enable the host machine to work as a USB storage device or not. If the host machine is plugged into a PC with this setting enabled, it allows user
registration data (user data and telephone registration data) to be imported and exported to and from the PC, except for the data embedded in the department man-
agement information and user management IDs in the system management information.
14.9 Registration of Accessories (ACC)
14.9.1 Accessory Registration

0011-1687
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The table below gives summary description of the accessories available.
14-24
Chapter 14
Item Explanation
#ACC CARD Card reader installation setting
Enter a card number to use.
(0 to 9999. One hundred cards are registered with the department ID beginning from the input card number in sequence.)
*1:1,000 cards if option ROM is mounted.
When a card number is entered, the following kinds of management information are initialized:
- Card name (department ID), beginning from the input card number.
- Password associated with the card
CC-SPSW Control card I/F support setting
Set whether to support the control card I/F (CC-V) or not.
0: Do not support.
1: Support.
COIN Coin vendor change
Set the control card set display appearing on the operator station for vendor use.
0: Control card use
1: Coin vendor use
CONTROL Set the PDL printer output control where the control card I/F (CC-V) is supported.
0: Enable printing without a card mounted.
1: Enable printing with a card mounted in position.
14.10 Display of Counter Information (COUNTER)
14.10.1 Counters
0011-1012
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
This copier is furnished with a maintenance/supplies counter set (DRBL-1), which can be used to gain rough measures of when to replace supplies. The counter
set increments by one on counting each sheet of small-sized paper (up to A4/LTR) and by two on counting each sheet of large-sized paper (larger than A4/LTR).
T-14-23
Maintenance counter list

Item Counter Explanation
TOTAL (Total counter) SERVICE1 Service total counter 1
SERVICE2 Service total counter 2
TTL Total counter
COPY Total copy counter
PDL-PRT PDL print counter
FAX-PRT Fax print counter
REP-PRT Report print counter
2-SIDE Double-sided copy/print counter
SCAN Scan counter
PICK-UP (Paper pickup counter) C1 Cassette 1 jam counter
C2 Cassette 2 jam counter
MF Manual feed tray pickup total counter
2-SIDE Double-sided paper pickup total counter
FEEDER (Feeder related counters) FEED Feeder pickup total counter
DFOP-CNT ADF open/close hinge counter
JAM (Jam counters) TTL Unit total jam count
FEEDER Feeder total jam count
SORTER Finisher total jam count
2-SIDE Duplex unit jam counter
MF Manual feed tray jam counter
MISC (Other required counter) WST-TNR Waste toner counter
T-14-24
Parts counter list

Item Counter Explanation Service life
DRBL-1 (Unit supplies) FX-UNIT Fixing unit paper pass count 150,000
TR-ROLL Transfer charger roller high-voltage ON count 150,000
DV-UNT-C Developing unit rotation count 150,000
M-PU-RL Manual feed tray pickup roller paper pass count 150,000
M-SP-PD Manual feed tray separation pad paper pass count 150,000
14.10.2 Clearing Counters
0011-1221
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
- Maintenance/parts counter all clear

Execute service mode > CLEAR > COUNTER to clear all maintenance/parts counters.
14-25
Chapter 14
- Counter clear on parts replacement

Press the numeric keypad key 0 after displaying the counter for a part just replaced, and the counter will be cleared individually.
14.11 Service Report (REPORT)
14.11.1 Report Output

0011-1028
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The table below lists the kinds of reports that are supported.
Item Explanation
SERVICE DATA LIST Service mode service soft switch output (SSSW, MENU, NUMERIC Param., SPECIAL, NCU, SCAN, PRINT, SYSTEM, ROM,
start date)
SYSTEM DATA LIST Service mode service soft switch output (SSSW, MENU, NUMERIC Param., SPECIAL, NCU, SCAN, PRINT, SYSTEM, ROM,
start date)
System dump list output
SYSTEM DUMP LIST Transmission count, reception count, record chart count, error count and other outputs
COUNTER REPORT Counter output
ERROR LOG LIST Jam and error history output
SPEC LIST Type setting, print speed, memory size, ROM indication, adjustment data and other outputs
SERVICE LABEL Output of an entry format for the service label affixed to the rear cover as shipped
14.11.2 System Data List

0011-1009
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Use it to check the settings associated with the service soft switch and service parameters.

F-14-3
14.11.3 System Dump List

0011-1010
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
- System Dump List

Use it to check the history of communications, both successful and error.
14-26
Chapter 14
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
F-14-4
*1: TX, number of total pages transmission.
*2: Total number of pages transmitted/received according to original size.
*3: RX, number of total pages reception.
*4: Total number of pages transmitted and received for each modem speed
*5: Total number of pages transmitted/received in connection with different modem speeds (Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Ultra Fine).
*6: Total number of pages transmitted and received for each coding method
*7: Total number of pages transmitted and received in each mode
*8: Total number of pages printed/scanned
*9: Total number of occurrences for error code
T-14-25
Indication
sample
##280 1 7 3 0 0
##280 ##281 ##282
number of errors number of errors number of errors
It provides error information on the 3 most recent communications.
14-27
Chapter 14

!
" !
# #$ !
% &'()
! &*+ ,#$ -
# ! "
% !
%
%
. / &01 2 / &01 2

/ &01 2 / &01 2
. / &01 2 / &01 2
/ &01 2 / &01 2
. " !
. " ! 3 3" 3 3" 3 3"
.
. 3 3" 3 3 ! "

!
" !
# #$ !
% &'()
! &*+ ,#$ -
# ! "
% !
%
%
. / &01 2 / &01 2

/ &01 2 / &01 2
. / &01 2 / &01 2
/ &01 2 / &01 2
. " !
. " ! 3 3" 3 3" 3 3"
.
. 3 3" 3 3 ! "
!

!
" !
# #$ !
% &'()
! &*+ ,#$ -
# ! "
% !
%
%
F-14-5
*1: service error code.
*2: START TIME, date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY, telephone number sent by the other party.
*4: MAKER CODE, manufacturer code.
*5: MACHINE CODE, model code.
*6: bit 1 through bit 96 of DIS, DCS, or DTC that has been received.
*7: bit 1 through bit 96 of DIS, DCS, or DTC that has been transmitted.
*8: RX, procedural signal received; TX, procedural signal transmitted.
14.11.4 Counter List

0011-1177
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Explanation: Maintenance/supplies counter output.

(For more detailed information about the maintenance/supplies counter output, execute service mode > Display counter information > Counters.)
14.11.5 Error Log List

0011-1180
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14-28
Chapter 14
07/12/2005 13:07 FAX 001
***************************************
*** JAM/ERR LOG REPORT ***
***************************************
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
JAM
01 04/12 12:17 20:03 4 1 0012 000026 1 A4
20 04/12 12:17 20:03 4 1 0012 000026 1 A4
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
ERR
01 04/12 12:17 15:36 3 0010 0000 000691
20 04/12 12:17 15:36 3 0010 0000 000691
F-14-6
Jam history description (JAM)

Item Explanation
[1] Number The larger the number of a jam, the more recently it has occurred.
[2] Jam date Date of jam occurrence
[3] Jam time
[4] Jam recovery time
[5] Location 3: Host machine, 4: ADF, 5: Finisher
[6] Occurrence category 0: Host machine, 1: ADF, 2: Finisher
14-29
Chapter 14
Jam history description (JAM)

Item Explanation
[7] Jam code Code Jam cause
Host machine 0104 Pickup assembly delay jam
0208 Pickup assembly stationary jam
010c Delivery assembly jam
010e Second delivery assembly delivery delay jam
0210 Delivery stationary jam
0212 Second delivery assembly stationary jam
0214 Host machine retention paper jam
1118 Door open jam
0120 Duplexing paper sensor 1 delay jam
0221 Duplexing paper sensor 1 stationary jam
0124 Duplexing paper sensor 2 delay jam
0228 Duplexing paper sensor 2 stationary jam
ADF 0000 Unknown jam
0007 Initial stationary
0008 Read sensor delay jam
0009 Read sensor stationary jam
000a Paper absence (Pull out the document.)
000c Delivery reversal sensor delay jam
000d Delivery reversal sensor stationary jam
000e ADF cover open error
000f User ADF open error
0010 Pickup NG
Finisher 0130 Inlet sensor delivery delay jam
0231 Inlet sensor delivery stationary jam
0033 Bundle delivery jam
0035 Stapler jam
1036 Power-on jam
1137 Door open jam
[8] Total counter display
[9] Pickup stage position 0: Manual feed tray, 1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4
[10] Paper size
Error history description (ERR)

Item Explanation
[1] Number The larger the number of an error, the more recently it has occurred.
[2] Error date Date of error occurrence
[3] Error time
[4] Location 3: Main unit, 5: Finisher
[5] Error code Error code (4-digit code; for a definition of the code, see the "Error Code" Chapter.)
[6] Detail code Detail code of the error code (4-digit code; for a definition of the code, see the "Error Code"
Chapter.)
[7] Total counter display
14.11.6 Spec List

0011-1182
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14-30
Chapter 14
07/12/2005 13:07 FAX 001
[1] *****************************
[2] *** SPEC REPORT ***
*****************************
[3]
TYPE _____ U. S. A
LBP SPEED _____ 20cpm
TOTAL MEMORY _____ 256MB
MAIN _____ WLaa-07-05
[4] OPTION _____ WLaa-07-05
BOOT _____ WLaa-07-05
ECONT _____ 0210
OPT-CAS 1 _____ 0003
OPT-CAS 2 _____ 0000
OPT-CAS 3 _____ 0000
OPT-DUP _____ 0003
OPT-FIN _____ 0000
ACTIBAT FUNCTION
[5] BDL-IMAGE (1200) _____ ON
FAX _____ ON
NETWORK _____ ON
PCL _____ ON
PC-SCAN _____ OFF
BW-SEND _____ OFF
CL-SEND _____ OFF
PAF _____ OFF
BDL-IMAGE (600) _____ ON
SOFT-ID PRM
TYPE _____ 2 : US
OPTION/ENABLE SW
BIT 00: BDL-IMAGE (1200) _____ ON / ON
[6] BIT 01: FAX _____ ON / ON
BIT 02: NETWORK _____ ON / ON
BIT 03: PCL _____ ON / ON
BIT 04: PC-SCAN _____ OFF / OFF
BIT 05: BW-SEND _____ OFF / OFF
BIT 06: CL-SEND _____ OFF / OFF
BIT 07: PAF _____ OFF / OFF
BIT 08: BDSS _____ ON / ON
BIT 09: BDL-IMAGE (600) _____ ON / ON
BIT 10: COUNTER _____ ON / ON
BODY No. _____ BFDxxxxx
ENGINE CODE _____ 20000013
SIZE TYPE _____ 4 : AB/INCH
[7] TOTAL
TTL _____ 000688
COPY _____ 000685
FAX-PRT _____ 000000
PDL-PRT _____ 000000
PRT-PRT _____ 000003
READ ADJ PRM
026: _____ 0022
031: _____ 0035
032: _____ 0115
033: _____ 0016
034: _____ 0016
041: _____ 0035
042: _____ 0220
043: _____ 0024
044: _____ 0036
[8] 045: _____ 0047
046: _____ 0047
047: _____ 0016
048: _____ 0016
054: _____ 0016
213: _____ 8273
214: _____ 8737
215: _____ 9427
WRITE ADJ PRM
031: _____ 0050
032: _____ 0050
033: _____ 0050
034: _____ 0100
035: _____ 0100
036: _____ 0100
037: _____ 0100
[9] 038: _____ 0100
[10] 039: _____ 0100
OPTYION ROM _____ 32MB
[11] USB MEMORY _____ OFF
DELIVERY FULL SENSOR 1 _____ ON
[12] DELIVERY FULL SENSOR 2 _____ ON
USB SERIAL No. _____ 0051J9AE904
[13] MAC ADDRESS _____ 00 00 85 51 60 1C
F-14-7
[1] Type setting
[2] Print speed
[3] Memory size
[4] ROM version (MAIN/BOOT/ECONT/option cassette/duplex unit/finisher)
[5] Activation function ON/OFF
[6] Soft ID information
[7] Total counter (TOTAL/COPY/FAX/PDL/REPORT record counts)
[8] Adjustment data (factory scan/record adjustment values)
[9] Option ROM availability
[10] USB memory availability
[11] No. 1/No. 2 paper full sensor sensor availability
[12] USB serial number
[13] MAC address
14.11.7 Service Label

0011-1184
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

Enter the value given in the service label affixed to the rear cover when it has been replaced with a new one.
14-31
Chapter 14
#PRINT>#PRINT NUMERIC #SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC

FACTORY 1 2 3 FACTORY 1 2 3
031 50 026
032 50 031
033 50 032
034 100 033
035 100 034
036 100 041
037 100 042
038 100 043
039 100 044
045
046
047
#SCAN>#SCAN NUMERIC 048
054
213
214
body No:BFDxxxxx 215
F-14-8
14.12 Download (DOWNLOAD)
14.12.1 Download
0011-0992
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
The following parts of this unit can be upgraded by executing download mode using the service support tool (SST) (for more information, see the "Upgrading"
section):
Main unit
- Flash ROM (system + boot) mounted on the image processor PCB
Accessory
- ROM mounted on the finisher controller PCB
- ROM mounted on the PCL board
14.13 Initialization of Set Value (CLEAR)
14.13.1 Clear
0011-0999
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Group Item Explanation

TEL & USER DATA Clears all user-registered and -set areas of telephone registration data and user data.
(Telephone registration refers to the registration of codes on one-touch dialing,
abbreviated dialing, and group dialing.)
SERVICE DATA Clears the system dump list, except for counters and clear dates.
COUNTER Clears the maintenance counter, parts counter and mode-specific counters.
Initializes the counter (numerator) in the system dump list.
TYPE Initializes user data and service data to suit specified destination settings.
SOFT-CNT Not used
HST ACTIVITY Initializes the activity report
ACCOUNT Clears print histories.
JAM Clears the jam history.
ERR Clear the error (error code) history.
ALARM Clears the alarm history.
CARD Clears department management information held in the controller before the card
reader is demounted.
ERR E355 Not used
E719 Clears card reader errors.
PWD Clears the system administrator's password.
ALL Clears user and service data (except for some scan parameters and print parameters),
and the counter setting/registration data in the system dump list, except for the print
count.
14.14 Display of ROM Information (ROM)
14.14.1 ROM display

0011-0988
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

The table below lists the items of ROM display mode that are supported.
T-14-26
Item Explanation
MAIN Displays the version number of the ROM (SYSTEM) mounted on the image
processor PCB.
14-32
Chapter 14
Item Explanation
MAIN2 Displays the version of the ROM (BOOT) mounted on the image processor
PCB.
ECONT Displays the version number of the ROM mounted on the DC controller PCB.
OPROM Displays the version number of the option ROM.
14.15 Test Mode (TEST)
14.15.1 Outline
0011-0884
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Test mode must be executed by keeping track the flow of menu items appearing on the LCD. Menu items in test mode are organized into seven blocks as described
below. Numerals enclosed in parentheses denote a numeric keypad key to be pressed each.
1. D-RAM test ((1) D-RAM)

Checks to see if data can be correctly written to and read from D-RAM.
2. Scan test ((2) SCAN TEST)

Used to adjust contact sensor output and the position at which a document fed from the ADF is scanned.
3. Print test ((3) PRINT TEST)

Used to generate service test patterns.
4. Modem test ((4) MODEM TEST)

Performs relay actuation, modem DTMF and tonal signal transmission/reception tests.
5. Aging test ((5) AGING TEST)

Not used.
6. Function test ((6) FUNCTION TEST)

Used to verify the operations of microswitches, sensors, speakers and ADF functions.
7. Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN)

Used to clean the delivery roller or ADF pickup roller by idling them.
14.15.2 Test Mode Menu List

0011-0885
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Test mode menu list

To invoke test mode, follow these steps:
1) Enter service mode.

Press the operation panel user mode key, 2 key, 8 key and user mode key in this order.
2) Press the operation panel arrow keys to show "TEST MODE."
To exit test mode, press the user mode key to return to standby mode.
T-14-27
Numerals enclosed in parentheses denote a numeric keypad key to be pressed each.

Group Subgroup Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Explanation
TEST MODE [1] - [9], [#]
(1) DRAM [1] - [2] D-RAM data check
(1) D-RAM TEST Write/read check
(2) D-RAM TEST Read check
(2) SCAN TEST [1] - [8]
(1) SHADING Automatic gain adjustment
(3) SHEET POS ADJ CS position adjustment
(4) TRASH DETECT Dust detection
(5), (6), (9), (*) Not used
(3) PRINT TEST [1] - [9]
(1) Not used
(2) All-black output
(3) Not used
(4) Back belt output
(5), (6), (7), (8), (9), (*) Not used
(4) MODEM TEST [1] - [9]
14-33
Chapter 14

(1) RELAY TEST [1] - [2]
(1) RELAY TEST 1 NCU relay (and switch) ON/OFF test
(2) RELAY TEST 2 230 V common NCU test
(2) FREQ TEST [0] - [6] Frequency test
(0) FREQ TEST 462Hz
(1) FREQ TEST 1100Hz
(4) FREQ TSST 1650Hz
(4) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST [0] - [8] G3 signal transmission test
(0) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST 300bps
(5) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST TC7200bps
(5) DTMF TEST [0] - [9], * , # DTMF transmission test
(*) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST 12000bps
(#) G3 SIGNAL TX TEST 14400bps
(6) MODEM TEST Tonal sign reception test
(8) G3 V.34 Tx TEST V34 G3 signal transmission test
(9) Not used
(5) AGING TEST Not used
(6) FUNCTION TEST [1] - [9]
14-34
Chapter 14

(1) FUNCTION TEST G3 4800bps G3 4800 bps signal transmission test
(3) 6-3 SENSOR [1] - [6] Sensor checks
(1) SENSOR CHECK 0:NORMAL 1:LATCH
(0) SENSOR NORMAL [0] - [2]
(0) CAS 0 REG 0 DEL 0 MULTI 0
(1) TONER 0 FULL 0 2ND-DEL 0000
(2) OP1 0000 OP2 0000 OP3 0000 PATH
0000
(1) SENSOR
LATCH [0] -
[2]
(0) CAS 0 REG 0 DEL 0 MULTI 0
(1) TONER 0 FULL 0 2ND-DEL 0000
(2) OP1 0000 OP2 0000 OP3 0000 PATH
0000
(2) SWITCH CHECK [0] - [1]
(0) CAS 0000 LOCK 0000
(1) OP1 0000 OP2 0000 OP3 0000
(3) DS ON DES of HPS ON BCVS of
(4) REF xxx ANT xxx |ANT-REF| xxx
(5) BSCT on BDAC[ A3] BDSS3-0 [ of of of of ]
(6) NCR Sts: NCR xxxxx DPT MGN OK RDY 0101
(4) ADF FEED TEST ADF delivery operation test
(5) BOOK FEED TEST Book copy operation test
(6) 6-6 SPEAKER FREQ:[1] VOL:[2] Speaker volume and buzzer frequency test
(7) Operation Panel Operation panel key, LCD and LED test
(8) FUNCTION TEST LAMP TEST ALL Lamp test
(9) LINE TEST [1] - [3] Line signal reception test
(0) ROLLER CLEAN 0:PRT 1:ADF Printer and ADF roller cleaning
(0) PRT ROL CLEAN Press start key
(1) ADF ROL CLEAN Press start key
14.15.3 D-RAM test<(1) D-RAM TEST>

0011-0886
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
D-RAM Test((1) D-RAM)

Press the numeric keypad key 1 on the test mode menu to select the D-DRAM test.
Press numeric keypad keys 1 and 2 during the D-DRAM test to carry out the individual tests described below.
Numeric keypad key 1

Checks to see if data can be correctly written to and read from all areas of D-RAM (SDRAM). If an error occurs making this check, the test is aborted, with an
error appearing on the LCD.
Checks to see if data can be correctly read from all areas of D-RAM (SDRAM). If an error occurs making this check, the test is aborted, with an error appearing
on the LCD.
D-RAM TEST 30208KB

[1] - [2]
D-RAM TEST 30208KB D-RAM TEST 30208KB

complete (no error)
WRT= 33CC RD= 33EC

ADR= BF840201
D-RAM TEST 30208KB
D-RAM TEST 30208KB

complete (error)
F-14-9
14.15.4 Scan Test ((2) SCAN TEST)

0011-0887
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
14-35
Chapter 14
Scan test ((2) SCAN TEST)
Press the numeric keypad key 2 on the test mode menu to select the CCD test.
Press numeric keypad keys 1, 3 and 4 during the CCD test to carry out the individual tests described below.

Corrects the LED output of the contact sensor and sets its parameters automatically. (AGC adjustment)

Adjusts the document scan position (only on models with the ADF feature installed). Adjusts the position of the contact sensor for scanning documents fed from
the ADF automatically.

Detects trash at reader scan positions A/B/C.
Pos A: Reference read position
Pos B: About 0.5 mm inside of the roller from the reference position
Pos C: About 1.0 mm inside of the roller from the reference position
14.15.5 Print Test ((3) PRINT TEST)

0011-0888
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Print test ((3) PRINT TEST)

Press the numeric keypad key 3 on the test mode menu to select the print test.
Press numeric keypad keys 2 and 4 during the print test to generate test patterns as described below. Two kinds of service test patterns are available. Other test
patterns are reserved for factory/development purposes.

(2) BLACK: All-black output
(4) ENDURANCE: Black belt output
To cancel test printing, press the stop key.
Use it to make sure that the print Use it to make sure that the print
pattern does not have white lines pattern does not have contraction/
or uneven image. elongation of an image or dirt/black
line.s
F-14-10
14.15.6 MODEM Test((4) MODEM TEST)

0011-0889
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
MODEM test((4) MODEM TEST)

These tests test modem and NCU transmission and reception. The modem tests check whether signals are sent correctly from the modem by comparing the sound
of the signals from the speaker with the sounds from a normal modem.
End this test by pressing the Stop key.
Keypad Type Description

1 Relay test Use it to turn on/off a selected relay to execute a switch-over test
2 Frequency test The modem sends tonal signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
4 G3 signal transmission test The modem sends G3 signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
5 DTMF signal reception test Use it to generate the DTMF signal coming from the modem using the
telephone line terminal and the speaker.
6 Tonal signal reception test Use it to monitor a specific frequency and the DTMF signal received from
the telephone line terminal by causing them to be indicated on the LCD (i.e.,
the presence/absence as detected). The reception signal is generated by the
speaker.
8 V.34 G3 signal transmission test The modem sends V.34 G3 signals from the modular jack and the speaker.
Relay Test
Press '1'or '2' on the keypad on the Modem test menu to select relay test mode. Use the keypad to operate the various relays of the NCU. '2' on the keypad is used
for 230V machine.
The input key and relay are shown below:
14-36
Chapter 14
[1] [2]
RELAY TEST1 OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF
[3] [4] [5] [6]
F-14-11
The input key and relay are shown below:
[1] [2]
RELAY TEST2 OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
F-14-12
The LCD is turned on or off in relation to the transmission of the relay operation signal as is operated on the keypad; for this reason, you cannot use the LCD to
check a fault on a single relay.
Frequency Test
A press on '2' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the frequency test.
In this test, signals of the following frequencies from the modem are transmitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To select a different frequency,
use the keypad.
Keypad Frequency
1 462Hz
2 1100Hz
3 1300Hz
4 1500Hz
5 1650Hz
6 1850Hz
7 2100Hz
MEMO:
The frequency and the output level of individual frequencies are in keeping with the output level set in service mode.
G3 Signal Transmission Test

A press on '4' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the G3 signal transmission test. In this test, the following G3 signals from the modem are trans-
mitted using the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To select a different transmission speed, use the keypad.
Keypad Transmission speed

0 300bps
1 2400bps
2 4800bps
3 7200bps
4 9600bps
5 TC7200bps
6 TC9600bps
7 12000bps
8 14400bps
MEMO:
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in service mode.
DTMF Signal Transmission Test

A press on '5' on the MODEM test menu selects the DTMF signal transmission test. In the test, the following DTMF signals from the modem are transmitted using
the telephone line terminal and the speaker. The number pressed on the keypad selects a specific DTMF signal.
MEMO:
The output level of individual signals is in keeping with the setting made in service mode.
Tonal/DTMF Signal Reception Test

A press on '6' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selects the tonal signal/DTMF signal reception 0 test. In this signal, the tonal signal/DTMF signal received
from the telephone line terminal can be checked to find out if it was detected by the modem.
14-37
Chapter 14
Tonal signal reception test
MODEM TEST
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

changes from '0' to '1' in response to detection of a signal of 462 25 Hz.
DTMF signal reception test
MODEM TEST
OFF OFF OFF 5
The received DTMF signals are indicated starting
from the right using the 2nd character of the display.
F-14-13
V.34 G3 Signal Transmission Test
A press on '8' on the keypad from the MODEM test menu selectes the V.34 G3 signal transmission test. The V.34 G3 signals below are sent from the modem using
the modular jack and the speaker by pressing the start key. The Baud rate can be changed with the keypad, and the Speed can be changed with the left/right arrow
key.
Keypad Baud rate

0 3429baud
1 3200baud
2 3000baud
3 2800baud
4 2743baud
5 2400baud
Left/right arrow key Transmission speed

2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
< 12000bps
14400bps
16800bps
19200bps
21600bps
> 24000bps
26400bps
28800bps
31200bps
33600bps
14.15.7 Function test ((6) FUNCTION TEST)

0011-0890
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Function test ((6) FUNCTION TEST)

Press the numeric keypad key 6 on the test mode menu to select the function test.
Press numeric keypad keys 1 and 3 to 9 during the function test to enter the menus listed below.
T-14-28
Keypad Item Explanation

1 G3 signal transmission test Transmits 4800-bps G3 signals to a telephone line and
speaker.
2 Not used
3 Sensor test Sensor actuation test
4 ADF test ADF operation test
5 Book test Host machine operation test
6 Speaker test Speaker operation test
7 Operation panel test LCD, LED and control key operation test
8 Lamp test Contact sensor illumination test
9 Line signal reception test NCU board signal sensor and frequency counter operation test
G3 signal transmission test (6-1: G3 480 bps Tx)
Press numeric keypad key 1 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the G3 signal transmission test. This test transmits 4800-bps G3 signals from the telephone
line connection terminal and speaker.
Sensor test (6-3: SENSOR)

This mode is used to verify the status of the unit sensors from LCD indications. Press numeric keypad key 3 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the sensor
test. LCD indications change as the associated sensors turn on and off.
14-38
Chapter 14
6-3:SENOR
[1] - [6]
Press numeric keypad key 1. Press numeric keypad key 0. Press numeric keypad key 0.
SENSOR CHECK SENSOR NORMAL CAS 0 REG 0

0:NORMAL 1:LATCH [0] - [2] DEL 0 0 MULTI 0
Select a sensor mode. CAS:Cassette 1 paper sensor (SR204): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
0: NORMAL REG:Registration sensor (SR209): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
Indications change from 0 Press numeric keypad key 1. DEL 0 0:
to 1 as the sensors turn on. Fixing delivery sensor (SR202): 1/ Document presence, 0/ Document absence
Indications change from 1 SENSOR LATCH No.1 delivery sensor (SR203): 1/ Document presence, 0/ Document absence
to 0 as the sensors turn off. [0] - [2] MULTI:Manual paper sensor (SR208): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
1: LATCH
Indications change from 0
to 1 as the sensors turn on.
Indications do not change back Press numeric keypad key 1.
from 1 to 0 once the sensors turn
on from the off state. TONER 0 FULL 0
2ND-DEL 0 0
TONER:Waste toner full sensor (SR206): 0/Full, 1/Available

FULL:No. 1 paper full sensor (SR207): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
2ND-DEL 0 0:
No. 2 paper full sensor (SR1102): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
No. 2 delivery sensor (SR1101): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
OP1 0 0 OP2 0 0
OP3 0 0 PATH 0 0
OP1 0 0:
Cassette 2 retry sensor (SR6): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absenc
Cassette 2 paper sensor (SR5): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
OP2 0 0:
Cassette 3 retry sensor (SR6): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
OP3 0 0:
Cassette 4 retry sensor (SR6): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
PATH 0 0:
Duplex paper sensor 1 (SR1002): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
Duplex paper sensor 2 (SR1002): 0/Document presence, 1/Document absence
Press numeric keypad key 2 Press numeric keypad key 0.
SWITCH CHECK CAS 0000

[0] - [1] LOCK 0
CAS 0000:Cassette 1 size detection switch

Cassette size switch (PSIZE3): 1/Pressed, 0/Not pressed
LOCK: Cover switch (SW2 and SW3): 1/Cover open, 0/Cover closed
Press numeric keypad key 1.
OP1 0000 OP2 0000

OP3 0000
OP1: Cassette 2 size detection switch

OPX 0000: (X = 1, 2, 3 option cassette level)
Press numeric keypad key 3

DS ON DES of HPS ON
BCVS of
DS: ADF document sensor (P111): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence

DES Read sensor (P17): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence
HPS: CISHP sensor (P401): On/Paper presence, Of/Paper absence
BCVS: Document platen cover open/close sensor (front) (SR403): On/Cover open, Of/Cover closed
F-14-14
14-39
Chapter 14
REF xxx ANT xxx

|ANT - LEF| xxx
REF: Toner reference voltage (A/D value)

ANT: Toner antenna voltage (A/D value)
ANT - LEF: Differential voltage (A/D value)
BSCT on BDOC[A3 ]
BDSS3-0 [of of of of]
BCST: Document platen cover sensor (SR402): On/Cover open, Of/Cover closed
BDOC: Document size: Paper size indicated in a mix of document size sensors
BDSS3-0 [of of of of]:
Document size sensor (SR404 or SR405): On/Document presence, Of/Document absence
Document size sensor (SR403): On/Document presence, Of/Document absence
Press numeric
keypad key 6.
NCR Sts 12345678

DPT MGN OK RDY 1234
[1] Card reader and card availability indication [4] Can status
Card available: Eight-digit card ID OK: Normal scan
No card: Card None ERR: Scan error
No card reader available: NCR None NG: Nonstandard error
(No indication): No card
[2] Card type and card reader status indication [5] Equipment status
DPT: Department card IN: Initialization in progress
PRC: Unit pricing card RDY: Ready
MAX: Upper limit setting card
ERS: Erased card [6] Card reader version indication
SRV: Service card Four-digit number
(No indication): No card
[3] Card type

MGN: Magnetic card
OPT: Optical card
F-14-15
ADF feed test (ADF FEED TEST)
ADF operation verification mode. Press numeric keypad key 4 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the ADF feed test. Place a document on the document
platen and press the start key to transfer the document at the speed matched to the scan resolution setting. In this test, enter a transfer speed between 500 and 2000
(mm/s) from the numeric keypad and verify the transfer speed. Select between the ON and OFF states with the left and right cursor keys to select between single-
sided document feed (OFF) and double-sided document feed (ON).
Book feed test (6-5: BOOK FEED TEST)

Performs a book feed operation with a specified magnification and in a specified size.
Speaker test (6-6: SPEAKER)

Speaker operation verification mode. Press numeric keypad key 6 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the speaker test. In this test, the speaker generates tonal
signals at 100 Hz intervals, from 200 Hz to 5 kHz, in varying sound volumes. Signal output from the speaker is thus verified.
6-6: SPEAKER
FREQ [1] VOL [2]
Press numeric Press numeric

keypad key 1. keypad key 2.
SPEAKER SPEAKER
FREQ TEST VOL[*] :MIN [#]:MAX
Press the start key Signal tone volume adjustment.

to change the * denotes the minimum, #, the maximum.
transmission frequency The volume is adjustable level by level
using the start key.
F-14-16
Operation panel test (6-7: OPERATION PANEL)
Operation panel operation verification mode. Press numeric keypad key 7 on the FUNCTION TEST menu to select the OPERATION PANEL test menu. Functions
that can be verified from this menu are listed below.
- LCD test
Start the OPERATION PANEL test by pressing the start key. The LCD test is carried out first, displaying all-H characters. Press the start key once again to produce
a total black display.
- LED lamp test
Press the start key after the LCD test to select the LCD lamp test, turning on all lamps on the operation panel.
- Operation key test
Press the start key after the LCD lamp test to select operation key test (1). The test succeeds if the characters appearing in the LCD are erased when the correspond-
ing keys are pressed.
When the entire character display is erased, operation key test (2) launches (only on models with the FAX feature installed). As in (1), the test succeeds if the
characters appearing in the LCD are erased when the corresponding keys are pressed.
Operation key test (1) correspondence diagram
14-40
Chapter 14
Similar to the LCD display

[L] [M][Q] [O][R] [N][S] [T] [U][P] [K] [H] [G]
[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [J] [I]

F-14-17
Operation key test (2) correspondence diagram
[5] [4] [0] [3] [1] [2]
[9]
[7] 01: [A] 11: [K]
[8] 02: [B] 12: [L]
[6] 03: [C] 13: [M]
04: [D] 14: [N]
05: [E] 15: [O]
06: [F] 16: [P]
07: [G] 17: [Q]
08: [H] 18: [R]
09: [I] 19: [S]
10: [J] 20: [T]
F-14-18
The flow of operation panel testing is shown below.
14-41
Chapter 14
6-7 : OPERATION PANEL
LCD test Press the start key.
All-H character display
Press the start key.
All-black display
Press the start key.
All-LED illumination
LED lamp test Press the start key.
0123456789*#ABCDEFGH Press the keys associated with

IJKLMNOPQRSTU characters on display to erase
the characters.
Operation key
test (1)
012345678 Press the one-touch dialing keys

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR associated with characters on
display to erase the characters.
Operation key test (2)
After erasing all characters on display,
press the stop key to exit the test.
F-14-19
Line signal reception test ((9) LINE DETECT)
Press numeric keypad key 9 on the FACULTY menu to select the line signal reception test. In this test, verify the successful operations of the NCU signal sensor
and the frequency counter. Menu 1 detects the CI state, while menu 3 detects the CNG signal.
Test menu 1
Press numeric keypad key 1 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 1. When CI is detected on the telephone line connection terminal, the LCD
display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The LCD also displays the on-hook or off-hook state of an external telephone set as
detected. The LCD displays, from left to right, CI, CI frequency, hook port and FC with indications of 1:ON and 0:OFF.
Test menu 2
Press numeric keypad key 2 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 2. When the CNG signal is detected on the telephone line connection terminal,
the LCD display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The LCD displays the status of CML, CNG and FED detection, from left to
right, with ON/OFF indications. Numeric keypad key 2 turns on the CML relay to detect CNG.
Test menu 3
Press numeric keypad key 3 on the LINE DETECT menu to select test menu 3. When the CNG signal is detected on the telephone line connection terminal,
the LCD display changes from OFF to ON, indicating the received frequency. The LCD displays the status of CML, CNG and FED detection, from left to
right, with ON/OFF indications. Numeric keypad key 3 turns off the CML relay to detect CNG.
Lamp test (6-8: LINE DETECT)
Press numeric keypad key 8 on the FACULTY menu to select the scan lamp illumination mode. The test checks to see if the scan lamp is on or not.
Numeric keypad key 1 selects LAMP TEST ALL. Press the start key to turn on all scan lamps. LAMP TEST AGC is not used.
14.15.8 Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN)

0011-0891
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Roller cleaning mode ((0) ROLLER CLEAN)

Press numeric keypad key 0 in test mode to select roller cleaning mode. Press numeric keypad keys 1 and 2 during this test to enter the following menus:
Press the start key clean the ADF pickup/feed rollers by idling.
Press the stop key to exit this mode.

Press the start key clean the unit transfer rollers by idling.
Press the stop key to exit this mode.
14-42
Chapter 15 Upgrading
Contents
Contents
15.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................ 15-1

15.1.1 Overview of Upgrade .............................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.2 Overview of Service Support Tool.......................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 Making Preparations....................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2.1 Registering the System Software ............................................................................................................ 15-1
15.2.2 Connection............................................................................................................................................... 15-3
15.3 Downloading System Software ...................................................................................................................... 15-4
15.3.1 Downloading System .............................................................................................................................. 15-4
15.3.1.1 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................... 15-4
15.3.2 Downloading BOOT ............................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.3.2.1 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.3.3 Other Upgrade Methods .......................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.3.3.1 Downloading the PCL Software....................................................................................................... 15-9
Chapter 15
15.1 Outline
15.1.1 Overview of Upgrade

0011-1809
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
This machine and options can be upgraded by downloading system software programs from the personal computer (hereafter called as the PC) in which a service
support tool (hereafter called SST) has been loaded.
System software programs and upgrade tools are listed in the following table:
T-15-1
Type System software type Upgrade tool Remarks

SST
Main unit System (main controller) The main controller also controls
Yes
the reader.
Boot (boot program) Yes
Option PCL (PCL printer kit-J1) Yes
Fin_U1 (Finisher-U1) Dedicated service tool
Yes
(Downloader PCB: FY9-2034)
15.1.2 Overview of Service Support Tool
0011-1810
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
Main unit PC
Image processor PCB
USB cable
Flash ROM CPU
J303
SST
PCL printer kit-J1 System

software
32MB ROM PCB

RS232C
straight cable
Flash ROM
Downloader
PCB
Finisher-U1 FY9-2034
Finisher controller PCB
Flash ROM CPU

J918
F-15-1
When using the SST, select "#DOWNLOAD" in the service mode to place the main unit in the download mode. (The finisher need not enter the download mode.)
15.2 Making Preparations
15.2.1 Registering the System Software

0011-1866
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

System software programs to be downloaded need to be registered in the SST.
The system software programs are registered with the names listed below.
<Software Programs Preinstalled in Main Unit>
Machine name:iR2020
Unit name:
- Main controller: System
- Boot program: Boot
- PCL board: PCL
The system software registration program is explained below taking System as an example.
[Preparation]
Have the following ready:
- PC in which SSTv3.21 or later is installed
- System CD supplied with iR2020
[System Software Registration Procedure]

1) Start the PC.
2) Insert the system CD in the PC.
15-1
Chapter 15
3) Start SST.
4) Click the "Register Firmware" button.
F-15-2
5) Select the drive in which the system CD is inserted, and then click the "SEARCH" button.
F-15-3
6) A list of system software programs contained in the system CD is displayed. Uncheck the checkboxes of unnecessary folders and system software programs, and
then click the "REGISTER" button.
This machine does not allow two or more system software programs to be downloaded at the same time. If two or more software programs need to be upgraded,
register and download them one by one.
15-2
Chapter 15
F-15-4
7) When the system software program registration result appears, click the OK button.
F-15-5
15.2.2 Connection
0011-2632
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Turn off the main power switch of this machine, and then disconnect the cables connected to this machine.
2) Connect USB connector on the back of this machine to the PC using the USB cable [1].
[1]
F-15-6
15-3
Chapter 15
15.3 Downloading System Software
15.3.1 Downloading System
15.3.1.1 Downloading Procedure

0011-2633
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
1) Turn on the power switch of the PC and start SST.

2) When the power switch is turned on, the Found New hardware Wizard appears. Click "Cancel".
F-15-7
3) Select "MFP" in "Target Selection", and then select "iR2020" in "Model List".
F-15-8
4) Double-click the "System" folder in "Model List" to check the system software version. Select "USB" in "Interface", and then click the "START" button.
F-15-9
5) Turn on the power switch of the host machine.
15-4
Chapter 15
6) Press the following keys on the control panel to enter the service mode.
7) Using the plus (+) or minus (-) key, select "#DOWNLOAD".
8) Press the OK key on the control panel to place the host machine in the downloading wait mode ("#DOWNLOAD CONNECTED" is displayed).
9) Press the OK button on the SST screen displayed on the display of the PC.
F-15-10
10) When connection is complete, the following screen appears. Click the OK button.
F-15-11
11) Click "System Software Download" on the Selecting a Job screen.
MEMO:
This machine does not use the "Upload the Backup Data" and "Download the Backup Data" functions not displayed on the Selecting a Job screen.
15-5
Chapter 15
F-15-12
12) Select the version of the system software to download from the list. Check that the selected version is displayed in "Selected Version", and then click the
"START" button.
F-15-13
13) When downloading starts, the progress of downloading is displayed by the progress bar.
15-6
Chapter 15
F-15-14
14) While the received data is being written to the flash ROM after completion of downloading, the following screen is displayed:
F-15-15
Never turn off the power switch of the machine while the data is being written to the flash ROM. If it becomes impossible to start this machine after turning its
power switch off, the image processor PCB must be replaced.
15) When writing of the data to the Flash ROM is complete, its result is displayed. Click the OK button.
15-7
Chapter 15
F-15-16
16) When the Selecting a Job screen appears, click "Return to Main Menu".
F-15-17
17) Click the "OK" button to return to the menu screen of SST.
15-8
Chapter 15
F-15-18
18) Click the "EXIT" button to terminate SST.
F-15-19
19) Confirm the massage "ROM WRITE OK" indicated on the control panel of the host machine, and then turn off/on the main power switch.
15.3.2 Downloading BOOT
15.3.2.1 Downloading Procedure

0011-3248
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i
To download the boot software, use the steps given for the system software.
15.3.3 Other Upgrade Methods
15.3.3.1 Downloading the PCL Software

0011-3249
iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

To download the software for the PCL printer kit-J1, use the steps given for the system software.
15-9
Sep 14 2005

Canon IR 2016-2020 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon IR 2016-2020 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon IR 2016-2020 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

Chapter 3 Main Controller

3.4 Flow of Image Data ........................................................................................................................................ 3- 5

Chapter 4 Original Exposure System

4.3.6.2 CMOS Sensor Drive ....................................................................................................................... 4- 12

4.4.8 Reader Heater (option).......................................................................................................................... 4- 24

Chapter 5 Laser Exposure

Chapter 6 Image Formation

6.5.2.1 Primary Charging Bias Control ....................................................................................................... 6- 4

Chapter 7 Pickup/Feeding System

7.2.2.1 Stationary Jam in Pickup Assembly............................................................................................... 7- 6

7.5.12 Separation Pad ..................................................................................................................................... 7- 15

Chapter 8 Fixing System

8.4.4.4 Removing the Left Door................................................................................................................. 8- 17

Chapter 9 External and Controls

9.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover .............................................................................................. 9- 10

Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure .................................................................................................... 10- 2

Chapter 11 Standards and Adjustments

Chapter 12 Correcting Faulty Images

Chapter 13 Self Diagnosis

13.5 FAX Error Codes......................................................................................................................................... 13- 8

Chapter 14 Service Mode

14.3.9.5 Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 .................................................................................................... 14- 10

14.6.6 <032Horizontal scan start position adjustment> ........................................................................... 14- 19

14.9 Registration of Accessories (ACC) ........................................................................................................ 14- 24

1.1 System Construction........................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 Pickup/ Delivery /Original Handling Accessories System Configuration (iR2020/iR2020J)

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

1.1.2 Pickup/ Delivery /Original Handling Accessories System Configuration (iR2016/iR2016J)

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

1.1.3 Reader Heater/ Cassette Heater System Configuration

iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 /

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

[1] Reader Heater *1

*1: To operate the heaters, a heater PCB is required.

1.1.4 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (iR2020J/iR2016J)

1.1.5 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration (iR2020/iR2016)

The configuration is as shown in the following figure:

[1] FAX Panel-A1 *1

1.1.6 Functions of the Printing/Transmission Functions (iR2020/iR2016)

UFR II print function (Resolution: 600dpi) ==> UFRII LT Printer Kit-J2

1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts

1.2.1.1 External View ÅiiR2020/iR2020J)

[1] Copyboard cover (*1) [10] Left door

1.2.1.2 External View ÅiiR2016/iR2016J)

[1] Copyboard cover (*1) [9] Left door

iR2016J / iR2016 / iR2020 / / iR2016i / iR2020i

[12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7]